Kernel/linux
1
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git synced 2025-01-12 16:19:53 +00:00
Code Issues Actions Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

ASoC: Fixes for v4.10

Browse Source 
As well as the usual smattering of driver specific fixes collected since
 the merge window this has one particularly important fix to the core for
 handling of aux_devs which was broken during the merge window by some of
 the componentization refactoring.
 -----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE-----
 
 iQFHBAABCAAxFiEEreZoqmdXGLWf4p/qJNaLcl1Uh9AFAlh2as0THGJyb29uaWVA
 a2VybmVsLm9yZwAKCRAk1otyXVSH0LBrB/92Z6gD0GrbQjP6LkMJ0SwmAMjWOOy+
 hDTr8m9CNwSHwQW/L+rAnyS8WBB46jiJ4/mTw6Sz7YIyY0Xdv5RY7IPPuWC92JQd
 jA+0lcfGe0p86ZvVhK2tye+EHTBqKgfIzO2Sl5XNzaQZiw0S8g/FjJIjBABOGkty
 oyK2iYHAW5H7aNVZfoXR9QQBqWniSh5hh06tCDs7Gy90zlKSOoWDUUfux5pubzVR
 mXOxTnie6bU7Rf0IKzdAQ5EI3zt2XT3XtFgv47VYp4bKW8LbkSo8JCVORGymoq+c
 k+Oc8YPbpAY5Jh4tZ9tSup1Ce7DJvE1sf4VOuHkAoXjKO+Pjp+/qTo50
 =KUQm
 -----END PGP SIGNATURE-----

Merge tag 'asoc-fix-v4.10-rc3' into asoc-linus

ASoC: Fixes for v4.10

As well as the usual smattering of driver specific fixes collected since
the merge window this has one particularly important fix to the core for
handling of aux_devs which was broken during the merge window by some of
the componentization refactoring.

# gpg: Signature made Wed 11 Jan 2017 17:26:37 GMT
# gpg:                using RSA key ADE668AA675718B59FE29FEA24D68B725D5487D0
# gpg:                issuer "broonie@kernel.org"
# gpg: key 0D9EACE2CD7BEEBC: no public key for trusted key - skipped
# gpg: key 0D9EACE2CD7BEEBC marked as ultimately trusted
# gpg: key CCB0A420AF88CD16: no public key for trusted key - skipped
# gpg: key CCB0A420AF88CD16 marked as ultimately trusted
# gpg: key 162614E316005C11: no public key for trusted key - skipped
# gpg: key 162614E316005C11 marked as ultimately trusted
# gpg: key A730C53A5621E907: no public key for trusted key - skipped
# gpg: key A730C53A5621E907 marked as ultimately trusted
# gpg: key 276568D75C6153AD: no public key for trusted key - skipped
# gpg: key 276568D75C6153AD marked as ultimately trusted
# gpg: Good signature from "Mark Brown <broonie@sirena.org.uk>" [ultimate]
# gpg:                 aka "Mark Brown <broonie@debian.org>" [ultimate]
# gpg:                 aka "Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>" [ultimate]
# gpg:                 aka "Mark Brown <broonie@tardis.ed.ac.uk>" [ultimate]
# gpg:                 aka "Mark Brown <broonie@linaro.org>" [ultimate]
# gpg:                 aka "Mark Brown <Mark.Brown@linaro.org>" [ultimate]
This commit is contained in:
Mark Brown 2017-02-19 16:35:15 +00:00
commit 389dcb9df6
11405 changed files with 734530 additions and 245110 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

6
CREDITS
View File

@ -2775,6 +2775,10 @@ S: C/ Mieses 20, 9-B
S: Valladolid 47009
S: Spain
N: Peter Oruba
D: AMD Microcode loader driver
S: Germany
N: Jens Osterkamp
E: jens@de.ibm.com
D: Maintainer of Spidernet network driver for Cell
@ -3945,8 +3949,6 @@ E: gwingerde@gmail.com
D: Ralink rt2x00 WLAN driver
D: Minix V2 file-system
D: Misc fixes
S: Geessinkweg 177
S: 7544 TX Enschede
S: The Netherlands
N: Lars Wirzenius

206
Documentation/00-INDEX
View File

@ -14,13 +14,8 @@ Following translations are available on the WWW:
- this file.
ABI/
- info on kernel <-> userspace ABI and relative interface stability.
BUG-HUNTING
- brute force method of doing binary search of patches to find bug.
Changes
- list of changes that break older software packages.
CodingStyle
- how the maintainers expect the C code in the kernel to look.
- nothing here, just a pointer to process/coding-style.rst.
DMA-API.txt
- DMA API, pci_ API & extensions for non-consistent memory machines.
DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
@ -33,8 +28,6 @@ DocBook/
- directory with DocBook templates etc. for kernel documentation.
EDID/
- directory with info on customizing EDID for broken gfx/displays.
HOWTO
- the process and procedures of how to do Linux kernel development.
IPMI.txt
- info on Linux Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Driver.
IRQ-affinity.txt
@ -46,62 +39,43 @@ IRQ.txt
Intel-IOMMU.txt
- basic info on the Intel IOMMU virtualization support.
Makefile
- This file does nothing. Removing it breaks make htmldocs and
make distclean.
ManagementStyle
- how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers.
- It's not of interest for those who aren't touching the build system.
Makefile.sphinx
- It's not of interest for those who aren't touching the build system.
PCI/
- info related to PCI drivers.
RCU/
- directory with info on RCU (read-copy update).
SAK.txt
- info on Secure Attention Keys.
SM501.txt
- Silicon Motion SM501 multimedia companion chip
SecurityBugs
- procedure for reporting security bugs found in the kernel.
SubmitChecklist
- Linux kernel patch submission checklist.
SubmittingDrivers
- procedure to get a new driver source included into the kernel tree.
SubmittingPatches
- procedure to get a source patch included into the kernel tree.
VGA-softcursor.txt
- how to change your VGA cursor from a blinking underscore.
- nothing here, just a pointer to process/coding-style.rst.
accounting/
- documentation on accounting and taskstats.
acpi/
- info on ACPI-specific hooks in the kernel.
admin-guide/
- info related to Linux users and system admins.
aoe/
- description of AoE (ATA over Ethernet) along with config examples.
applying-patches.txt
- description of various trees and how to apply their patches.
arm/
- directory with info about Linux on the ARM architecture.
arm64/
- directory with info about Linux on the 64 bit ARM architecture.
assoc_array.txt
- generic associative array intro.
atomic_ops.txt
- semantics and behavior of atomic and bitmask operations.
auxdisplay/
- misc. LCD driver documentation (cfag12864b, ks0108).
backlight/
- directory with info on controlling backlights in flat panel displays
bad_memory.txt
- how to use kernel parameters to exclude bad RAM regions.
basic_profiling.txt
- basic instructions for those who wants to profile Linux kernel.
bcache.txt
- Block-layer cache on fast SSDs to improve slow (raid) I/O performance.
binfmt_misc.txt
- info on the kernel support for extra binary formats.
blackfin/
- directory with documentation for the Blackfin arch.
block/
- info on the Block I/O (BIO) layer.
blockdev/
- info on block devices & drivers
braille-console.txt
- info on how to use serial devices for Braille support.
bt8xxgpio.txt
- info on how to modify a bt8xx video card for GPIO usage.
btmrvl.txt
@ -114,18 +88,24 @@ cachetlb.txt
- describes the cache/TLB flushing interfaces Linux uses.
cdrom/
- directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has.
cgroups/
- cgroups features, including cpusets and memory controller.
cgroup-v1/
- cgroups v1 features, including cpusets and memory controller.
cgroup-v2.txt
- cgroups v2 features, including cpusets and memory controller.
circular-buffers.txt
- how to make use of the existing circular buffer infrastructure
clk.txt
- info on the common clock framework
coccinelle.txt
- info on how to get and use the Coccinelle code checking tool.
cma/
- Continuous Memory Area (CMA) debugfs interface.
conf.py
- It's not of interest for those who aren't touching the build system.
connector/
- docs on the netlink based userspace<->kernel space communication mod.
console/
- documentation on Linux console drivers.
core-api/
- documentation on kernel core components.
cpu-freq/
- info on CPU frequency and voltage scaling.
cpu-hotplug.txt
@ -150,42 +130,42 @@ debugging-via-ohci1394.txt
- how to use firewire like a hardware debugger memory reader.
dell_rbu.txt
- document demonstrating the use of the Dell Remote BIOS Update driver.
development-process/
- how to work with the mainline kernel development process.
dev-tools/
- directory with info on development tools for the kernel.
device-mapper/
- directory with info on Device Mapper.
devices.txt
- plain ASCII listing of all the nodes in /dev/ with major minor #'s.
dmaengine/
- the DMA engine and controller API guides.
devicetree/
- directory with info on device tree files used by OF/PowerPC/ARM
digsig.txt
-info on the Digital Signature Verification API
dma-buf-sharing.txt
- the DMA Buffer Sharing API Guide
docutils.conf
- nothing here. Just a configuration file for docutils.
dontdiff
- file containing a list of files that should never be diff'ed.
driver-api/
- the Linux driver implementer's API guide.
driver-model/
- directory with info about Linux driver model.
dvb/
- info on Linux Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) subsystem.
dynamic-debug-howto.txt
- how to use the dynamic debug (dyndbg) feature.
early-userspace/
- info about initramfs, klibc, and userspace early during boot.
edac.txt
- information on EDAC - Error Detection And Correction
efi-stub.txt
- How to use the EFI boot stub to bypass GRUB or elilo on EFI systems.
eisa.txt
- info on EISA bus support.
email-clients.txt
- info on how to use e-mail to send un-mangled (git) patches.
extcon/
- directory with porting guide for Android kernel switch driver.
isa.txt
- info on EISA bus support.
fault-injection/
- dir with docs about the fault injection capabilities infrastructure.
fb/
- directory with info on the frame buffer graphics abstraction layer.
features/
- status of feature implementation on different architectures.
filesystems/
- info on the vfs and the various filesystems that Linux supports.
firmware_class/
@ -194,20 +174,22 @@ flexible-arrays.txt
- how to make use of flexible sized arrays in linux
fmc/
- information about the FMC bus abstraction
fpga/
- FPGA Manager Core.
frv/
- Fujitsu FR-V Linux documentation.
futex-requeue-pi.txt
- info on requeueing of tasks from a non-PI futex to a PI futex
gcov.txt
- use of GCC's coverage testing tool "gcov" with the Linux kernel
gcc-plugins.txt
- GCC plugin infrastructure.
gpio/
- gpio related documentation
gpu/
- directory with information on GPU driver developer's guide.
hid/
- directory with information on human interface devices
highuid.txt
- notes on the change from 16 bit to 32 bit user/group IDs.
hsi.txt
- HSI subsystem overview.
hwspinlock.txt
- hardware spinlock provides hardware assistance for synchronization
timers/
@ -218,18 +200,18 @@ hwmon/
- directory with docs on various hardware monitoring drivers.
i2c/
- directory with info about the I2C bus/protocol (2 wire, kHz speed).
i2o/
- directory with info about the Linux I2O subsystem.
x86/i386/
- directory with info about Linux on Intel 32 bit architecture.
ia64/
- directory with info about Linux on Intel 64 bit architecture.
ide/
- Information regarding the Enhanced IDE drive.
iio/
- info on industrial IIO configfs support.
index.rst
- main index for the documentation at ReST format.
infiniband/
- directory with documents concerning Linux InfiniBand support.
init.txt
- what to do when the kernel can't find the 1st process to run.
initrd.txt
- how to use the RAM disk as an initial/temporary root filesystem.
input/
- info on Linux input device support.
intel_txt.txt
@ -248,28 +230,16 @@ isapnp.txt
- info on Linux ISA Plug & Play support.
isdn/
- directory with info on the Linux ISDN support, and supported cards.
java.txt
- info on the in-kernel binary support for Java(tm).
ja_JP/
- directory with Japanese translations of various documents
kbuild/
- directory with info about the kernel build process.
kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
- outdated info about kernel-doc documentation.
kdump/
- directory with mini HowTo on getting the crash dump code to work.
kernel-docs.txt
- listing of various WWW + books that document kernel internals.
kernel-documentation.rst
doc-guide/
- how to write and format reStructuredText kernel documentation
kernel-parameters.txt
- summary listing of command line / boot prompt args for the kernel.
kernel-per-CPU-kthreads.txt
- List of all per-CPU kthreads and how they introduce jitter.
kmemcheck.txt
- info on dynamic checker that detects uses of uninitialized memory.
kmemleak.txt
- info on how to make use of the kernel memory leak detection system
ko_KR/
- directory with Korean translations of various documents
kobject.txt
- info of the kobject infrastructure of the Linux kernel.
kprobes.txt
@ -284,8 +254,8 @@ ldm.txt
- a brief description of LDM (Windows Dynamic Disks).
leds/
- directory with info about LED handling under Linux.
local_ops.txt
- semantics and behavior of local atomic operations.
livepatch/
- info on kernel live patching.
locking/
- directory with info about kernel locking primitives
lockup-watchdogs.txt
@ -298,22 +268,24 @@ lzo.txt
- kernel LZO decompressor input formats
m68k/
- directory with info about Linux on Motorola 68k architecture.
magic-number.txt
- list of magic numbers used to mark/protect kernel data structures.
mailbox.txt
- How to write drivers for the common mailbox framework (IPC).
md.txt
- info on boot arguments for the multiple devices driver.
media-framework.txt
- info on media framework, its data structures, functions and usage.
md-cluster.txt
- info on shared-device RAID MD cluster.
media/
- info on media drivers: uAPI, kAPI and driver documentation.
memory-barriers.txt
- info on Linux kernel memory barriers.
memory-devices/
- directory with info on parts like the Texas Instruments EMIF driver
memory-hotplug.txt
- Hotpluggable memory support, how to use and current status.
men-chameleon-bus.txt
- info on MEN chameleon bus.
metag/
- directory with info about Linux on Meta architecture.
mic/
- Intel Many Integrated Core (MIC) architecture device driver.
mips/
- directory with info about Linux on MIPS architecture.
misc-devices/
@ -322,12 +294,8 @@ mmc/
- directory with info about the MMC subsystem
mn10300/
- directory with info about the mn10300 architecture port
module-signing.txt
- Kernel module signing for increased security when loading modules.
mtd/
- directory with info about memory technology devices (flash)
mono.txt
- how to execute Mono-based .NET binaries with the help of BINFMT_MISC.
namespaces/
- directory with various information about namespaces
netlabel/
@ -336,30 +304,42 @@ networking/
- directory with info on various aspects of networking with Linux.
nfc/
- directory relating info about Near Field Communications support.
nios2/
- Linux on the Nios II architecture.
nommu-mmap.txt
- documentation about no-mmu memory mapping support.
numastat.txt
- info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs.
oops-tracing.txt
- how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages.
ntb.txt
- info on Non-Transparent Bridge (NTB) drivers.
nvdimm/
- info on non-volatile devices.
nvmem/
- info on non volatile memory framework.
output/
- default directory where html/LaTeX/pdf files will be written.
padata.txt
- An introduction to the "padata" parallel execution API
parisc/
- directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture.
parport.txt
- how to use the parallel-port driver.
parport-lowlevel.txt
- description and usage of the low level parallel port functions.
pcmcia/
- info on the Linux PCMCIA driver.
percpu-rw-semaphore.txt
- RCU based read-write semaphore optimized for locking for reading
perf/
- info about the APM X-Gene SoC Performance Monitoring Unit (PMU).
phy/
- ino on Samsung USB 2.0 PHY adaptation layer.
phy.txt
- Description of the generic PHY framework.
pi-futex.txt
- documentation on lightweight priority inheritance futexes.
pinctrl.txt
- info on pinctrl subsystem and the PINMUX/PINCONF and drivers
platform/
- List of supported hardware by compal and Dell laptop.
pnp.txt
- Linux Plug and Play documentation.
power/
@ -372,14 +352,16 @@ preempt-locking.txt
- info on locking under a preemptive kernel.
printk-formats.txt
- how to get printk format specifiers right
process/
- how to work with the mainline kernel development process.
pps/
- directory with information on the pulse-per-second support
pti/
- directory with info on Intel MID PTI.
ptp/
- directory with info on support for IEEE 1588 PTP clocks in Linux.
pwm.txt
- info on the pulse width modulation driver subsystem
ramoops.txt
- documentation of the ramoops oops/panic logging module.
rapidio/
- directory with info on RapidIO packet-based fabric interconnect
rbtree.txt
@ -406,8 +388,6 @@ security/
- directory that contains security-related info
serial/
- directory with info on the low level serial API.
serial-console.txt
- how to set up Linux with a serial line console as the default.
sgi-ioc4.txt
- description of the SGI IOC4 PCI (multi function) device.
sh/
@ -416,24 +396,20 @@ smsc_ece1099.txt
-info on the smsc Keyboard Scan Expansion/GPIO Expansion device.
sound/
- directory with info on sound card support.
sparse.txt
- info on how to obtain and use the sparse tool for typechecking.
spi/
- overview of Linux kernel Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) support.
stable_api_nonsense.txt
- info on why the kernel does not have a stable in-kernel api or abi.
stable_kernel_rules.txt
- rules and procedures for the -stable kernel releases.
sphinx/
- no documentation here, just files required by Sphinx toolchain.
sphinx-static/
- no documentation here, just files required by Sphinx toolchain.
static-keys.txt
- info on how static keys allow debug code in hotpaths via patching
svga.txt
- short guide on selecting video modes at boot via VGA BIOS.
sysfs-rules.txt
- How not to use sysfs.
sync_file.txt
- Sync file API guide.
sysctl/
- directory with info on the /proc/sys/* files.
sysrq.txt
- info on the magic SysRq key.
target/
- directory with info on generating TCM v4 fabric .ko modules
this_cpu_ops.txt
@ -442,39 +418,29 @@ thermal/
- directory with information on managing thermal issues (CPU/temp)
trace/
- directory with info on tracing technologies within linux
translations/
- translations of this document from English to another language
unaligned-memory-access.txt
- info on how to avoid arch breaking unaligned memory access in code.
unicode.txt
- info on the Unicode character/font mapping used in Linux.
unshare.txt
- description of the Linux unshare system call.
usb/
- directory with info regarding the Universal Serial Bus.
vDSO/
- directory with info regarding virtual dynamic shared objects
vfio.txt
- info on Virtual Function I/O used in guest/hypervisor instances.
vgaarbiter.txt
- info on enable/disable the legacy decoding on different VGA devices
video-output.txt
- sysfs class driver interface to enable/disable a video output device.
video4linux/
- directory with info regarding video/TV/radio cards and linux.
virtual/
- directory with information on the various linux virtualizations.
vm/
- directory with info on the Linux vm code.
vme_api.txt
- file relating info on the VME bus API in linux
volatile-considered-harmful.txt
- Why the "volatile" type class should not be used
w1/
- directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem.
watchdog/
- how to auto-reboot Linux if it has "fallen and can't get up". ;-)
wimax/
- directory with info about Intel Wireless Wimax Connections
workqueue.txt
core-api/workqueue.rst
- information on the Concurrency Managed Workqueue implementation
x86/x86_64/
- directory with info on Linux support for AMD x86-64 (Hammer) machines.
@ -484,7 +450,5 @@ xtensa/
- directory with documents relating to arch/xtensa port/implementation
xz.txt
- how to make use of the XZ data compression within linux kernel
zh_CN/
- directory with Chinese translations of various documents
zorro.txt
- info on writing drivers for Zorro bus devices found on Amigas.

2
Documentation/ABI/README
View File

@ -84,4 +84,4 @@ stable:
- Kernel-internal symbols. Do not rely on the presence, absence, location, or
type of any kernel symbol, either in System.map files or the kernel binary
itself. See Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt.
itself. See Documentation/process/stable-api-nonsense.rst.

14
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices
View File

@ -8,3 +8,17 @@ Description:
Any device associated with a device-tree node will have
an of_path symlink pointing to the corresponding device
node in /sys/firmware/devicetree/
What: /sys/devices/*/devspec
Date: October 2016
Contact: Device Tree mailing list <devicetree@vger.kernel.org>
Description:
If CONFIG_OF is enabled, then this file is present. When
read, it returns full name of the device node.
What: /sys/devices/*/obppath
Date: October 2016
Contact: Device Tree mailing list <devicetree@vger.kernel.org>
Description:
If CONFIG_OF is enabled, then this file is present. When
read, it returns full name of the device node.

42
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block
View File

@ -235,3 +235,45 @@ Description:
write_same_max_bytes is 0, write same is not supported
by the device.
What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/write_zeroes_max_bytes
Date: November 2016
Contact: Chaitanya Kulkarni <chaitanya.kulkarni@wdc.com>
Description:
Devices that support write zeroes operation in which a
single request can be issued to zero out the range of
contiguous blocks on storage without having any payload
in the request. This can be used to optimize writing zeroes
to the devices. write_zeroes_max_bytes indicates how many
bytes can be written in a single write zeroes command. If
write_zeroes_max_bytes is 0, write zeroes is not supported
by the device.
What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/zoned
Date: September 2016
Contact: Damien Le Moal <damien.lemoal@hgst.com>
Description:
zoned indicates if the device is a zoned block device
and the zone model of the device if it is indeed zoned.
The possible values indicated by zoned are "none" for
regular block devices and "host-aware" or "host-managed"
for zoned block devices. The characteristics of
host-aware and host-managed zoned block devices are
described in the ZBC (Zoned Block Commands) and ZAC
(Zoned Device ATA Command Set) standards. These standards
also define the "drive-managed" zone model. However,
since drive-managed zoned block devices do not support
zone commands, they will be treated as regular block
devices and zoned will report "none".
What: /sys/block/<disk>/queue/chunk_sectors
Date: September 2016
Contact: Hannes Reinecke <hare@suse.com>
Description:
chunk_sectors has different meaning depending on the type
of the disk. For a RAID device (dm-raid), chunk_sectors
indicates the size in 512B sectors of the RAID volume
stripe segment. For a zoned block device, either
host-aware or host-managed, chunk_sectors indicates the
size of 512B sectors of the zones of the device, with
the eventual exception of the last zone of the device
which may be smaller.

21
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsl-mc Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
What: /sys/bus/fsl-mc/drivers/.../bind
Date: December 2016
Contact: stuart.yoder@nxp.com
Description:
Writing a device location to this file will cause
the driver to attempt to bind to the device found at
this location. The format for the location is Object.Id
and is the same as found in /sys/bus/fsl-mc/devices/.
For example:
# echo dpni.2 > /sys/bus/fsl-mc/drivers/fsl_dpaa2_eth/bind
What: /sys/bus/fsl-mc/drivers/.../unbind
Date: December 2016
Contact: stuart.yoder@nxp.com
Description:
Writing a device location to this file will cause the
driver to attempt to unbind from the device found at
this location. The format for the location is Object.Id
and is the same as found in /sys/bus/fsl-mc/devices/.
For example:
# echo dpni.2 > /sys/bus/fsl-mc/drivers/fsl_dpaa2_eth/unbind

18
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio
View File

@ -329,6 +329,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_sqrt(x^2+y^2+z^2)_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_scale
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@ -1579,3 +1580,20 @@ Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Raw (unscaled no offset etc.) electric conductivity reading that
can be processed to siemens per meter.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_raw
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Raw counter device counts from channel Y. For quadrature
counters, multiplication by an available [Y]_scale results in
the counts of a single quadrature signal phase from channel Y.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_indexY_raw
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Raw counter device index value from channel Y. This attribute
provides an absolute positional reference (e.g. a pulse once per
revolution) which may be used to home positional systems as
required.

36
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-adc-envelope-detector Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_altvoltageY_invert
Date: October 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Peter Rosin <peda@axentia.se>
Description:
The DAC is used to find the peak level of an alternating
voltage input signal by a binary search using the output
of a comparator wired to an interrupt pin. Like so:
_
| \
input +------>-------|+ \
| \
.-------. | }---.
| | | / |
| dac|-->--|- / |
| | |_/ |
| | |
| | |
| irq|------<-------'
| |
'-------'
The boolean invert attribute (0/1) should be set when the
input signal is centered around the maximum value of the
dac instead of zero. The envelope detector will search
from below in this case and will also invert the result.
The edge/level of the interrupt is also switched to its
opposite value.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_altvoltageY_compare_interval
Date: October 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Peter Rosin <peda@axentia.se>
Description:
Number of milliseconds to wait for the comparator in each
step of the binary search for the input peak level. Needs
to relate to the frequency of the input signal.

125
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-counter-104-quad-8 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count_count_direction_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count_count_mode_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count_noise_error_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_count_quadrature_mode_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_index_index_polarity_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_index_synchronous_mode_available
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Discrete set of available values for the respective counter
configuration are listed in this file.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_count_direction
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Read-only attribute that indicates whether the counter for
channel Y is counting up or down.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_count_mode
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Count mode for channel Y. Four count modes are available:
normal, range limit, non-recycle, and modulo-n. The preset value
for channel Y is used by the count mode where required.
Normal:
Counting is continuous in either direction.
Range Limit:
An upper or lower limit is set, mimicking limit switches
in the mechanical counterpart. The upper limit is set to
the preset value, while the lower limit is set to 0. The
counter freezes at count = preset when counting up, and
at count = 0 when counting down. At either of these
limits, the counting is resumed only when the count
direction is reversed.
Non-recycle:
Counter is disabled whenever a 24-bit count overflow or
underflow takes place. The counter is re-enabled when a
new count value is loaded to the counter via a preset
operation or write to raw.
Modulo-N:
A count boundary is set between 0 and the preset value.
The counter is reset to 0 at count = preset when
counting up, while the counter is set to the preset
value at count = 0 when counting down; the counter does
not freeze at the bundary points, but counts
continuously throughout.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_noise_error
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Read-only attribute that indicates whether excessive noise is
present at the channel Y count inputs in quadrature clock mode;
irrelevant in non-quadrature clock mode.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_preset
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
If the counter device supports preset registers, the preset
count for channel Y is provided by this attribute.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_quadrature_mode
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Configure channel Y counter for non-quadrature or quadrature
clock mode. Selecting non-quadrature clock mode will disable
synchronous load mode. In quadrature clock mode, the channel Y
scale attribute selects the encoder phase division (scale of 1
selects full-cycle, scale of 0.5 selects half-cycle, scale of
0.25 selects quarter-cycle) processed by the channel Y counter.
Non-quadrature:
The filter and decoder circuit are bypassed. Encoder A
input serves as the count input and B as the UP/DOWN
direction control input, with B = 1 selecting UP Count
mode and B = 0 selecting Down Count mode.
Quadrature:
Encoder A and B inputs are digitally filtered and
decoded for UP/DN clock.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_countY_set_to_preset_on_index
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Whether to set channel Y counter with channel Y preset value
when channel Y index input is active, or continuously count.
Valid attribute values are boolean.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_indexY_index_polarity
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Active level of channel Y index input; irrelevant in
non-synchronous load mode.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_indexY_synchronous_mode
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Configure channel Y counter for non-synchronous or synchronous
load mode. Synchronous load mode cannot be selected in
non-quadrature clock mode.
Non-synchronous:
A logic low level is the active level at this index
input. The index function (as enabled via
set_to_preset_on_index) is performed directly on the
active level of the index input.
Synchronous:
Intended for interfacing with encoder Index output in
quadrature clock mode. The active level is configured
via index_polarity. The index function (as enabled via
set_to_preset_on_index) is performed synchronously with
the quadrature clock on the active level of the index
input.

18
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-cros-ec Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/calibrate
Date: July 2015
KernelVersion: 4.7
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Writing '1' will perform a FOC (Fast Online Calibration). The
corresponding calibration offsets can be read from *_calibbias
entries.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/location
Date: July 2015
KernelVersion: 4.7
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute returns a string with the physical location where
the motion sensor is placed. For example, in a laptop a motion
sensor can be located on the base or on the lid. Current valid
values are 'base' and 'lid'.

8
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-dac-dpot-dac Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_voltageY_raw_available
Date: October 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Peter Rosin <peda@axentia.se>
Description:
The range of available values represented as the minimum value,
the step and the maximum value, all enclosed in square brackets.
Example: [0 1 256]

19
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-isl29018 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/proximity_on_chip_ambient_infrared_suppression
Date: January 2011
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
From ISL29018 Data Sheet (FN6619.4, Oct 8, 2012) regarding the
infrared suppression:
Scheme 0, makes full n (4, 8, 12, 16) bits (unsigned) proximity
detection. The range of Scheme 0 proximity count is from 0 to
2^n. Logic 1 of this bit, Scheme 1, makes n-1 (3, 7, 11, 15)
bits (2's complementary) proximity_less_ambient detection. The
range of Scheme 1 proximity count is from -2^(n-1) to 2^(n-1).
The sign bit is extended for resolutions less than 16. While
Scheme 0 has wider dynamic range, Scheme 1 proximity detection
is less affected by the ambient IR noise variation.
0 Sensing IR from LED and ambient
1 Sensing IR from LED with ambient IR rejection

18
drivers/staging/iio/Documentation/sysfs-bus-iio-light-tsl2583 → Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-light-tsl2583
View File

@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/device[n]/lux_table
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This property gets/sets the table of coefficients
used in calculating illuminance in lux.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/device[n]/illuminance0_calibrate
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/device[n]/in_illuminance_calibrate
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This property causes an internal calibration of the als gain trim
value which is later used in calculating illuminance in lux.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/device[n]/illuminance0_input_target
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/device[n]/in_illuminance_lux_table
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This property gets/sets the table of coefficients
used in calculating illuminance in lux.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/device[n]/in_illuminance_input_target
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:

8
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-potentiometer-mcp4531 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/out_resistance_raw_available
Date: October 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Peter Rosin <peda@axentia.se>
Description:
The range of available values represented as the minimum value,
the step and the maximum value, all enclosed in square brackets.
Example: [0 1 256]

7
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
View File

@ -294,3 +294,10 @@ Description:
a firmware bug to the system vendor. Writing to this file
taints the kernel with TAINT_FIRMWARE_WORKAROUND, which
reduces the supportability of your system.
What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../revision
Date: November 2016
Contact: Emil Velikov <emil.l.velikov@gmail.com>
Description:
This file contains the revision field of the the PCI device.
The value comes from device config space. The file is read only.

111
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-vfio-mdev Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
What: /sys/.../<device>/mdev_supported_types/
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
This directory contains list of directories of currently
supported mediated device types and their details for
<device>. Supported type attributes are defined by the
vendor driver who registers with Mediated device framework.
Each supported type is a directory whose name is created
by adding the device driver string as a prefix to the
string provided by the vendor driver.
What: /sys/.../<device>/mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
This directory gives details of supported type, like name,
description, available_instances, device_api etc.
'device_api' and 'available_instances' are mandatory
attributes to be provided by vendor driver. 'name',
'description' and other vendor driver specific attributes
are optional.
What: /sys/.../mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/create
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
Writing UUID to this file will create mediated device of
type <type-id> for parent device <device>. This is a
write-only file.
For example:
# echo "83b8f4f2-509f-382f-3c1e-e6bfe0fa1001" > \
/sys/devices/foo/mdev_supported_types/foo-1/create
What: /sys/.../mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/devices/
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
This directory contains symbolic links pointing to mdev
devices sysfs entries which are created of this <type-id>.
What: /sys/.../mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/available_instances
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
Reading this attribute will show the number of mediated
devices of type <type-id> that can be created. This is a
readonly file.
Users:
Userspace applications interested in creating mediated
device of that type. Userspace application should check
the number of available instances could be created before
creating mediated device of this type.
What: /sys/.../mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/device_api
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
Reading this attribute will show VFIO device API supported
by this type. For example, "vfio-pci" for a PCI device,
"vfio-platform" for platform device.
What: /sys/.../mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/name
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
Reading this attribute will show human readable name of the
mediated device that will get created of type <type-id>.
This is optional attribute. For example: "Grid M60-0Q"
Users:
Userspace applications interested in knowing the name of
a particular <type-id> that can help in understanding the
type of mediated device.
What: /sys/.../mdev_supported_types/<type-id>/description
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
Reading this attribute will show description of the type of
mediated device that will get created of type <type-id>.
This is optional attribute. For example:
"2 heads, 512M FB, 2560x1600 maximum resolution"
Users:
Userspace applications interested in knowing the details of
a particular <type-id> that can help in understanding the
features provided by that type of mediated device.
What: /sys/.../<device>/<UUID>/
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
This directory represents device directory of mediated
device. It contains all the attributes related to mediated
device.
What: /sys/.../<device>/<UUID>/mdev_type
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
This is symbolic link pointing to supported type, <type-id>
directory of which this mediated device is created.
What: /sys/.../<device>/<UUID>/remove
Date: October 2016
Contact: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com>
Description:
Writing '1' to this file destroys the mediated device. The
vendor driver can fail the remove() callback if that device
is active and the vendor driver doesn't support hot unplug.
Example:
# echo 1 > /sys/bus/mdev/devices/<UUID>/remove

11
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-fpga-bridge Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
What: /sys/class/fpga_bridge/<bridge>/name
Date: January 2016
KernelVersion: 4.5
Contact: Alan Tull <atull@opensource.altera.com>
Description: Name of low level FPGA bridge driver.
What: /sys/class/fpga_bridge/<bridge>/state
Date: January 2016
KernelVersion: 4.5
Contact: Alan Tull <atull@opensource.altera.com>
Description: Show bridge state as "enabled" or "disabled"

14
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led
View File

@ -4,16 +4,24 @@ KernelVersion: 2.6.17
Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net>
Description:
Set the brightness of the LED. Most LEDs don't
have hardware brightness support so will just be turned on for
have hardware brightness support, so will just be turned on for
non-zero brightness settings. The value is between 0 and
/sys/class/leds/<led>/max_brightness.
Writing 0 to this file clears active trigger.
Writing non-zero to this file while trigger is active changes the
top brightness trigger is going to use.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/max_brightness
Date: March 2006
KernelVersion: 2.6.17
Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net>
Description:
Maximum brightness level for this led, default is 255 (LED_FULL).
Maximum brightness level for this LED, default is 255 (LED_FULL).
If the LED does not support different brightness levels, this
should be 1.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/trigger
Date: March 2006
@ -21,7 +29,7 @@ KernelVersion: 2.6.17
Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net>
Description:
Set the trigger for this LED. A trigger is a kernel based source
of led events.
of LED events.
You can change triggers in a similar manner to the way an IO
scheduler is chosen. Trigger specific parameters can appear in
/sys/class/leds/<led> once a given trigger is selected. For

16
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mei
View File

@ -29,3 +29,19 @@ Description: Display fw status registers content
Also number of registers varies between 1 and 6
depending on generation.
What: /sys/class/mei/meiN/hbm_ver
Date: Aug 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com>
Description: Display the negotiated HBM protocol version.
The HBM protocol version negotiated
between the driver and the device.
What: /sys/class/mei/meiN/hbm_ver_drv
Date: Aug 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Tomas Winkler <tomas.winkler@intel.com>
Description: Display the driver HBM protocol version.
The HBM protocol version supported by the driver.

50
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-remoteproc Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
What: /sys/class/remoteproc/.../firmware
Date: October 2016
Contact: Matt Redfearn <matt.redfearn@imgtec.com>
Description: Remote processor firmware
Reports the name of the firmware currently loaded to the
remote processor.
To change the running firmware, ensure the remote processor is
stopped (using /sys/class/remoteproc/.../state) and write a new filename.
What: /sys/class/remoteproc/.../state
Date: October 2016
Contact: Matt Redfearn <matt.redfearn@imgtec.com>
Description: Remote processor state
Reports the state of the remote processor, which will be one of:
"offline"
"suspended"
"running"
"crashed"
"invalid"
"offline" means the remote processor is powered off.
"suspended" means that the remote processor is suspended and
must be woken to receive messages.
"running" is the normal state of an available remote processor
"crashed" indicates that a problem/crash has been detected on
the remote processor.
"invalid" is returned if the remote processor is in an
unknown state.
Writing this file controls the state of the remote processor.
The following states can be written:
"start"
"stop"
Writing "start" will attempt to start the processor running the
firmware indicated by, or written to,
/sys/class/remoteproc/.../firmware. The remote processor should
transition to "running" state.
Writing "stop" will attempt to halt the remote processor and
return it to the "offline" state.

5
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-rtc-rtc0-device-rtc_calibration
View File

@ -1,8 +1,9 @@
What: Attribute for calibrating ST-Ericsson AB8500 Real Time Clock
What: /sys/class/rtc/rtc0/device/rtc_calibration
Date: Oct 2011
KernelVersion: 3.0
Contact: Mark Godfrey <mark.godfrey@stericsson.com>
Description: The rtc_calibration attribute allows the userspace to
Description: Attribute for calibrating ST-Ericsson AB8500 Real Time Clock
The rtc_calibration attribute allows the userspace to
calibrate the AB8500.s 32KHz Real Time Clock.
Every 60 seconds the AB8500 will correct the RTC's value
by adding to it the value of this attribute.

12
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-deferred_probe Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
What: /sys/devices/.../deferred_probe
Date: August 2016
Contact: Ben Hutchings <ben.hutchings@codethink.co.uk>
Description:
The /sys/devices/.../deferred_probe attribute is
present for all devices. If a driver detects during
probing a device that a related device is not yet
ready, it may defer probing of the first device. The
kernel will retry probing the first device after any
other device is successfully probed. This attribute
reads as 1 if probing of this device is currently
deferred, or 0 otherwise.

16
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu
View File

@ -272,6 +272,22 @@ Description: Parameters for the CPU cache attributes
the modified cache line is written to main
memory only when it is replaced
What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index*/id
Date: September 2016
Contact: Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
Description: Cache id
The id provides a unique number for a specific instance of
a cache of a particular type. E.g. there may be a level
3 unified cache on each socket in a server and we may
assign them ids 0, 1, 2, ...
Note that id value can be non-contiguous. E.g. level 1
caches typically exist per core, but there may not be a
power of two cores on a socket, so these caches may be
numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, ...
What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/cpufreq/throttle_stats
/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/cpufreq/throttle_stats/turbo_stat
/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/cpufreq/throttle_stats/sub_turbo_stat

2
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-slab
View File

@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Description:
because of fragmentation, SLUB will retry with the minimum order
possible depending on its characteristics.
When debug_guardpage_minorder=N (N > 0) parameter is specified
(see Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt), the minimum possible
(see Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst), the minimum possible
order is used and this sysfs entry can not be used to change
the order at run time.

15
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-phy-rcar-gen3-usb2 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
What: /sys/devices/platform/<phy-name>/role
Date: October 2016
KernelVersion: 4.10
Contact: Yoshihiro Shimoda <yoshihiro.shimoda.uh@renesas.com>
Description:
This file can be read and write.
The file can show/change the phy mode for role swap of usb.
Write the following strings to change the mode:
"host" - switching mode from peripheral to host.
"peripheral" - switching mode from host to peripheral.
Read the file, then it shows the following strings:
"host" - The mode is host now.
"peripheral" - The mode is peripheral now.

17
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-sst-atom Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
What: /sys/devices/platform/8086%x:00/firmware_version
Date: November 2016
KernelVersion: 4.10
Contact: "Sebastien Guiriec" <sebastien.guiriec@intel.com>
Description:
LPE Firmware version for SST driver on all atom
plaforms (BYT/CHT/Merrifield/BSW).
If the FW has never been loaded it will display:
"FW not yet loaded"
If FW has been loaded it will display:
"v01.aa.bb.cc"
aa: Major version is reflecting SoC version:
0d: BYT FW
0b: BSW FW
07: Merrifield FW
bb: Minor version
cc: Build version

43
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power
View File

@ -7,30 +7,35 @@ Description:
subsystem.
What: /sys/power/state
Date: May 2014
Date: November 2016
Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
Description:
The /sys/power/state file controls system sleep states.
Reading from this file returns the available sleep state
labels, which may be "mem", "standby", "freeze" and "disk"
(hibernation). The meanings of the first three labels depend on
the relative_sleep_states command line argument as follows:
1) relative_sleep_states = 1
"mem", "standby", "freeze" represent non-hibernation sleep
states from the deepest ("mem", always present) to the
shallowest ("freeze"). "standby" and "freeze" may or may
not be present depending on the capabilities of the
platform. "freeze" can only be present if "standby" is
present.
2) relative_sleep_states = 0 (default)
"mem" - "suspend-to-RAM", present if supported.
"standby" - "power-on suspend", present if supported.
"freeze" - "suspend-to-idle", always present.
labels, which may be "mem" (suspend), "standby" (power-on
suspend), "freeze" (suspend-to-idle) and "disk" (hibernation).
Writing to this file one of these strings causes the system to
transition into the corresponding state, if available. See
Documentation/power/states.txt for a description of what
"suspend-to-RAM", "power-on suspend" and "suspend-to-idle" mean.
Writing one of the above strings to this file causes the system
to transition into the corresponding state, if available.
See Documentation/power/states.txt for more information.
What: /sys/power/mem_sleep
Date: November 2016
Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@rjwysocki.net>
Description:
The /sys/power/mem_sleep file controls the operating mode of
system suspend. Reading from it returns the available modes
as "s2idle" (always present), "shallow" and "deep" (present if
supported). The mode that will be used on subsequent attempts
to suspend the system (by writing "mem" to the /sys/power/state
file described above) is enclosed in square brackets.
Writing one of the above strings to this file causes the mode
represented by it to be used on subsequent attempts to suspend
the system.
See Documentation/power/states.txt for more information.
What: /sys/power/disk
Date: September 2006

246
Documentation/BUG-HUNTING
View File

@ -1,246 +0,0 @@
Table of contents
=================
Last updated: 20 December 2005
Contents
========
- Introduction
- Devices not appearing
- Finding patch that caused a bug
-- Finding using git-bisect
-- Finding it the old way
- Fixing the bug
Introduction
============
Always try the latest kernel from kernel.org and build from source. If you are
not confident in doing that please report the bug to your distribution vendor
instead of to a kernel developer.
Finding bugs is not always easy. Have a go though. If you can't find it don't
give up. Report as much as you have found to the relevant maintainer. See
MAINTAINERS for who that is for the subsystem you have worked on.
Before you submit a bug report read REPORTING-BUGS.
Devices not appearing
=====================
Often this is caused by udev. Check that first before blaming it on the
kernel.
Finding patch that caused a bug
===============================
Finding using git-bisect
------------------------
Using the provided tools with git makes finding bugs easy provided the bug is
reproducible.
Steps to do it:
- start using git for the kernel source
- read the man page for git-bisect
- have fun
Finding it the old way
----------------------
[Sat Mar 2 10:32:33 PST 1996 KERNEL_BUG-HOWTO lm@sgi.com (Larry McVoy)]
This is how to track down a bug if you know nothing about kernel hacking.
It's a brute force approach but it works pretty well.
You need:
. A reproducible bug - it has to happen predictably (sorry)
. All the kernel tar files from a revision that worked to the
revision that doesn't
You will then do:
. Rebuild a revision that you believe works, install, and verify that.
. Do a binary search over the kernels to figure out which one
introduced the bug. I.e., suppose 1.3.28 didn't have the bug, but
you know that 1.3.69 does. Pick a kernel in the middle and build
that, like 1.3.50. Build & test; if it works, pick the mid point
between .50 and .69, else the mid point between .28 and .50.
. You'll narrow it down to the kernel that introduced the bug. You
can probably do better than this but it gets tricky.
. Narrow it down to a subdirectory
- Copy kernel that works into "test". Let's say that 3.62 works,
but 3.63 doesn't. So you diff -r those two kernels and come
up with a list of directories that changed. For each of those
directories:
Copy the non-working directory next to the working directory
as "dir.63".
One directory at time, try moving the working directory to
"dir.62" and mv dir.63 dir"time, try
mv dir dir.62
mv dir.63 dir
find dir -name '*.[oa]' -print | xargs rm -f
And then rebuild and retest. Assuming that all related
changes were contained in the sub directory, this should
isolate the change to a directory.
Problems: changes in header files may have occurred; I've
found in my case that they were self explanatory - you may
or may not want to give up when that happens.
. Narrow it down to a file
- You can apply the same technique to each file in the directory,
hoping that the changes in that file are self contained.
. Narrow it down to a routine
- You can take the old file and the new file and manually create
a merged file that has
#ifdef VER62
routine()
{
...
}
#else
routine()
{
...
}
#endif
And then walk through that file, one routine at a time and
prefix it with
#define VER62
/* both routines here */
#undef VER62
Then recompile, retest, move the ifdefs until you find the one
that makes the difference.
Finally, you take all the info that you have, kernel revisions, bug
description, the extent to which you have narrowed it down, and pass
that off to whomever you believe is the maintainer of that section.
A post to linux.dev.kernel isn't such a bad idea if you've done some
work to narrow it down.
If you get it down to a routine, you'll probably get a fix in 24 hours.
My apologies to Linus and the other kernel hackers for describing this
brute force approach, it's hardly what a kernel hacker would do. However,
it does work and it lets non-hackers help fix bugs. And it is cool
because Linux snapshots will let you do this - something that you can't
do with vendor supplied releases.
Fixing the bug
==============
Nobody is going to tell you how to fix bugs. Seriously. You need to work it
out. But below are some hints on how to use the tools.
To debug a kernel, use objdump and look for the hex offset from the crash
output to find the valid line of code/assembler. Without debug symbols, you
will see the assembler code for the routine shown, but if your kernel has
debug symbols the C code will also be available. (Debug symbols can be enabled
in the kernel hacking menu of the menu configuration.) For example:
objdump -r -S -l --disassemble net/dccp/ipv4.o
NB.: you need to be at the top level of the kernel tree for this to pick up
your C files.
If you don't have access to the code you can also debug on some crash dumps
e.g. crash dump output as shown by Dave Miller.
> EIP is at ip_queue_xmit+0x14/0x4c0
> ...
> Code: 44 24 04 e8 6f 05 00 00 e9 e8 fe ff ff 8d 76 00 8d bc 27 00 00
> 00 00 55 57 56 53 81 ec bc 00 00 00 8b ac 24 d0 00 00 00 8b 5d 08
> <8b> 83 3c 01 00 00 89 44 24 14 8b 45 28 85 c0 89 44 24 18 0f 85
>
> Put the bytes into a "foo.s" file like this:
>
> .text
> .globl foo
> foo:
> .byte .... /* bytes from Code: part of OOPS dump */
>
> Compile it with "gcc -c -o foo.o foo.s" then look at the output of
> "objdump --disassemble foo.o".
>
> Output:
>
> ip_queue_xmit:
> push %ebp
> push %edi
> push %esi
> push %ebx
> sub $0xbc, %esp
> mov 0xd0(%esp), %ebp ! %ebp = arg0 (skb)
> mov 0x8(%ebp), %ebx ! %ebx = skb->sk
> mov 0x13c(%ebx), %eax ! %eax = inet_sk(sk)->opt
In addition, you can use GDB to figure out the exact file and line
number of the OOPS from the vmlinux file. If you have
CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO enabled, you can simply copy the EIP value from the
OOPS:
EIP: 0060:[<c021e50e>] Not tainted VLI
And use GDB to translate that to human-readable form:
gdb vmlinux
(gdb) l *0xc021e50e
If you don't have CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO enabled, you use the function
offset from the OOPS:
EIP is at vt_ioctl+0xda8/0x1482
And recompile the kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO enabled:
make vmlinux
gdb vmlinux
(gdb) p vt_ioctl
(gdb) l *(0x<address of vt_ioctl> + 0xda8)
or, as one command
(gdb) l *(vt_ioctl + 0xda8)
If you have a call trace, such as :-
>Call Trace:
> [<ffffffff8802c8e9>] :jbd:log_wait_commit+0xa3/0xf5
> [<ffffffff810482d9>] autoremove_wake_function+0x0/0x2e
> [<ffffffff8802770b>] :jbd:journal_stop+0x1be/0x1ee
> ...
this shows the problem in the :jbd: module. You can load that module in gdb
and list the relevant code.
gdb fs/jbd/jbd.ko
(gdb) p log_wait_commit
(gdb) l *(0x<address> + 0xa3)
or
(gdb) l *(log_wait_commit + 0xa3)
Another very useful option of the Kernel Hacking section in menuconfig is
Debug memory allocations. This will help you see whether data has been
initialised and not set before use etc. To see the values that get assigned
with this look at mm/slab.c and search for POISON_INUSE. When using this an
Oops will often show the poisoned data instead of zero which is the default.
Once you have worked out a fix please submit it upstream. After all open
source is about sharing what you do and don't you want to be recognised for
your genius?
Please do read Documentation/SubmittingPatches though to help your code get
accepted.

485
Documentation/Changes
View File

@ -1,485 +0,0 @@
.. _changes:
Minimal requerements to compile the Kernel
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Intro
=====
This document is designed to provide a list of the minimum levels of
software necessary to run the 4.x kernels.
This document is originally based on my "Changes" file for 2.0.x kernels
and therefore owes credit to the same people as that file (Jared Mauch,
Axel Boldt, Alessandro Sigala, and countless other users all over the
'net).
Current Minimal Requirements
****************************
Upgrade to at **least** these software revisions before thinking you've
encountered a bug! If you're unsure what version you're currently
running, the suggested command should tell you.
Again, keep in mind that this list assumes you are already functionally
running a Linux kernel. Also, not all tools are necessary on all
systems; obviously, if you don't have any ISDN hardware, for example,
you probably needn't concern yourself with isdn4k-utils.
====================== =============== ========================================
Program Minimal version Command to check the version
====================== =============== ========================================
GNU C 3.2 gcc --version
GNU make 3.80 make --version
binutils 2.12 ld -v
util-linux 2.10o fdformat --version
module-init-tools 0.9.10 depmod -V
e2fsprogs 1.41.4 e2fsck -V
jfsutils 1.1.3 fsck.jfs -V
reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 reiserfsck -V
xfsprogs 2.6.0 xfs_db -V
squashfs-tools 4.0 mksquashfs -version
btrfs-progs 0.18 btrfsck
pcmciautils 004 pccardctl -V
quota-tools 3.09 quota -V
PPP 2.4.0 pppd --version
isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version
nfs-utils 1.0.5 showmount --version
procps 3.2.0 ps --version
oprofile 0.9 oprofiled --version
udev 081 udevd --version
grub 0.93 grub --version || grub-install --version
mcelog 0.6 mcelog --version
iptables 1.4.2 iptables -V
openssl & libcrypto 1.0.0 openssl version
bc 1.06.95 bc --version
Sphinx\ [#f1]_ 1.2 sphinx-build --version
====================== =============== ========================================
.. [#f1] Sphinx is needed only to build the Kernel documentation
Kernel compilation
******************
GCC
---
The gcc version requirements may vary depending on the type of CPU in your
computer.
Make
----
You will need GNU make 3.80 or later to build the kernel.
Binutils
--------
Linux on IA-32 has recently switched from using ``as86`` to using ``gas`` for
assembling the 16-bit boot code, removing the need for ``as86`` to compile
your kernel. This change does, however, mean that you need a recent
release of binutils.
Perl
----
You will need perl 5 and the following modules: ``Getopt::Long``,
``Getopt::Std``, ``File::Basename``, and ``File::Find`` to build the kernel.
BC
--
You will need bc to build kernels 3.10 and higher
OpenSSL
-------
Module signing and external certificate handling use the OpenSSL program and
crypto library to do key creation and signature generation.
You will need openssl to build kernels 3.7 and higher if module signing is
enabled. You will also need openssl development packages to build kernels 4.3
and higher.
System utilities
****************
Architectural changes
---------------------
DevFS has been obsoleted in favour of udev
(http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/hotplug/)
32-bit UID support is now in place. Have fun!
Linux documentation for functions is transitioning to inline
documentation via specially-formatted comments near their
definitions in the source. These comments can be combined with the
SGML templates in the Documentation/DocBook directory to make DocBook
files, which can then be converted by DocBook stylesheets to PostScript,
HTML, PDF files, and several other formats. In order to convert from
DocBook format to a format of your choice, you'll need to install Jade as
well as the desired DocBook stylesheets.
Util-linux
----------
New versions of util-linux provide ``fdisk`` support for larger disks,
support new options to mount, recognize more supported partition
types, have a fdformat which works with 2.4 kernels, and similar goodies.
You'll probably want to upgrade.
Ksymoops
--------
If the unthinkable happens and your kernel oopses, you may need the
ksymoops tool to decode it, but in most cases you don't.
It is generally preferred to build the kernel with ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` so
that it produces readable dumps that can be used as-is (this also
produces better output than ksymoops). If for some reason your kernel
is not build with ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` and you have no way to rebuild and
reproduce the Oops with that option, then you can still decode that Oops
with ksymoops.
Module-Init-Tools
-----------------
A new module loader is now in the kernel that requires ``module-init-tools``
to use. It is backward compatible with the 2.4.x series kernels.
Mkinitrd
--------
These changes to the ``/lib/modules`` file tree layout also require that
mkinitrd be upgraded.
E2fsprogs
---------
The latest version of ``e2fsprogs`` fixes several bugs in fsck and
debugfs. Obviously, it's a good idea to upgrade.
JFSutils
--------
The ``jfsutils`` package contains the utilities for the file system.
The following utilities are available:
- ``fsck.jfs`` - initiate replay of the transaction log, and check
and repair a JFS formatted partition.
- ``mkfs.jfs`` - create a JFS formatted partition.
- other file system utilities are also available in this package.
Reiserfsprogs
-------------
The reiserfsprogs package should be used for reiserfs-3.6.x
(Linux kernels 2.4.x). It is a combined package and contains working
versions of ``mkreiserfs``, ``resize_reiserfs``, ``debugreiserfs`` and
``reiserfsck``. These utils work on both i386 and alpha platforms.
Xfsprogs
--------
The latest version of ``xfsprogs`` contains ``mkfs.xfs``, ``xfs_db``, and the
``xfs_repair`` utilities, among others, for the XFS filesystem. It is
architecture independent and any version from 2.0.0 onward should
work correctly with this version of the XFS kernel code (2.6.0 or
later is recommended, due to some significant improvements).
PCMCIAutils
-----------
PCMCIAutils replaces ``pcmcia-cs``. It properly sets up
PCMCIA sockets at system startup and loads the appropriate modules
for 16-bit PCMCIA devices if the kernel is modularized and the hotplug
subsystem is used.
Quota-tools
-----------
Support for 32 bit uid's and gid's is required if you want to use
the newer version 2 quota format. Quota-tools version 3.07 and
newer has this support. Use the recommended version or newer
from the table above.
Intel IA32 microcode
--------------------
A driver has been added to allow updating of Intel IA32 microcode,
accessible as a normal (misc) character device. If you are not using
udev you may need to::
mkdir /dev/cpu
mknod /dev/cpu/microcode c 10 184
chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode
as root before you can use this. You'll probably also want to
get the user-space microcode_ctl utility to use with this.
udev
----
``udev`` is a userspace application for populating ``/dev`` dynamically with
only entries for devices actually present. ``udev`` replaces the basic
functionality of devfs, while allowing persistent device naming for
devices.
FUSE
----
Needs libfuse 2.4.0 or later. Absolute minimum is 2.3.0 but mount
options ``direct_io`` and ``kernel_cache`` won't work.
Networking
**********
General changes
---------------
If you have advanced network configuration needs, you should probably
consider using the network tools from ip-route2.
Packet Filter / NAT
-------------------
The packet filtering and NAT code uses the same tools like the previous 2.4.x
kernel series (iptables). It still includes backwards-compatibility modules
for 2.2.x-style ipchains and 2.0.x-style ipfwadm.
PPP
---
The PPP driver has been restructured to support multilink and to
enable it to operate over diverse media layers. If you use PPP,
upgrade pppd to at least 2.4.0.
If you are not using udev, you must have the device file /dev/ppp
which can be made by::
mknod /dev/ppp c 108 0
as root.
Isdn4k-utils
------------
Due to changes in the length of the phone number field, isdn4k-utils
needs to be recompiled or (preferably) upgraded.
NFS-utils
---------
In ancient (2.4 and earlier) kernels, the nfs server needed to know
about any client that expected to be able to access files via NFS. This
information would be given to the kernel by ``mountd`` when the client
mounted the filesystem, or by ``exportfs`` at system startup. exportfs
would take information about active clients from ``/var/lib/nfs/rmtab``.
This approach is quite fragile as it depends on rmtab being correct
which is not always easy, particularly when trying to implement
fail-over. Even when the system is working well, ``rmtab`` suffers from
getting lots of old entries that never get removed.
With modern kernels we have the option of having the kernel tell mountd
when it gets a request from an unknown host, and mountd can give
appropriate export information to the kernel. This removes the
dependency on ``rmtab`` and means that the kernel only needs to know about
currently active clients.
To enable this new functionality, you need to::
mount -t nfsd nfsd /proc/fs/nfsd
before running exportfs or mountd. It is recommended that all NFS
services be protected from the internet-at-large by a firewall where
that is possible.
mcelog
------
On x86 kernels the mcelog utility is needed to process and log machine check
events when ``CONFIG_X86_MCE`` is enabled. Machine check events are errors
reported by the CPU. Processing them is strongly encouraged.
Kernel documentation
********************
Sphinx
------
The ReST markups currently used by the Documentation/ files are meant to be
built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.2 or upper. If you're desiring to build
PDF outputs, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6.
.. note::
Please notice that, for PDF and LaTeX output, you'll also need ``XeLaTeX``
version 3.14159265. Depending on the distribution, you may also need
to install a series of ``texlive`` packages that provide the minimal
set of functionalities required for ``XeLaTex`` to work.
Other tools
-----------
In order to produce documentation from DocBook, you'll also need ``xmlto``.
Please notice, however, that we're currently migrating all documents to use
``Sphinx``.
Getting updated software
========================
Kernel compilation
******************
gcc
---
- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/>
Make
----
- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/make/>
Binutils
--------
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/devel/binutils/>
OpenSSL
-------
- <https://www.openssl.org/>
System utilities
****************
Util-linux
----------
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/>
Ksymoops
--------
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/v2.4/>
Module-Init-Tools
-----------------
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/rusty/modules/>
Mkinitrd
--------
- <https://code.launchpad.net/initrd-tools/main>
E2fsprogs
---------
- <http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/e2fsprogs/e2fsprogs-1.29.tar.gz>
JFSutils
--------
- <http://jfs.sourceforge.net/>
Reiserfsprogs
-------------
- <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/fs/reiserfs/>
Xfsprogs
--------
- <ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/>
Pcmciautils
-----------
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/>
Quota-tools
-----------
- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota/>
DocBook Stylesheets
-------------------
- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-dsssl/>
XMLTO XSLT Frontend
-------------------
- <http://cyberelk.net/tim/xmlto/>
Intel P6 microcode
------------------
- <https://downloadcenter.intel.com/>
udev
----
- <http://www.freedesktop.org/software/systemd/man/udev.html>
FUSE
----
- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/fuse>
mcelog
------
- <http://www.mcelog.org/>
Networking
**********
PPP
---
- <ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/>
Isdn4k-utils
------------
- <ftp://ftp.isdn4linux.de/pub/isdn4linux/utils/>
NFS-utils
---------
- <http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=14>
Iptables
--------
- <http://www.iptables.org/downloads.html>
Ip-route2
---------
- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/iproute2/>
OProfile
--------
- <http://oprofile.sf.net/download/>
NFS-Utils
---------
- <http://nfs.sourceforge.net/>
Kernel documentation
********************
Sphinx
------
- <http://www.sphinx-doc.org/>

1
Documentation/Changes Symbolic link
View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
process/changes.rst

1063
Documentation/CodingStyle
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

9
Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
View File

@ -9,13 +9,11 @@
DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml \
kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml kgdb.xml \
gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \
tracepoint.xml w1.xml \
writing_musb_glue_layer.xml crypto-API.xml iio.xml
sh.xml regulator.xml w1.xml \
writing_musb_glue_layer.xml iio.xml
ifeq ($(DOCBOOKS),)
@ -264,6 +262,7 @@ clean-files := $(DOCBOOKS) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.aux.xml, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.xml.db, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, %.xml, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(patsubst %.xml, .%.xml.cmd, $(DOCBOOKS)) \
$(index)
clean-dirs := $(patsubst %.xml,%,$(DOCBOOKS)) man

142
Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
View File

@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<!-- ****************************************************** -->
<!-- Header -->
<!-- ****************************************************** -->
<book id="ALSA-Driver-API">
<bookinfo>
<title>The ALSA Driver API</title>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This document is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
</para>
<para>
This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but <emphasis>WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY</emphasis>; without even the
implied warranty of <emphasis>MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE</emphasis>. See the GNU General Public License
for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter><title>Management of Cards and Devices</title>
<sect1><title>Card Management</title>
!Esound/core/init.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device Components</title>
!Esound/core/device.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Module requests and Device File Entries</title>
!Esound/core/sound.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Memory Management Helpers</title>
!Esound/core/memory.c
!Esound/core/memalloc.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>PCM API</title>
<sect1><title>PCM Core</title>
!Esound/core/pcm.c
!Esound/core/pcm_lib.c
!Esound/core/pcm_native.c
!Iinclude/sound/pcm.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>PCM Format Helpers</title>
!Esound/core/pcm_misc.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>PCM Memory Management</title>
!Esound/core/pcm_memory.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>PCM DMA Engine API</title>
!Esound/core/pcm_dmaengine.c
!Iinclude/sound/dmaengine_pcm.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>Control/Mixer API</title>
<sect1><title>General Control Interface</title>
!Esound/core/control.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>AC97 Codec API</title>
!Esound/pci/ac97/ac97_codec.c
!Esound/pci/ac97/ac97_pcm.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Virtual Master Control API</title>
!Esound/core/vmaster.c
!Iinclude/sound/control.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>MIDI API</title>
<sect1><title>Raw MIDI API</title>
!Esound/core/rawmidi.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>MPU401-UART API</title>
!Esound/drivers/mpu401/mpu401_uart.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>Proc Info API</title>
<sect1><title>Proc Info Interface</title>
!Esound/core/info.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>Compress Offload</title>
<sect1><title>Compress Offload API</title>
!Esound/core/compress_offload.c
!Iinclude/uapi/sound/compress_offload.h
!Iinclude/uapi/sound/compress_params.h
!Iinclude/sound/compress_driver.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>ASoC</title>
<sect1><title>ASoC Core API</title>
!Iinclude/sound/soc.h
!Esound/soc/soc-core.c
<!-- !Esound/soc/soc-cache.c no docbook comments here -->
!Esound/soc/soc-devres.c
!Esound/soc/soc-io.c
!Esound/soc/soc-pcm.c
!Esound/soc/soc-ops.c
!Esound/soc/soc-compress.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>ASoC DAPM API</title>
!Esound/soc/soc-dapm.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>ASoC DMA Engine API</title>
!Esound/soc/soc-generic-dmaengine-pcm.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter><title>Miscellaneous Functions</title>
<sect1><title>Hardware-Dependent Devices API</title>
!Esound/core/hwdep.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Jack Abstraction Layer API</title>
!Iinclude/sound/jack.h
!Esound/core/jack.c
!Esound/soc/soc-jack.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>ISA DMA Helpers</title>
!Esound/core/isadma.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Other Helper Macros</title>
!Iinclude/sound/core.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>

2092
Documentation/DocBook/crypto-API.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

443
Documentation/DocBook/debugobjects.tmpl
View File

@ -1,443 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="debug-objects-guide">
<bookinfo>
<title>Debug objects life time</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Thomas</firstname>
<surname>Gleixner</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>tglx@linutronix.de</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<copyright>
<year>2008</year>
<holder>Thomas Gleixner</holder>
</copyright>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
debugobjects is a generic infrastructure to track the life time
of kernel objects and validate the operations on those.
</para>
<para>
debugobjects is useful to check for the following error patterns:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>Activation of uninitialized objects</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Initialization of active objects</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Usage of freed/destroyed objects</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>
debugobjects is not changing the data structure of the real
object so it can be compiled in with a minimal runtime impact
and enabled on demand with a kernel command line option.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="howto">
<title>Howto use debugobjects</title>
<para>
A kernel subsystem needs to provide a data structure which
describes the object type and add calls into the debug code at
appropriate places. The data structure to describe the object
type needs at minimum the name of the object type. Optional
functions can and should be provided to fixup detected problems
so the kernel can continue to work and the debug information can
be retrieved from a live system instead of hard core debugging
with serial consoles and stack trace transcripts from the
monitor.
</para>
<para>
The debug calls provided by debugobjects are:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>debug_object_init</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>debug_object_init_on_stack</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>debug_object_activate</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>debug_object_deactivate</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>debug_object_destroy</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>debug_object_free</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>debug_object_assert_init</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
Each of these functions takes the address of the real object and
a pointer to the object type specific debug description
structure.
</para>
<para>
Each detected error is reported in the statistics and a limited
number of errors are printk'ed including a full stack trace.
</para>
<para>
The statistics are available via /sys/kernel/debug/debug_objects/stats.
They provide information about the number of warnings and the
number of successful fixups along with information about the
usage of the internal tracking objects and the state of the
internal tracking objects pool.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="debugfunctions">
<title>Debug functions</title>
<sect1 id="prototypes">
<title>Debug object function reference</title>
!Elib/debugobjects.c
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_init">
<title>debug_object_init</title>
<para>
This function is called whenever the initialization function
of a real object is called.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is already tracked by debugobjects it is
checked, whether the object can be initialized. Initializing
is not allowed for active and destroyed objects. When
debugobjects detects an error, then it calls the fixup_init
function of the object type description structure if provided
by the caller. The fixup function can correct the problem
before the real initialization of the object happens. E.g. it
can deactivate an active object in order to prevent damage to
the subsystem.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is not yet tracked by debugobjects,
debugobjects allocates a tracker object for the real object
and sets the tracker object state to ODEBUG_STATE_INIT. It
verifies that the object is not on the callers stack. If it is
on the callers stack then a limited number of warnings
including a full stack trace is printk'ed. The calling code
must use debug_object_init_on_stack() and remove the object
before leaving the function which allocated it. See next
section.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_init_on_stack">
<title>debug_object_init_on_stack</title>
<para>
This function is called whenever the initialization function
of a real object which resides on the stack is called.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is already tracked by debugobjects it is
checked, whether the object can be initialized. Initializing
is not allowed for active and destroyed objects. When
debugobjects detects an error, then it calls the fixup_init
function of the object type description structure if provided
by the caller. The fixup function can correct the problem
before the real initialization of the object happens. E.g. it
can deactivate an active object in order to prevent damage to
the subsystem.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is not yet tracked by debugobjects
debugobjects allocates a tracker object for the real object
and sets the tracker object state to ODEBUG_STATE_INIT. It
verifies that the object is on the callers stack.
</para>
<para>
An object which is on the stack must be removed from the
tracker by calling debug_object_free() before the function
which allocates the object returns. Otherwise we keep track of
stale objects.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_activate">
<title>debug_object_activate</title>
<para>
This function is called whenever the activation function of a
real object is called.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is already tracked by debugobjects it is
checked, whether the object can be activated. Activating is
not allowed for active and destroyed objects. When
debugobjects detects an error, then it calls the
fixup_activate function of the object type description
structure if provided by the caller. The fixup function can
correct the problem before the real activation of the object
happens. E.g. it can deactivate an active object in order to
prevent damage to the subsystem.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is not yet tracked by debugobjects then
the fixup_activate function is called if available. This is
necessary to allow the legitimate activation of statically
allocated and initialized objects. The fixup function checks
whether the object is valid and calls the debug_objects_init()
function to initialize the tracking of this object.
</para>
<para>
When the activation is legitimate, then the state of the
associated tracker object is set to ODEBUG_STATE_ACTIVE.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_deactivate">
<title>debug_object_deactivate</title>
<para>
This function is called whenever the deactivation function of
a real object is called.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is tracked by debugobjects it is checked,
whether the object can be deactivated. Deactivating is not
allowed for untracked or destroyed objects.
</para>
<para>
When the deactivation is legitimate, then the state of the
associated tracker object is set to ODEBUG_STATE_INACTIVE.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_destroy">
<title>debug_object_destroy</title>
<para>
This function is called to mark an object destroyed. This is
useful to prevent the usage of invalid objects, which are
still available in memory: either statically allocated objects
or objects which are freed later.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is tracked by debugobjects it is checked,
whether the object can be destroyed. Destruction is not
allowed for active and destroyed objects. When debugobjects
detects an error, then it calls the fixup_destroy function of
the object type description structure if provided by the
caller. The fixup function can correct the problem before the
real destruction of the object happens. E.g. it can deactivate
an active object in order to prevent damage to the subsystem.
</para>
<para>
When the destruction is legitimate, then the state of the
associated tracker object is set to ODEBUG_STATE_DESTROYED.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_free">
<title>debug_object_free</title>
<para>
This function is called before an object is freed.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is tracked by debugobjects it is checked,
whether the object can be freed. Free is not allowed for
active objects. When debugobjects detects an error, then it
calls the fixup_free function of the object type description
structure if provided by the caller. The fixup function can
correct the problem before the real free of the object
happens. E.g. it can deactivate an active object in order to
prevent damage to the subsystem.
</para>
<para>
Note that debug_object_free removes the object from the
tracker. Later usage of the object is detected by the other
debug checks.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="debug_object_assert_init">
<title>debug_object_assert_init</title>
<para>
This function is called to assert that an object has been
initialized.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is not tracked by debugobjects, it calls
fixup_assert_init of the object type description structure
provided by the caller, with the hardcoded object state
ODEBUG_NOT_AVAILABLE. The fixup function can correct the problem
by calling debug_object_init and other specific initializing
functions.
</para>
<para>
When the real object is already tracked by debugobjects it is
ignored.
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="fixupfunctions">
<title>Fixup functions</title>
<sect1 id="debug_obj_descr">
<title>Debug object type description structure</title>
!Iinclude/linux/debugobjects.h
</sect1>
<sect1 id="fixup_init">
<title>fixup_init</title>
<para>
This function is called from the debug code whenever a problem
in debug_object_init is detected. The function takes the
address of the object and the state which is currently
recorded in the tracker.
</para>
<para>
Called from debug_object_init when the object state is:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>ODEBUG_STATE_ACTIVE</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>
The function returns true when the fixup was successful,
otherwise false. The return value is used to update the
statistics.
</para>
<para>
Note, that the function needs to call the debug_object_init()
function again, after the damage has been repaired in order to
keep the state consistent.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="fixup_activate">
<title>fixup_activate</title>
<para>
This function is called from the debug code whenever a problem
in debug_object_activate is detected.
</para>
<para>
Called from debug_object_activate when the object state is:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>ODEBUG_STATE_NOTAVAILABLE</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>ODEBUG_STATE_ACTIVE</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>
The function returns true when the fixup was successful,
otherwise false. The return value is used to update the
statistics.
</para>
<para>
Note that the function needs to call the debug_object_activate()
function again after the damage has been repaired in order to
keep the state consistent.
</para>
<para>
The activation of statically initialized objects is a special
case. When debug_object_activate() has no tracked object for
this object address then fixup_activate() is called with
object state ODEBUG_STATE_NOTAVAILABLE. The fixup function
needs to check whether this is a legitimate case of a
statically initialized object or not. In case it is it calls
debug_object_init() and debug_object_activate() to make the
object known to the tracker and marked active. In this case
the function should return false because this is not a real
fixup.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="fixup_destroy">
<title>fixup_destroy</title>
<para>
This function is called from the debug code whenever a problem
in debug_object_destroy is detected.
</para>
<para>
Called from debug_object_destroy when the object state is:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>ODEBUG_STATE_ACTIVE</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>
The function returns true when the fixup was successful,
otherwise false. The return value is used to update the
statistics.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="fixup_free">
<title>fixup_free</title>
<para>
This function is called from the debug code whenever a problem
in debug_object_free is detected. Further it can be called
from the debug checks in kfree/vfree, when an active object is
detected from the debug_check_no_obj_freed() sanity checks.
</para>
<para>
Called from debug_object_free() or debug_check_no_obj_freed()
when the object state is:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>ODEBUG_STATE_ACTIVE</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para>
The function returns true when the fixup was successful,
otherwise false. The return value is used to update the
statistics.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="fixup_assert_init">
<title>fixup_assert_init</title>
<para>
This function is called from the debug code whenever a problem
in debug_object_assert_init is detected.
</para>
<para>
Called from debug_object_assert_init() with a hardcoded state
ODEBUG_STATE_NOTAVAILABLE when the object is not found in the
debug bucket.
</para>
<para>
The function returns true when the fixup was successful,
otherwise false. The return value is used to update the
statistics.
</para>
<para>
Note, this function should make sure debug_object_init() is
called before returning.
</para>
<para>
The handling of statically initialized objects is a special
case. The fixup function should check if this is a legitimate
case of a statically initialized object or not. In this case only
debug_object_init() should be called to make the object known to
the tracker. Then the function should return false because this
is not
a real fixup.
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="bugs">
<title>Known Bugs And Assumptions</title>
<para>
None (knock on wood).
</para>
</chapter>
</book>

4
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
View File

@ -1208,8 +1208,8 @@ static struct block_device_operations opt_fops = {
<listitem>
<para>
Finally, don't forget to read <filename>Documentation/SubmittingPatches</filename>
and possibly <filename>Documentation/SubmittingDrivers</filename>.
Finally, don't forget to read <filename>Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst</filename>
and possibly <filename>Documentation/process/submitting-drivers.rst</filename>.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>

112
Documentation/DocBook/tracepoint.tmpl
View File

@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="Tracepoints">
<bookinfo>
<title>The Linux Kernel Tracepoint API</title>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Jason</firstname>
<surname>Baron</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>jbaron@redhat.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
<author>
<firstname>William</firstname>
<surname>Cohen</surname>
<affiliation>
<address>
<email>wcohen@redhat.com</email>
</address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction</title>
<para>
Tracepoints are static probe points that are located in strategic points
throughout the kernel. 'Probes' register/unregister with tracepoints
via a callback mechanism. The 'probes' are strictly typed functions that
are passed a unique set of parameters defined by each tracepoint.
</para>
<para>
From this simple callback mechanism, 'probes' can be used to profile, debug,
and understand kernel behavior. There are a number of tools that provide a
framework for using 'probes'. These tools include Systemtap, ftrace, and
LTTng.
</para>
<para>
Tracepoints are defined in a number of header files via various macros. Thus,
the purpose of this document is to provide a clear accounting of the available
tracepoints. The intention is to understand not only what tracepoints are
available but also to understand where future tracepoints might be added.
</para>
<para>
The API presented has functions of the form:
<function>trace_tracepointname(function parameters)</function>. These are the
tracepoints callbacks that are found throughout the code. Registering and
unregistering probes with these callback sites is covered in the
<filename>Documentation/trace/*</filename> directory.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="irq">
<title>IRQ</title>
!Iinclude/trace/events/irq.h
</chapter>
<chapter id="signal">
<title>SIGNAL</title>
!Iinclude/trace/events/signal.h
</chapter>
<chapter id="block">
<title>Block IO</title>
!Iinclude/trace/events/block.h
</chapter>
<chapter id="workqueue">
<title>Workqueue</title>
!Iinclude/trace/events/workqueue.h
</chapter>
</book>

62
Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
View File

@ -45,6 +45,13 @@ GPL version 2.
</abstract>
<revhistory>
<revision>
<revnumber>0.10</revnumber>
<date>2016-10-17</date>
<authorinitials>sch</authorinitials>
<revremark>Added generic hyperv driver
</revremark>
</revision>
<revision>
<revnumber>0.9</revnumber>
<date>2009-07-16</date>
@ -1033,6 +1040,61 @@ int main()
</chapter>
<chapter id="uio_hv_generic" xreflabel="Using Generic driver for Hyper-V VMBUS">
<?dbhtml filename="uio_hv_generic.html"?>
<title>Generic Hyper-V UIO driver</title>
<para>
The generic driver is a kernel module named uio_hv_generic.
It supports devices on the Hyper-V VMBus similar to uio_pci_generic
on PCI bus.
</para>
<sect1 id="uio_hv_generic_binding">
<title>Making the driver recognize the device</title>
<para>
Since the driver does not declare any device GUID's, it will not get loaded
automatically and will not automatically bind to any devices, you must load it
and allocate id to the driver yourself. For example, to use the network device
GUID:
<programlisting>
modprobe uio_hv_generic
echo &quot;f8615163-df3e-46c5-913f-f2d2f965ed0e&quot; &gt; /sys/bus/vmbus/drivers/uio_hv_generic/new_id
</programlisting>
</para>
<para>
If there already is a hardware specific kernel driver for the device, the
generic driver still won't bind to it, in this case if you want to use the
generic driver (why would you?) you'll have to manually unbind the hardware
specific driver and bind the generic driver, like this:
<programlisting>
echo -n vmbus-ed963694-e847-4b2a-85af-bc9cfc11d6f3 &gt; /sys/bus/vmbus/drivers/hv_netvsc/unbind
echo -n vmbus-ed963694-e847-4b2a-85af-bc9cfc11d6f3 &gt; /sys/bus/vmbus/drivers/uio_hv_generic/bind
</programlisting>
</para>
<para>
You can verify that the device has been bound to the driver
by looking for it in sysfs, for example like the following:
<programlisting>
ls -l /sys/bus/vmbus/devices/vmbus-ed963694-e847-4b2a-85af-bc9cfc11d6f3/driver
</programlisting>
Which if successful should print
<programlisting>
.../vmbus-ed963694-e847-4b2a-85af-bc9cfc11d6f3/driver -&gt; ../../../bus/vmbus/drivers/uio_hv_generic
</programlisting>
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="uio_hv_generic_internals">
<title>Things to know about uio_hv_generic</title>
<para>
On each interrupt, uio_hv_generic sets the Interrupt Disable bit.
This prevents the device from generating further interrupts
until the bit is cleared. The userspace driver should clear this
bit before blocking and waiting for more interrupts.
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<appendix id="app1">
<title>Further information</title>
<itemizedlist>

992
Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl
View File

@ -1,992 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="Linux-USB-API">
<bookinfo>
<title>The Linux-USB Host Side API</title>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="intro">
<title>Introduction to USB on Linux</title>
<para>A Universal Serial Bus (USB) is used to connect a host,
such as a PC or workstation, to a number of peripheral
devices. USB uses a tree structure, with the host as the
root (the system's master), hubs as interior nodes, and
peripherals as leaves (and slaves).
Modern PCs support several such trees of USB devices, usually
one USB 2.0 tree (480 Mbit/sec each) with
a few USB 1.1 trees (12 Mbit/sec each) that are used when you
connect a USB 1.1 device directly to the machine's "root hub".
</para>
<para>That master/slave asymmetry was designed-in for a number of
reasons, one being ease of use. It is not physically possible to
assemble (legal) USB cables incorrectly: all upstream "to the host"
connectors are the rectangular type (matching the sockets on
root hubs), and all downstream connectors are the squarish type
(or they are built into the peripheral).
Also, the host software doesn't need to deal with distributed
auto-configuration since the pre-designated master node manages all that.
And finally, at the electrical level, bus protocol overhead is reduced by
eliminating arbitration and moving scheduling into the host software.
</para>
<para>USB 1.0 was announced in January 1996 and was revised
as USB 1.1 (with improvements in hub specification and
support for interrupt-out transfers) in September 1998.
USB 2.0 was released in April 2000, adding high-speed
transfers and transaction-translating hubs (used for USB 1.1
and 1.0 backward compatibility).
</para>
<para>Kernel developers added USB support to Linux early in the 2.2 kernel
series, shortly before 2.3 development forked. Updates from 2.3 were
regularly folded back into 2.2 releases, which improved reliability and
brought <filename>/sbin/hotplug</filename> support as well more drivers.
Such improvements were continued in the 2.5 kernel series, where they added
USB 2.0 support, improved performance, and made the host controller drivers
(HCDs) more consistent. They also simplified the API (to make bugs less
likely) and added internal "kerneldoc" documentation.
</para>
<para>Linux can run inside USB devices as well as on
the hosts that control the devices.
But USB device drivers running inside those peripherals
don't do the same things as the ones running inside hosts,
so they've been given a different name:
<emphasis>gadget drivers</emphasis>.
This document does not cover gadget drivers.
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="host">
<title>USB Host-Side API Model</title>
<para>Host-side drivers for USB devices talk to the "usbcore" APIs.
There are two. One is intended for
<emphasis>general-purpose</emphasis> drivers (exposed through
driver frameworks), and the other is for drivers that are
<emphasis>part of the core</emphasis>.
Such core drivers include the <emphasis>hub</emphasis> driver
(which manages trees of USB devices) and several different kinds
of <emphasis>host controller drivers</emphasis>,
which control individual busses.
</para>
<para>The device model seen by USB drivers is relatively complex.
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para>USB supports four kinds of data transfers
(control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous). Two of them (control
and bulk) use bandwidth as it's available,
while the other two (interrupt and isochronous)
are scheduled to provide guaranteed bandwidth.
</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The device description model includes one or more
"configurations" per device, only one of which is active at a time.
Devices that are capable of high-speed operation must also support
full-speed configurations, along with a way to ask about the
"other speed" configurations which might be used.
</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Configurations have one or more "interfaces", each
of which may have "alternate settings". Interfaces may be
standardized by USB "Class" specifications, or may be specific to
a vendor or device.</para>
<para>USB device drivers actually bind to interfaces, not devices.
Think of them as "interface drivers", though you
may not see many devices where the distinction is important.
<emphasis>Most USB devices are simple, with only one configuration,
one interface, and one alternate setting.</emphasis>
</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Interfaces have one or more "endpoints", each of
which supports one type and direction of data transfer such as
"bulk out" or "interrupt in". The entire configuration may have
up to sixteen endpoints in each direction, allocated as needed
among all the interfaces.
</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Data transfer on USB is packetized; each endpoint
has a maximum packet size.
Drivers must often be aware of conventions such as flagging the end
of bulk transfers using "short" (including zero length) packets.
</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>The Linux USB API supports synchronous calls for
control and bulk messages.
It also supports asynchronous calls for all kinds of data transfer,
using request structures called "URBs" (USB Request Blocks).
</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>Accordingly, the USB Core API exposed to device drivers
covers quite a lot of territory. You'll probably need to consult
the USB 2.0 specification, available online from www.usb.org at
no cost, as well as class or device specifications.
</para>
<para>The only host-side drivers that actually touch hardware
(reading/writing registers, handling IRQs, and so on) are the HCDs.
In theory, all HCDs provide the same functionality through the same
API. In practice, that's becoming more true on the 2.5 kernels,
but there are still differences that crop up especially with
fault handling. Different controllers don't necessarily report
the same aspects of failures, and recovery from faults (including
software-induced ones like unlinking an URB) isn't yet fully
consistent.
Device driver authors should make a point of doing disconnect
testing (while the device is active) with each different host
controller driver, to make sure drivers don't have bugs of
their own as well as to make sure they aren't relying on some
HCD-specific behavior.
(You will need external USB 1.1 and/or
USB 2.0 hubs to perform all those tests.)
</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="types"><title>USB-Standard Types</title>
<para>In <filename>&lt;linux/usb/ch9.h&gt;</filename> you will find
the USB data types defined in chapter 9 of the USB specification.
These data types are used throughout USB, and in APIs including
this host side API, gadget APIs, and usbfs.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/usb/ch9.h
</chapter>
<chapter id="hostside"><title>Host-Side Data Types and Macros</title>
<para>The host side API exposes several layers to drivers, some of
which are more necessary than others.
These support lifecycle models for host side drivers
and devices, and support passing buffers through usbcore to
some HCD that performs the I/O for the device driver.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/usb.h
</chapter>
<chapter id="usbcore"><title>USB Core APIs</title>
<para>There are two basic I/O models in the USB API.
The most elemental one is asynchronous: drivers submit requests
in the form of an URB, and the URB's completion callback
handle the next step.
All USB transfer types support that model, although there
are special cases for control URBs (which always have setup
and status stages, but may not have a data stage) and
isochronous URBs (which allow large packets and include
per-packet fault reports).
Built on top of that is synchronous API support, where a
driver calls a routine that allocates one or more URBs,
submits them, and waits until they complete.
There are synchronous wrappers for single-buffer control
and bulk transfers (which are awkward to use in some
driver disconnect scenarios), and for scatterlist based
streaming i/o (bulk or interrupt).
</para>
<para>USB drivers need to provide buffers that can be
used for DMA, although they don't necessarily need to
provide the DMA mapping themselves.
There are APIs to use used when allocating DMA buffers,
which can prevent use of bounce buffers on some systems.
In some cases, drivers may be able to rely on 64bit DMA
to eliminate another kind of bounce buffer.
</para>
!Edrivers/usb/core/urb.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/message.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/file.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/driver.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/usb.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/hub.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="hcd"><title>Host Controller APIs</title>
<para>These APIs are only for use by host controller drivers,
most of which implement standard register interfaces such as
EHCI, OHCI, or UHCI.
UHCI was one of the first interfaces, designed by Intel and
also used by VIA; it doesn't do much in hardware.
OHCI was designed later, to have the hardware do more work
(bigger transfers, tracking protocol state, and so on).
EHCI was designed with USB 2.0; its design has features that
resemble OHCI (hardware does much more work) as well as
UHCI (some parts of ISO support, TD list processing).
</para>
<para>There are host controllers other than the "big three",
although most PCI based controllers (and a few non-PCI based
ones) use one of those interfaces.
Not all host controllers use DMA; some use PIO, and there
is also a simulator.
</para>
<para>The same basic APIs are available to drivers for all
those controllers.
For historical reasons they are in two layers:
<structname>struct usb_bus</structname> is a rather thin
layer that became available in the 2.2 kernels, while
<structname>struct usb_hcd</structname> is a more featureful
layer (available in later 2.4 kernels and in 2.5) that
lets HCDs share common code, to shrink driver size
and significantly reduce hcd-specific behaviors.
</para>
!Edrivers/usb/core/hcd.c
!Edrivers/usb/core/hcd-pci.c
!Idrivers/usb/core/buffer.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="usbfs">
<title>The USB Filesystem (usbfs)</title>
<para>This chapter presents the Linux <emphasis>usbfs</emphasis>.
You may prefer to avoid writing new kernel code for your
USB driver; that's the problem that usbfs set out to solve.
User mode device drivers are usually packaged as applications
or libraries, and may use usbfs through some programming library
that wraps it. Such libraries include
<ulink url="http://libusb.sourceforge.net">libusb</ulink>
for C/C++, and
<ulink url="http://jUSB.sourceforge.net">jUSB</ulink> for Java.
</para>
<note><title>Unfinished</title>
<para>This particular documentation is incomplete,
especially with respect to the asynchronous mode.
As of kernel 2.5.66 the code and this (new) documentation
need to be cross-reviewed.
</para>
</note>
<para>Configure usbfs into Linux kernels by enabling the
<emphasis>USB filesystem</emphasis> option (CONFIG_USB_DEVICEFS),
and you get basic support for user mode USB device drivers.
Until relatively recently it was often (confusingly) called
<emphasis>usbdevfs</emphasis> although it wasn't solving what
<emphasis>devfs</emphasis> was.
Every USB device will appear in usbfs, regardless of whether or
not it has a kernel driver.
</para>
<sect1 id="usbfs-files">
<title>What files are in "usbfs"?</title>
<para>Conventionally mounted at
<filename>/proc/bus/usb</filename>, usbfs
features include:
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><filename>/proc/bus/usb/devices</filename>
... a text file
showing each of the USB devices on known to the kernel,
and their configuration descriptors.
You can also poll() this to learn about new devices.
</para></listitem>
<listitem><para><filename>/proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD</filename>
... magic files
exposing the each device's configuration descriptors, and
supporting a series of ioctls for making device requests,
including I/O to devices. (Purely for access by programs.)
</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</para>
<para> Each bus is given a number (BBB) based on when it was
enumerated; within each bus, each device is given a similar
number (DDD).
Those BBB/DDD paths are not "stable" identifiers;
expect them to change even if you always leave the devices
plugged in to the same hub port.
<emphasis>Don't even think of saving these in application
configuration files.</emphasis>
Stable identifiers are available, for user mode applications
that want to use them. HID and networking devices expose
these stable IDs, so that for example you can be sure that
you told the right UPS to power down its second server.
"usbfs" doesn't (yet) expose those IDs.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="usbfs-fstab">
<title>Mounting and Access Control</title>
<para>There are a number of mount options for usbfs, which will
be of most interest to you if you need to override the default
access control policy.
That policy is that only root may read or write device files
(<filename>/proc/bus/BBB/DDD</filename>) although anyone may read
the <filename>devices</filename>
or <filename>drivers</filename> files.
I/O requests to the device also need the CAP_SYS_RAWIO capability,
</para>
<para>The significance of that is that by default, all user mode
device drivers need super-user privileges.
You can change modes or ownership in a driver setup
when the device hotplugs, or maye just start the
driver right then, as a privileged server (or some activity
within one).
That's the most secure approach for multi-user systems,
but for single user systems ("trusted" by that user)
it's more convenient just to grant everyone all access
(using the <emphasis>devmode=0666</emphasis> option)
so the driver can start whenever it's needed.
</para>
<para>The mount options for usbfs, usable in /etc/fstab or
in command line invocations of <emphasis>mount</emphasis>, are:
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term><emphasis>busgid</emphasis>=NNNNN</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the GID used for the
/proc/bus/usb/BBB
directories. (Default: 0)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>busmode</emphasis>=MMM</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the file mode used for the
/proc/bus/usb/BBB
directories. (Default: 0555)
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>busuid</emphasis>=NNNNN</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the UID used for the
/proc/bus/usb/BBB
directories. (Default: 0)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>devgid</emphasis>=NNNNN</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the GID used for the
/proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD
files. (Default: 0)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>devmode</emphasis>=MMM</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the file mode used for the
/proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD
files. (Default: 0644)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>devuid</emphasis>=NNNNN</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the UID used for the
/proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD
files. (Default: 0)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>listgid</emphasis>=NNNNN</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the GID used for the
/proc/bus/usb/devices and drivers files.
(Default: 0)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>listmode</emphasis>=MMM</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the file mode used for the
/proc/bus/usb/devices and drivers files.
(Default: 0444)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term><emphasis>listuid</emphasis>=NNNNN</term>
<listitem><para>Controls the UID used for the
/proc/bus/usb/devices and drivers files.
(Default: 0)</para></listitem></varlistentry>
</variablelist>
</para>
<para>Note that many Linux distributions hard-wire the mount options
for usbfs in their init scripts, such as
<filename>/etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit</filename>,
rather than making it easy to set this per-system
policy in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="usbfs-devices">
<title>/proc/bus/usb/devices</title>
<para>This file is handy for status viewing tools in user
mode, which can scan the text format and ignore most of it.
More detailed device status (including class and vendor
status) is available from device-specific files.
For information about the current format of this file,
see the
<filename>Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt</filename>
file in your Linux kernel sources.
</para>
<para>This file, in combination with the poll() system call, can
also be used to detect when devices are added or removed:
<programlisting>int fd;
struct pollfd pfd;
fd = open("/proc/bus/usb/devices", O_RDONLY);
pfd = { fd, POLLIN, 0 };
for (;;) {
/* The first time through, this call will return immediately. */
poll(&amp;pfd, 1, -1);
/* To see what's changed, compare the file's previous and current
contents or scan the filesystem. (Scanning is more precise.) */
}</programlisting>
Note that this behavior is intended to be used for informational
and debug purposes. It would be more appropriate to use programs
such as udev or HAL to initialize a device or start a user-mode
helper program, for instance.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="usbfs-bbbddd">
<title>/proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD</title>
<para>Use these files in one of these basic ways:
</para>
<para><emphasis>They can be read,</emphasis>
producing first the device descriptor
(18 bytes) and then the descriptors for the current configuration.
See the USB 2.0 spec for details about those binary data formats.
You'll need to convert most multibyte values from little endian
format to your native host byte order, although a few of the
fields in the device descriptor (both of the BCD-encoded fields,
and the vendor and product IDs) will be byteswapped for you.
Note that configuration descriptors include descriptors for
interfaces, altsettings, endpoints, and maybe additional
class descriptors.
</para>
<para><emphasis>Perform USB operations</emphasis> using
<emphasis>ioctl()</emphasis> requests to make endpoint I/O
requests (synchronously or asynchronously) or manage
the device.
These requests need the CAP_SYS_RAWIO capability,
as well as filesystem access permissions.
Only one ioctl request can be made on one of these
device files at a time.
This means that if you are synchronously reading an endpoint
from one thread, you won't be able to write to a different
endpoint from another thread until the read completes.
This works for <emphasis>half duplex</emphasis> protocols,
but otherwise you'd use asynchronous i/o requests.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="usbfs-lifecycle">
<title>Life Cycle of User Mode Drivers</title>
<para>Such a driver first needs to find a device file
for a device it knows how to handle.
Maybe it was told about it because a
<filename>/sbin/hotplug</filename> event handling agent
chose that driver to handle the new device.
Or maybe it's an application that scans all the
/proc/bus/usb device files, and ignores most devices.
In either case, it should <function>read()</function> all
the descriptors from the device file,
and check them against what it knows how to handle.
It might just reject everything except a particular
vendor and product ID, or need a more complex policy.
</para>
<para>Never assume there will only be one such device
on the system at a time!
If your code can't handle more than one device at
a time, at least detect when there's more than one, and
have your users choose which device to use.
</para>
<para>Once your user mode driver knows what device to use,
it interacts with it in either of two styles.
The simple style is to make only control requests; some
devices don't need more complex interactions than those.
(An example might be software using vendor-specific control
requests for some initialization or configuration tasks,
with a kernel driver for the rest.)
</para>
<para>More likely, you need a more complex style driver:
one using non-control endpoints, reading or writing data
and claiming exclusive use of an interface.
<emphasis>Bulk</emphasis> transfers are easiest to use,
but only their sibling <emphasis>interrupt</emphasis> transfers
work with low speed devices.
Both interrupt and <emphasis>isochronous</emphasis> transfers
offer service guarantees because their bandwidth is reserved.
Such "periodic" transfers are awkward to use through usbfs,
unless you're using the asynchronous calls. However, interrupt
transfers can also be used in a synchronous "one shot" style.
</para>
<para>Your user-mode driver should never need to worry
about cleaning up request state when the device is
disconnected, although it should close its open file
descriptors as soon as it starts seeing the ENODEV
errors.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="usbfs-ioctl"><title>The ioctl() Requests</title>
<para>To use these ioctls, you need to include the following
headers in your userspace program:
<programlisting>#include &lt;linux/usb.h&gt;
#include &lt;linux/usbdevice_fs.h&gt;
#include &lt;asm/byteorder.h&gt;</programlisting>
The standard USB device model requests, from "Chapter 9" of
the USB 2.0 specification, are automatically included from
the <filename>&lt;linux/usb/ch9.h&gt;</filename> header.
</para>
<para>Unless noted otherwise, the ioctl requests
described here will
update the modification time on the usbfs file to which
they are applied (unless they fail).
A return of zero indicates success; otherwise, a
standard USB error code is returned. (These are
documented in
<filename>Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt</filename>
in your kernel sources.)
</para>
<para>Each of these files multiplexes access to several
I/O streams, one per endpoint.
Each device has one control endpoint (endpoint zero)
which supports a limited RPC style RPC access.
Devices are configured
by hub_wq (in the kernel) setting a device-wide
<emphasis>configuration</emphasis> that affects things
like power consumption and basic functionality.
The endpoints are part of USB <emphasis>interfaces</emphasis>,
which may have <emphasis>altsettings</emphasis>
affecting things like which endpoints are available.
Many devices only have a single configuration and interface,
so drivers for them will ignore configurations and altsettings.
</para>
<sect2 id="usbfs-mgmt">
<title>Management/Status Requests</title>
<para>A number of usbfs requests don't deal very directly
with device I/O.
They mostly relate to device management and status.
These are all synchronous requests.
</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_CLAIMINTERFACE</term>
<listitem><para>This is used to force usbfs to
claim a specific interface,
which has not previously been claimed by usbfs or any other
kernel driver.
The ioctl parameter is an integer holding the number of
the interface (bInterfaceNumber from descriptor).
</para><para>
Note that if your driver doesn't claim an interface
before trying to use one of its endpoints, and no
other driver has bound to it, then the interface is
automatically claimed by usbfs.
</para><para>
This claim will be released by a RELEASEINTERFACE ioctl,
or by closing the file descriptor.
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_CONNECTINFO</term>
<listitem><para>Says whether the device is lowspeed.
The ioctl parameter points to a structure like this:
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_connectinfo {
unsigned int devnum;
unsigned char slow;
}; </programlisting>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
<emphasis>You can't tell whether a "not slow"
device is connected at high speed (480 MBit/sec)
or just full speed (12 MBit/sec).</emphasis>
You should know the devnum value already,
it's the DDD value of the device file name.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_GETDRIVER</term>
<listitem><para>Returns the name of the kernel driver
bound to a given interface (a string). Parameter
is a pointer to this structure, which is modified:
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_getdriver {
unsigned int interface;
char driver[USBDEVFS_MAXDRIVERNAME + 1];
};</programlisting>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_IOCTL</term>
<listitem><para>Passes a request from userspace through
to a kernel driver that has an ioctl entry in the
<emphasis>struct usb_driver</emphasis> it registered.
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_ioctl {
int ifno;
int ioctl_code;
void *data;
};
/* user mode call looks like this.
* 'request' becomes the driver->ioctl() 'code' parameter.
* the size of 'param' is encoded in 'request', and that data
* is copied to or from the driver->ioctl() 'buf' parameter.
*/
static int
usbdev_ioctl (int fd, int ifno, unsigned request, void *param)
{
struct usbdevfs_ioctl wrapper;
wrapper.ifno = ifno;
wrapper.ioctl_code = request;
wrapper.data = param;
return ioctl (fd, USBDEVFS_IOCTL, &amp;wrapper);
} </programlisting>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
This request lets kernel drivers talk to user mode code
through filesystem operations even when they don't create
a character or block special device.
It's also been used to do things like ask devices what
device special file should be used.
Two pre-defined ioctls are used
to disconnect and reconnect kernel drivers, so
that user mode code can completely manage binding
and configuration of devices.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_RELEASEINTERFACE</term>
<listitem><para>This is used to release the claim usbfs
made on interface, either implicitly or because of a
USBDEVFS_CLAIMINTERFACE call, before the file
descriptor is closed.
The ioctl parameter is an integer holding the number of
the interface (bInterfaceNumber from descriptor);
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><warning><para>
<emphasis>No security check is made to ensure
that the task which made the claim is the one
which is releasing it.
This means that user mode driver may interfere
other ones. </emphasis>
</para></warning></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_RESETEP</term>
<listitem><para>Resets the data toggle value for an endpoint
(bulk or interrupt) to DATA0.
The ioctl parameter is an integer endpoint number
(1 to 15, as identified in the endpoint descriptor),
with USB_DIR_IN added if the device's endpoint sends
data to the host.
</para><warning><para>
<emphasis>Avoid using this request.
It should probably be removed.</emphasis>
Using it typically means the device and driver will lose
toggle synchronization. If you really lost synchronization,
you likely need to completely handshake with the device,
using a request like CLEAR_HALT
or SET_INTERFACE.
</para></warning></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_DROP_PRIVILEGES</term>
<listitem><para>This is used to relinquish the ability
to do certain operations which are considered to be
privileged on a usbfs file descriptor.
This includes claiming arbitrary interfaces, resetting
a device on which there are currently claimed interfaces
from other users, and issuing USBDEVFS_IOCTL calls.
The ioctl parameter is a 32 bit mask of interfaces
the user is allowed to claim on this file descriptor.
You may issue this ioctl more than one time to narrow
said mask.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
</variablelist>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="usbfs-sync">
<title>Synchronous I/O Support</title>
<para>Synchronous requests involve the kernel blocking
until the user mode request completes, either by
finishing successfully or by reporting an error.
In most cases this is the simplest way to use usbfs,
although as noted above it does prevent performing I/O
to more than one endpoint at a time.
</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_BULK</term>
<listitem><para>Issues a bulk read or write request to the
device.
The ioctl parameter is a pointer to this structure:
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_bulktransfer {
unsigned int ep;
unsigned int len;
unsigned int timeout; /* in milliseconds */
void *data;
};</programlisting>
</para><para>The "ep" value identifies a
bulk endpoint number (1 to 15, as identified in an endpoint
descriptor),
masked with USB_DIR_IN when referring to an endpoint which
sends data to the host from the device.
The length of the data buffer is identified by "len";
Recent kernels support requests up to about 128KBytes.
<emphasis>FIXME say how read length is returned,
and how short reads are handled.</emphasis>.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_CLEAR_HALT</term>
<listitem><para>Clears endpoint halt (stall) and
resets the endpoint toggle. This is only
meaningful for bulk or interrupt endpoints.
The ioctl parameter is an integer endpoint number
(1 to 15, as identified in an endpoint descriptor),
masked with USB_DIR_IN when referring to an endpoint which
sends data to the host from the device.
</para><para>
Use this on bulk or interrupt endpoints which have
stalled, returning <emphasis>-EPIPE</emphasis> status
to a data transfer request.
Do not issue the control request directly, since
that could invalidate the host's record of the
data toggle.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_CONTROL</term>
<listitem><para>Issues a control request to the device.
The ioctl parameter points to a structure like this:
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_ctrltransfer {
__u8 bRequestType;
__u8 bRequest;
__u16 wValue;
__u16 wIndex;
__u16 wLength;
__u32 timeout; /* in milliseconds */
void *data;
};</programlisting>
</para><para>
The first eight bytes of this structure are the contents
of the SETUP packet to be sent to the device; see the
USB 2.0 specification for details.
The bRequestType value is composed by combining a
USB_TYPE_* value, a USB_DIR_* value, and a
USB_RECIP_* value (from
<emphasis>&lt;linux/usb.h&gt;</emphasis>).
If wLength is nonzero, it describes the length of the data
buffer, which is either written to the device
(USB_DIR_OUT) or read from the device (USB_DIR_IN).
</para><para>
At this writing, you can't transfer more than 4 KBytes
of data to or from a device; usbfs has a limit, and
some host controller drivers have a limit.
(That's not usually a problem.)
<emphasis>Also</emphasis> there's no way to say it's
not OK to get a short read back from the device.
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_RESET</term>
<listitem><para>Does a USB level device reset.
The ioctl parameter is ignored.
After the reset, this rebinds all device interfaces.
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><warning><para>
<emphasis>Avoid using this call</emphasis>
until some usbcore bugs get fixed,
since it does not fully synchronize device, interface,
and driver (not just usbfs) state.
</para></warning></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_SETINTERFACE</term>
<listitem><para>Sets the alternate setting for an
interface. The ioctl parameter is a pointer to a
structure like this:
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_setinterface {
unsigned int interface;
unsigned int altsetting;
}; </programlisting>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
Those struct members are from some interface descriptor
applying to the current configuration.
The interface number is the bInterfaceNumber value, and
the altsetting number is the bAlternateSetting value.
(This resets each endpoint in the interface.)
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_SETCONFIGURATION</term>
<listitem><para>Issues the
<function>usb_set_configuration</function> call
for the device.
The parameter is an integer holding the number of
a configuration (bConfigurationValue from descriptor).
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><warning><para>
<emphasis>Avoid using this call</emphasis>
until some usbcore bugs get fixed,
since it does not fully synchronize device, interface,
and driver (not just usbfs) state.
</para></warning></listitem></varlistentry>
</variablelist>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="usbfs-async">
<title>Asynchronous I/O Support</title>
<para>As mentioned above, there are situations where it may be
important to initiate concurrent operations from user mode code.
This is particularly important for periodic transfers
(interrupt and isochronous), but it can be used for other
kinds of USB requests too.
In such cases, the asynchronous requests described here
are essential. Rather than submitting one request and having
the kernel block until it completes, the blocking is separate.
</para>
<para>These requests are packaged into a structure that
resembles the URB used by kernel device drivers.
(No POSIX Async I/O support here, sorry.)
It identifies the endpoint type (USBDEVFS_URB_TYPE_*),
endpoint (number, masked with USB_DIR_IN as appropriate),
buffer and length, and a user "context" value serving to
uniquely identify each request.
(It's usually a pointer to per-request data.)
Flags can modify requests (not as many as supported for
kernel drivers).
</para>
<para>Each request can specify a realtime signal number
(between SIGRTMIN and SIGRTMAX, inclusive) to request a
signal be sent when the request completes.
</para>
<para>When usbfs returns these urbs, the status value
is updated, and the buffer may have been modified.
Except for isochronous transfers, the actual_length is
updated to say how many bytes were transferred; if the
USBDEVFS_URB_DISABLE_SPD flag is set
("short packets are not OK"), if fewer bytes were read
than were requested then you get an error report.
</para>
<programlisting>struct usbdevfs_iso_packet_desc {
unsigned int length;
unsigned int actual_length;
unsigned int status;
};
struct usbdevfs_urb {
unsigned char type;
unsigned char endpoint;
int status;
unsigned int flags;
void *buffer;
int buffer_length;
int actual_length;
int start_frame;
int number_of_packets;
int error_count;
unsigned int signr;
void *usercontext;
struct usbdevfs_iso_packet_desc iso_frame_desc[];
};</programlisting>
<para> For these asynchronous requests, the file modification
time reflects when the request was initiated.
This contrasts with their use with the synchronous requests,
where it reflects when requests complete.
</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_DISCARDURB</term>
<listitem><para>
<emphasis>TBS</emphasis>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_DISCSIGNAL</term>
<listitem><para>
<emphasis>TBS</emphasis>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_REAPURB</term>
<listitem><para>
<emphasis>TBS</emphasis>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_REAPURBNDELAY</term>
<listitem><para>
<emphasis>TBS</emphasis>
File modification time is not updated by this request.
</para><para>
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
<varlistentry><term>USBDEVFS_SUBMITURB</term>
<listitem><para>
<emphasis>TBS</emphasis>
</para><para>
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
</variablelist>
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>
<!-- vim:syntax=sgml:sw=4
-->

6206
Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

57
Documentation/IPMI.txt
View File

@ -111,6 +111,8 @@ ipmi_ssif - A driver for accessing BMCs on the SMBus. It uses the
I2C kernel driver's SMBus interfaces to send and receive IPMI messages
over the SMBus.
ipmi_powernv - A driver for access BMCs on POWERNV systems.
ipmi_watchdog - IPMI requires systems to have a very capable watchdog
timer. This driver implements the standard Linux watchdog timer
interface on top of the IPMI message handler.
@ -118,17 +120,15 @@ interface on top of the IPMI message handler.
ipmi_poweroff - Some systems support the ability to be turned off via
IPMI commands.
These are all individually selectable via configuration options.
bt-bmc - This is not part of the main driver, but instead a driver for
accessing a BMC-side interface of a BT interface. It is used on BMCs
running Linux to provide an interface to the host.
Note that the KCS-only interface has been removed. The af_ipmi driver
is no longer supported and has been removed because it was impossible
to do 32 bit emulation on 64-bit kernels with it.
These are all individually selectable via configuration options.
Much documentation for the interface is in the include files. The
IPMI include files are:
net/af_ipmi.h - Contains the socket interface.
linux/ipmi.h - Contains the user interface and IOCTL interface for IPMI.
linux/ipmi_smi.h - Contains the interface for system management interfaces
@ -245,6 +245,16 @@ addressed (because some boards actually have multiple BMCs on them)
and the user should not have to care what type of SMI is below them.
Watching For Interfaces
When your code comes up, the IPMI driver may or may not have detected
if IPMI devices exist. So you might have to defer your setup until
the device is detected, or you might be able to do it immediately.
To handle this, and to allow for discovery, you register an SMI
watcher with ipmi_smi_watcher_register() to iterate over interfaces
and tell you when they come and go.
Creating the User
To user the message handler, you must first create a user using
@ -263,7 +273,7 @@ closing the device automatically destroys the user.
Messaging
To send a message from kernel-land, the ipmi_request() call does
To send a message from kernel-land, the ipmi_request_settime() call does
pretty much all message handling. Most of the parameter are
self-explanatory. However, it takes a "msgid" parameter. This is NOT
the sequence number of messages. It is simply a long value that is
@ -352,11 +362,12 @@ that for more details.
The SI Driver
-------------
The SI driver allows up to 4 KCS or SMIC interfaces to be configured
in the system. By default, scan the ACPI tables for interfaces, and
if it doesn't find any the driver will attempt to register one KCS
interface at the spec-specified I/O port 0xca2 without interrupts.
You can change this at module load time (for a module) with:
The SI driver allows KCS, BT, and SMIC interfaces to be configured
in the system. It discovers interfaces through a host of different
methods, depending on the system.
You can specify up to four interfaces on the module load line and
control some module parameters:
modprobe ipmi_si.o type=<type1>,<type2>....
ports=<port1>,<port2>... addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
@ -367,7 +378,7 @@ You can change this at module load time (for a module) with:
force_kipmid=<enable1>,<enable2>,...
kipmid_max_busy_us=<ustime1>,<ustime2>,...
unload_when_empty=[0|1]
trydefaults=[0|1] trydmi=[0|1] tryacpi=[0|1]
trydmi=[0|1] tryacpi=[0|1]
tryplatform=[0|1] trypci=[0|1]
Each of these except try... items is a list, the first item for the
@ -386,10 +397,6 @@ use the I/O port given as the device address.
If you specify irqs as non-zero for an interface, the driver will
attempt to use the given interrupt for the device.
trydefaults sets whether the standard IPMI interface at 0xca2 and
any interfaces specified by ACPE are tried. By default, the driver
tries it, set this value to zero to turn this off.
The other try... items disable discovery by their corresponding
names. These are all enabled by default, set them to zero to disable
them. The tryplatform disables openfirmware.
@ -434,7 +441,7 @@ kernel command line as:
ipmi_si.type=<type1>,<type2>...
ipmi_si.ports=<port1>,<port2>... ipmi_si.addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>...
ipmi_si.irqs=<irq1>,<irq2>... ipmi_si.trydefaults=[0|1]
ipmi_si.irqs=<irq1>,<irq2>...
ipmi_si.regspacings=<sp1>,<sp2>,...
ipmi_si.regsizes=<size1>,<size2>,...
ipmi_si.regshifts=<shift1>,<shift2>,...
@ -444,11 +451,6 @@ kernel command line as:
It works the same as the module parameters of the same names.
By default, the driver will attempt to detect any device specified by
ACPI, and if none of those then a KCS device at the spec-specified
0xca2. If you want to turn this off, set the "trydefaults" option to
false.
If your IPMI interface does not support interrupts and is a KCS or
SMIC interface, the IPMI driver will start a kernel thread for the
interface to help speed things up. This is a low-priority kernel
@ -500,7 +502,8 @@ at module load time (for a module) with:
addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[,...]]
adapter=<adapter1>[,<adapter2>[...]]
dbg=<flags1>,<flags2>...
slave_addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>,...
slave_addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>,...
tryacpi=[0|1] trydmi=[0|1]
[dbg_probe=1]
The addresses are normal I2C addresses. The adapter is the string
@ -513,6 +516,9 @@ spaces in kernel parameters.
The debug flags are bit flags for each BMC found, they are:
IPMI messages: 1, driver state: 2, timing: 4, I2C probe: 8
The tryxxx parameters can be used to disable detecting interfaces
from various sources.
Setting dbg_probe to 1 will enable debugging of the probing and
detection process for BMCs on the SMBusses.
@ -535,7 +541,8 @@ kernel command line as:
ipmi_ssif.adapter=<adapter1>[,<adapter2>[...]]
ipmi_ssif.dbg=<flags1>[,<flags2>[...]]
ipmi_ssif.dbg_probe=1
ipmi_ssif.slave_addrs=<addr1>[,<addr2>[...]]
ipmi_ssif.slave_addrs=<addr1>[,<addr2>[...]]
ipmi_ssif.tryacpi=[0|1] ipmi_ssif.trydmi=[0|1]
These are the same options as on the module command line.

26
Documentation/Makefile.sphinx
View File

@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ _SPHINXDIRS = $(patsubst $(srctree)/Documentation/%/conf.py,%,$(wildcard $(src
SPHINX_CONF = conf.py
PAPER =
BUILDDIR = $(obj)/output
PDFLATEX = xelatex
LATEXOPTS = -interaction=batchmode
# User-friendly check for sphinx-build
HAVE_SPHINX := $(shell if which $(SPHINXBUILD) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
@ -29,7 +31,7 @@ else ifneq ($(DOCBOOKS),)
else # HAVE_SPHINX
# User-friendly check for pdflatex
HAVE_PDFLATEX := $(shell if which xelatex >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
HAVE_PDFLATEX := $(shell if which $(PDFLATEX) >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
# Internal variables.
PAPEROPT_a4 = -D latex_paper_size=a4
@ -51,8 +53,8 @@ loop_cmd = $(echo-cmd) $(cmd_$(1))
# $5 reST source folder relative to $(srctree)/$(src),
# e.g. "media" for the linux-tv book-set at ./Documentation/media
quiet_cmd_sphinx = SPHINX $@ --> file://$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4);
cmd_sphinx = $(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media all;\
quiet_cmd_sphinx = SPHINX $@ --> file://$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4)
cmd_sphinx = $(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media $2;\
BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) SPHINX_CONF=$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5/$(SPHINX_CONF)) \
$(SPHINXBUILD) \
-b $2 \
@ -67,16 +69,19 @@ htmldocs:
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,html,$(var),,$(var)))
latexdocs:
ifeq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
$(warning The 'xelatex' command was not found. Make sure you have it installed and in PATH to produce PDF output.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else # HAVE_PDFLATEX
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,latex,$(var),latex,$(var)))
endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
ifeq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
pdfdocs:
$(warning The '$(PDFLATEX)' command was not found. Make sure you have it installed and in PATH to produce PDF output.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else # HAVE_PDFLATEX
pdfdocs: latexdocs
ifneq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX=xelatex LATEXOPTS="-interaction=nonstopmode" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex)
$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX=$(PDFLATEX) LATEXOPTS="$(LATEXOPTS)" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex;)
endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
epubdocs:
@ -93,6 +98,7 @@ installmandocs:
cleandocs:
$(Q)rm -rf $(BUILDDIR)
$(Q)$(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) -C Documentation/media clean
endif # HAVE_SPHINX

25
Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.html
View File

@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ The <tt>rcu_access_pointer()</tt> on line&nbsp;6 is similar to
It could reuse a value formerly fetched from this same pointer.
It could also fetch the pointer from <tt>gp</tt> in a byte-at-a-time
manner, resulting in <i>load tearing</i>, in turn resulting a bytewise
mash-up of two distince pointer values.
mash-up of two distinct pointer values.
It might even use value-speculation optimizations, where it makes
a wrong guess, but by the time it gets around to checking the
value, an update has changed the pointer to match the wrong guess.
@ -659,6 +659,29 @@ systems with more than one CPU:
In other words, a given instance of <tt>synchronize_rcu()</tt>
can avoid waiting on a given RCU read-side critical section only
if it can prove that <tt>synchronize_rcu()</tt> started first.
<p>
A related question is &ldquo;When <tt>rcu_read_lock()</tt>
doesn't generate any code, why does it matter how it relates
to a grace period?&rdquo;
The answer is that it is not the relationship of
<tt>rcu_read_lock()</tt> itself that is important, but rather
the relationship of the code within the enclosed RCU read-side
critical section to the code preceding and following the
grace period.
If we take this viewpoint, then a given RCU read-side critical
section begins before a given grace period when some access
preceding the grace period observes the effect of some access
within the critical section, in which case none of the accesses
within the critical section may observe the effects of any
access following the grace period.
<p>
As of late 2016, mathematical models of RCU take this
viewpoint, for example, see slides&nbsp;62 and&nbsp;63
of the
<a href="http://www2.rdrop.com/users/paulmck/scalability/paper/LinuxMM.2016.10.04c.LCE.pdf">2016 LinuxCon EU</a>
presentation.
</font></td></tr>
<tr><td>&nbsp;</td></tr>
</table>

2
Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
View File

@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ rcu_dereference()
The reader uses rcu_dereference() to fetch an RCU-protected
pointer, which returns a value that may then be safely
dereferenced. Note that rcu_deference() does not actually
dereferenced. Note that rcu_dereference() does not actually
dereference the pointer, instead, it protects the pointer for
later dereferencing. It also executes any needed memory-barrier
instructions for a given CPU architecture. Currently, only Alpha

842
Documentation/SubmittingPatches
View File

@ -1,841 +1 @@
.. _submittingpatches:
How to Get Your Change Into the Linux Kernel or Care And Operation Of Your Linus Torvalds
=========================================================================================
For a person or company who wishes to submit a change to the Linux
kernel, the process can sometimes be daunting if you're not familiar
with "the system." This text is a collection of suggestions which
can greatly increase the chances of your change being accepted.
This document contains a large number of suggestions in a relatively terse
format. For detailed information on how the kernel development process
works, see :ref:`Documentation/development-process <development_process_main>`.
Also, read :ref:`Documentation/SubmitChecklist <submitchecklist>`
for a list of items to check before
submitting code. If you are submitting a driver, also read
:ref:`Documentation/SubmittingDrivers <submittingdrivers>`;
for device tree binding patches, read
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt.
Many of these steps describe the default behavior of the ``git`` version
control system; if you use ``git`` to prepare your patches, you'll find much
of the mechanical work done for you, though you'll still need to prepare
and document a sensible set of patches. In general, use of ``git`` will make
your life as a kernel developer easier.
Creating and Sending your Change
********************************
0) Obtain a current source tree
-------------------------------
If you do not have a repository with the current kernel source handy, use
``git`` to obtain one. You'll want to start with the mainline repository,
which can be grabbed with::
git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
Note, however, that you may not want to develop against the mainline tree
directly. Most subsystem maintainers run their own trees and want to see
patches prepared against those trees. See the **T:** entry for the subsystem
in the MAINTAINERS file to find that tree, or simply ask the maintainer if
the tree is not listed there.
It is still possible to download kernel releases via tarballs (as described
in the next section), but that is the hard way to do kernel development.
1) ``diff -up``
---------------
If you must generate your patches by hand, use ``diff -up`` or ``diff -uprN``
to create patches. Git generates patches in this form by default; if
you're using ``git``, you can skip this section entirely.
All changes to the Linux kernel occur in the form of patches, as
generated by :manpage:`diff(1)`. When creating your patch, make sure to
create it in "unified diff" format, as supplied by the ``-u`` argument
to :manpage:`diff(1)`.
Also, please use the ``-p`` argument which shows which C function each
change is in - that makes the resultant ``diff`` a lot easier to read.
Patches should be based in the root kernel source directory,
not in any lower subdirectory.
To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do::
SRCTREE= linux
MYFILE= drivers/net/mydriver.c
cd $SRCTREE
cp $MYFILE $MYFILE.orig
vi $MYFILE # make your change
cd ..
diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch
To create a patch for multiple files, you should unpack a "vanilla",
or unmodified kernel source tree, and generate a ``diff`` against your
own source tree. For example::
MYSRC= /devel/linux
tar xvfz linux-3.19.tar.gz
mv linux-3.19 linux-3.19-vanilla
diff -uprN -X linux-3.19-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
linux-3.19-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
``dontdiff`` is a list of files which are generated by the kernel during
the build process, and should be ignored in any :manpage:`diff(1)`-generated
patch.
Make sure your patch does not include any extra files which do not
belong in a patch submission. Make sure to review your patch -after-
generating it with :manpage:`diff(1)`, to ensure accuracy.
If your changes produce a lot of deltas, you need to split them into
individual patches which modify things in logical stages; see
:ref:`split_changes`. This will facilitate review by other kernel developers,
very important if you want your patch accepted.
If you're using ``git``, ``git rebase -i`` can help you with this process. If
you're not using ``git``, ``quilt`` <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>
is another popular alternative.
.. _describe_changes:
2) Describe your changes
------------------------
Describe your problem. Whether your patch is a one-line bug fix or
5000 lines of a new feature, there must be an underlying problem that
motivated you to do this work. Convince the reviewer that there is a
problem worth fixing and that it makes sense for them to read past the
first paragraph.
Describe user-visible impact. Straight up crashes and lockups are
pretty convincing, but not all bugs are that blatant. Even if the
problem was spotted during code review, describe the impact you think
it can have on users. Keep in mind that the majority of Linux
installations run kernels from secondary stable trees or
vendor/product-specific trees that cherry-pick only specific patches
from upstream, so include anything that could help route your change
downstream: provoking circumstances, excerpts from dmesg, crash
descriptions, performance regressions, latency spikes, lockups, etc.
Quantify optimizations and trade-offs. If you claim improvements in
performance, memory consumption, stack footprint, or binary size,
include numbers that back them up. But also describe non-obvious
costs. Optimizations usually aren't free but trade-offs between CPU,
memory, and readability; or, when it comes to heuristics, between
different workloads. Describe the expected downsides of your
optimization so that the reviewer can weigh costs against benefits.
Once the problem is established, describe what you are actually doing
about it in technical detail. It's important to describe the change
in plain English for the reviewer to verify that the code is behaving
as you intend it to.
The maintainer will thank you if you write your patch description in a
form which can be easily pulled into Linux's source code management
system, ``git``, as a "commit log". See :ref:`explicit_in_reply_to`.
Solve only one problem per patch. If your description starts to get
long, that's a sign that you probably need to split up your patch.
See :ref:`split_changes`.
When you submit or resubmit a patch or patch series, include the
complete patch description and justification for it. Don't just
say that this is version N of the patch (series). Don't expect the
subsystem maintainer to refer back to earlier patch versions or referenced
URLs to find the patch description and put that into the patch.
I.e., the patch (series) and its description should be self-contained.
This benefits both the maintainers and reviewers. Some reviewers
probably didn't even receive earlier versions of the patch.
Describe your changes in imperative mood, e.g. "make xyzzy do frotz"
instead of "[This patch] makes xyzzy do frotz" or "[I] changed xyzzy
to do frotz", as if you are giving orders to the codebase to change
its behaviour.
If the patch fixes a logged bug entry, refer to that bug entry by
number and URL. If the patch follows from a mailing list discussion,
give a URL to the mailing list archive; use the https://lkml.kernel.org/
redirector with a ``Message-Id``, to ensure that the links cannot become
stale.
However, try to make your explanation understandable without external
resources. In addition to giving a URL to a mailing list archive or
bug, summarize the relevant points of the discussion that led to the
patch as submitted.
If you want to refer to a specific commit, don't just refer to the
SHA-1 ID of the commit. Please also include the oneline summary of
the commit, to make it easier for reviewers to know what it is about.
Example::
Commit e21d2170f36602ae2708 ("video: remove unnecessary
platform_set_drvdata()") removed the unnecessary
platform_set_drvdata(), but left the variable "dev" unused,
delete it.
You should also be sure to use at least the first twelve characters of the
SHA-1 ID. The kernel repository holds a *lot* of objects, making
collisions with shorter IDs a real possibility. Bear in mind that, even if
there is no collision with your six-character ID now, that condition may
change five years from now.
If your patch fixes a bug in a specific commit, e.g. you found an issue using
``git bisect``, please use the 'Fixes:' tag with the first 12 characters of
the SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary. For example::
Fixes: e21d2170f366 ("video: remove unnecessary platform_set_drvdata()")
The following ``git config`` settings can be used to add a pretty format for
outputting the above style in the ``git log`` or ``git show`` commands::
[core]
abbrev = 12
[pretty]
fixes = Fixes: %h (\"%s\")
.. _split_changes:
3) Separate your changes
------------------------
Separate each **logical change** into a separate patch.
For example, if your changes include both bug fixes and performance
enhancements for a single driver, separate those changes into two
or more patches. If your changes include an API update, and a new
driver which uses that new API, separate those into two patches.
On the other hand, if you make a single change to numerous files,
group those changes into a single patch. Thus a single logical change
is contained within a single patch.
The point to remember is that each patch should make an easily understood
change that can be verified by reviewers. Each patch should be justifiable
on its own merits.
If one patch depends on another patch in order for a change to be
complete, that is OK. Simply note **"this patch depends on patch X"**
in your patch description.
When dividing your change into a series of patches, take special care to
ensure that the kernel builds and runs properly after each patch in the
series. Developers using ``git bisect`` to track down a problem can end up
splitting your patch series at any point; they will not thank you if you
introduce bugs in the middle.
If you cannot condense your patch set into a smaller set of patches,
then only post say 15 or so at a time and wait for review and integration.
4) Style-check your changes
---------------------------
Check your patch for basic style violations, details of which can be
found in
:ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingstyle>`.
Failure to do so simply wastes
the reviewers time and will get your patch rejected, probably
without even being read.
One significant exception is when moving code from one file to
another -- in this case you should not modify the moved code at all in
the same patch which moves it. This clearly delineates the act of
moving the code and your changes. This greatly aids review of the
actual differences and allows tools to better track the history of
the code itself.
Check your patches with the patch style checker prior to submission
(scripts/checkpatch.pl). Note, though, that the style checker should be
viewed as a guide, not as a replacement for human judgment. If your code
looks better with a violation then its probably best left alone.
The checker reports at three levels:
- ERROR: things that are very likely to be wrong
- WARNING: things requiring careful review
- CHECK: things requiring thought
You should be able to justify all violations that remain in your
patch.
5) Select the recipients for your patch
---------------------------------------
You should always copy the appropriate subsystem maintainer(s) on any patch
to code that they maintain; look through the MAINTAINERS file and the
source code revision history to see who those maintainers are. The
script scripts/get_maintainer.pl can be very useful at this step. If you
cannot find a maintainer for the subsystem you are working on, Andrew
Morton (akpm@linux-foundation.org) serves as a maintainer of last resort.
You should also normally choose at least one mailing list to receive a copy
of your patch set. linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org functions as a list of
last resort, but the volume on that list has caused a number of developers
to tune it out. Look in the MAINTAINERS file for a subsystem-specific
list; your patch will probably get more attention there. Please do not
spam unrelated lists, though.
Many kernel-related lists are hosted on vger.kernel.org; you can find a
list of them at http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html. There are
kernel-related lists hosted elsewhere as well, though.
Do not send more than 15 patches at once to the vger mailing lists!!!
Linus Torvalds is the final arbiter of all changes accepted into the
Linux kernel. His e-mail address is <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>.
He gets a lot of e-mail, and, at this point, very few patches go through
Linus directly, so typically you should do your best to -avoid-
sending him e-mail.
If you have a patch that fixes an exploitable security bug, send that patch
to security@kernel.org. For severe bugs, a short embargo may be considered
to allow distributors to get the patch out to users; in such cases,
obviously, the patch should not be sent to any public lists.
Patches that fix a severe bug in a released kernel should be directed
toward the stable maintainers by putting a line like this::
Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org
into the sign-off area of your patch (note, NOT an email recipient). You
should also read
:ref:`Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt <stable_kernel_rules>`
in addition to this file.
Note, however, that some subsystem maintainers want to come to their own
conclusions on which patches should go to the stable trees. The networking
maintainer, in particular, would rather not see individual developers
adding lines like the above to their patches.
If changes affect userland-kernel interfaces, please send the MAN-PAGES
maintainer (as listed in the MAINTAINERS file) a man-pages patch, or at
least a notification of the change, so that some information makes its way
into the manual pages. User-space API changes should also be copied to
linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey
trivial@kernel.org which collects "trivial" patches. Have a look
into the MAINTAINERS file for its current manager.
Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
- Spelling fixes in documentation
- Spelling fixes for errors which could break :manpage:`grep(1)`
- Warning fixes (cluttering with useless warnings is bad)
- Compilation fixes (only if they are actually correct)
- Runtime fixes (only if they actually fix things)
- Removing use of deprecated functions/macros
- Contact detail and documentation fixes
- Non-portable code replaced by portable code (even in arch-specific,
since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
- Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file (ie. patch monkey
in re-transmission mode)
6) No MIME, no links, no compression, no attachments. Just plain text
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Linus and other kernel developers need to be able to read and comment
on the changes you are submitting. It is important for a kernel
developer to be able to "quote" your changes, using standard e-mail
tools, so that they may comment on specific portions of your code.
For this reason, all patches should be submitted by e-mail "inline".
.. warning::
Be wary of your editor's word-wrap corrupting your patch,
if you choose to cut-n-paste your patch.
Do not attach the patch as a MIME attachment, compressed or not.
Many popular e-mail applications will not always transmit a MIME
attachment as plain text, making it impossible to comment on your
code. A MIME attachment also takes Linus a bit more time to process,
decreasing the likelihood of your MIME-attached change being accepted.
Exception: If your mailer is mangling patches then someone may ask
you to re-send them using MIME.
See :ref:`Documentation/email-clients.txt <email_clients>`
for hints about configuring your e-mail client so that it sends your patches
untouched.
7) E-mail size
--------------
Large changes are not appropriate for mailing lists, and some
maintainers. If your patch, uncompressed, exceeds 300 kB in size,
it is preferred that you store your patch on an Internet-accessible
server, and provide instead a URL (link) pointing to your patch. But note
that if your patch exceeds 300 kB, it almost certainly needs to be broken up
anyway.
8) Respond to review comments
-----------------------------
Your patch will almost certainly get comments from reviewers on ways in
which the patch can be improved. You must respond to those comments;
ignoring reviewers is a good way to get ignored in return. Review comments
or questions that do not lead to a code change should almost certainly
bring about a comment or changelog entry so that the next reviewer better
understands what is going on.
Be sure to tell the reviewers what changes you are making and to thank them
for their time. Code review is a tiring and time-consuming process, and
reviewers sometimes get grumpy. Even in that case, though, respond
politely and address the problems they have pointed out.
9) Don't get discouraged - or impatient
---------------------------------------
After you have submitted your change, be patient and wait. Reviewers are
busy people and may not get to your patch right away.
Once upon a time, patches used to disappear into the void without comment,
but the development process works more smoothly than that now. You should
receive comments within a week or so; if that does not happen, make sure
that you have sent your patches to the right place. Wait for a minimum of
one week before resubmitting or pinging reviewers - possibly longer during
busy times like merge windows.
10) Include PATCH in the subject
--------------------------------
Due to high e-mail traffic to Linus, and to linux-kernel, it is common
convention to prefix your subject line with [PATCH]. This lets Linus
and other kernel developers more easily distinguish patches from other
e-mail discussions.
11) Sign your work
------------------
To improve tracking of who did what, especially with patches that can
percolate to their final resting place in the kernel through several
layers of maintainers, we've introduced a "sign-off" procedure on
patches that are being emailed around.
The sign-off is a simple line at the end of the explanation for the
patch, which certifies that you wrote it or otherwise have the right to
pass it on as an open-source patch. The rules are pretty simple: if you
can certify the below:
Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
By making a contribution to this project, I certify that:
(a) The contribution was created in whole or in part by me and I
have the right to submit it under the open source license
indicated in the file; or
(b) The contribution is based upon previous work that, to the best
of my knowledge, is covered under an appropriate open source
license and I have the right under that license to submit that
work with modifications, whether created in whole or in part
by me, under the same open source license (unless I am
permitted to submit under a different license), as indicated
in the file; or
(c) The contribution was provided directly to me by some other
person who certified (a), (b) or (c) and I have not modified
it.
(d) I understand and agree that this project and the contribution
are public and that a record of the contribution (including all
personal information I submit with it, including my sign-off) is
maintained indefinitely and may be redistributed consistent with
this project or the open source license(s) involved.
then you just add a line saying::
Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
using your real name (sorry, no pseudonyms or anonymous contributions.)
Some people also put extra tags at the end. They'll just be ignored for
now, but you can do this to mark internal company procedures or just
point out some special detail about the sign-off.
If you are a subsystem or branch maintainer, sometimes you need to slightly
modify patches you receive in order to merge them, because the code is not
exactly the same in your tree and the submitters'. If you stick strictly to
rule (c), you should ask the submitter to rediff, but this is a totally
counter-productive waste of time and energy. Rule (b) allows you to adjust
the code, but then it is very impolite to change one submitter's code and
make him endorse your bugs. To solve this problem, it is recommended that
you add a line between the last Signed-off-by header and yours, indicating
the nature of your changes. While there is nothing mandatory about this, it
seems like prepending the description with your mail and/or name, all
enclosed in square brackets, is noticeable enough to make it obvious that
you are responsible for last-minute changes. Example::
Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
[lucky@maintainer.example.org: struct foo moved from foo.c to foo.h]
Signed-off-by: Lucky K Maintainer <lucky@maintainer.example.org>
This practice is particularly helpful if you maintain a stable branch and
want at the same time to credit the author, track changes, merge the fix,
and protect the submitter from complaints. Note that under no circumstances
can you change the author's identity (the From header), as it is the one
which appears in the changelog.
Special note to back-porters: It seems to be a common and useful practice
to insert an indication of the origin of a patch at the top of the commit
message (just after the subject line) to facilitate tracking. For instance,
here's what we see in a 3.x-stable release::
Date: Tue Oct 7 07:26:38 2014 -0400
libata: Un-break ATA blacklist
commit 1c40279960bcd7d52dbdf1d466b20d24b99176c8 upstream.
And here's what might appear in an older kernel once a patch is backported::
Date: Tue May 13 22:12:27 2008 +0200
wireless, airo: waitbusy() won't delay
[backport of 2.6 commit b7acbdfbd1f277c1eb23f344f899cfa4cd0bf36a]
Whatever the format, this information provides a valuable help to people
tracking your trees, and to people trying to troubleshoot bugs in your
tree.
12) When to use Acked-by: and Cc:
---------------------------------
The Signed-off-by: tag indicates that the signer was involved in the
development of the patch, or that he/she was in the patch's delivery path.
If a person was not directly involved in the preparation or handling of a
patch but wishes to signify and record their approval of it then they can
ask to have an Acked-by: line added to the patch's changelog.
Acked-by: is often used by the maintainer of the affected code when that
maintainer neither contributed to nor forwarded the patch.
Acked-by: is not as formal as Signed-off-by:. It is a record that the acker
has at least reviewed the patch and has indicated acceptance. Hence patch
mergers will sometimes manually convert an acker's "yep, looks good to me"
into an Acked-by: (but note that it is usually better to ask for an
explicit ack).
Acked-by: does not necessarily indicate acknowledgement of the entire patch.
For example, if a patch affects multiple subsystems and has an Acked-by: from
one subsystem maintainer then this usually indicates acknowledgement of just
the part which affects that maintainer's code. Judgement should be used here.
When in doubt people should refer to the original discussion in the mailing
list archives.
If a person has had the opportunity to comment on a patch, but has not
provided such comments, you may optionally add a ``Cc:`` tag to the patch.
This is the only tag which might be added without an explicit action by the
person it names - but it should indicate that this person was copied on the
patch. This tag documents that potentially interested parties
have been included in the discussion.
13) Using Reported-by:, Tested-by:, Reviewed-by:, Suggested-by: and Fixes:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
The Reported-by tag gives credit to people who find bugs and report them and it
hopefully inspires them to help us again in the future. Please note that if
the bug was reported in private, then ask for permission first before using the
Reported-by tag.
A Tested-by: tag indicates that the patch has been successfully tested (in
some environment) by the person named. This tag informs maintainers that
some testing has been performed, provides a means to locate testers for
future patches, and ensures credit for the testers.
Reviewed-by:, instead, indicates that the patch has been reviewed and found
acceptable according to the Reviewer's Statement:
Reviewer's statement of oversight
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
By offering my Reviewed-by: tag, I state that:
(a) I have carried out a technical review of this patch to
evaluate its appropriateness and readiness for inclusion into
the mainline kernel.
(b) Any problems, concerns, or questions relating to the patch
have been communicated back to the submitter. I am satisfied
with the submitter's response to my comments.
(c) While there may be things that could be improved with this
submission, I believe that it is, at this time, (1) a
worthwhile modification to the kernel, and (2) free of known
issues which would argue against its inclusion.
(d) While I have reviewed the patch and believe it to be sound, I
do not (unless explicitly stated elsewhere) make any
warranties or guarantees that it will achieve its stated
purpose or function properly in any given situation.
A Reviewed-by tag is a statement of opinion that the patch is an
appropriate modification of the kernel without any remaining serious
technical issues. Any interested reviewer (who has done the work) can
offer a Reviewed-by tag for a patch. This tag serves to give credit to
reviewers and to inform maintainers of the degree of review which has been
done on the patch. Reviewed-by: tags, when supplied by reviewers known to
understand the subject area and to perform thorough reviews, will normally
increase the likelihood of your patch getting into the kernel.
A Suggested-by: tag indicates that the patch idea is suggested by the person
named and ensures credit to the person for the idea. Please note that this
tag should not be added without the reporter's permission, especially if the
idea was not posted in a public forum. That said, if we diligently credit our
idea reporters, they will, hopefully, be inspired to help us again in the
future.
A Fixes: tag indicates that the patch fixes an issue in a previous commit. It
is used to make it easy to determine where a bug originated, which can help
review a bug fix. This tag also assists the stable kernel team in determining
which stable kernel versions should receive your fix. This is the preferred
method for indicating a bug fixed by the patch. See :ref:`describe_changes`
for more details.
14) The canonical patch format
------------------------------
This section describes how the patch itself should be formatted. Note
that, if you have your patches stored in a ``git`` repository, proper patch
formatting can be had with ``git format-patch``. The tools cannot create
the necessary text, though, so read the instructions below anyway.
The canonical patch subject line is::
Subject: [PATCH 001/123] subsystem: summary phrase
The canonical patch message body contains the following:
- A ``from`` line specifying the patch author (only needed if the person
sending the patch is not the author).
- An empty line.
- The body of the explanation, line wrapped at 75 columns, which will
be copied to the permanent changelog to describe this patch.
- The ``Signed-off-by:`` lines, described above, which will
also go in the changelog.
- A marker line containing simply ``---``.
- Any additional comments not suitable for the changelog.
- The actual patch (``diff`` output).
The Subject line format makes it very easy to sort the emails
alphabetically by subject line - pretty much any email reader will
support that - since because the sequence number is zero-padded,
the numerical and alphabetic sort is the same.
The ``subsystem`` in the email's Subject should identify which
area or subsystem of the kernel is being patched.
The ``summary phrase`` in the email's Subject should concisely
describe the patch which that email contains. The ``summary
phrase`` should not be a filename. Do not use the same ``summary
phrase`` for every patch in a whole patch series (where a ``patch
series`` is an ordered sequence of multiple, related patches).
Bear in mind that the ``summary phrase`` of your email becomes a
globally-unique identifier for that patch. It propagates all the way
into the ``git`` changelog. The ``summary phrase`` may later be used in
developer discussions which refer to the patch. People will want to
google for the ``summary phrase`` to read discussion regarding that
patch. It will also be the only thing that people may quickly see
when, two or three months later, they are going through perhaps
thousands of patches using tools such as ``gitk`` or ``git log
--oneline``.
For these reasons, the ``summary`` must be no more than 70-75
characters, and it must describe both what the patch changes, as well
as why the patch might be necessary. It is challenging to be both
succinct and descriptive, but that is what a well-written summary
should do.
The ``summary phrase`` may be prefixed by tags enclosed in square
brackets: "Subject: [PATCH <tag>...] <summary phrase>". The tags are
not considered part of the summary phrase, but describe how the patch
should be treated. Common tags might include a version descriptor if
the multiple versions of the patch have been sent out in response to
comments (i.e., "v1, v2, v3"), or "RFC" to indicate a request for
comments. If there are four patches in a patch series the individual
patches may be numbered like this: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4. This assures
that developers understand the order in which the patches should be
applied and that they have reviewed or applied all of the patches in
the patch series.
A couple of example Subjects::
Subject: [PATCH 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching
Subject: [PATCH v2 01/27] x86: fix eflags tracking
The ``from`` line must be the very first line in the message body,
and has the form:
From: Original Author <author@example.com>
The ``from`` line specifies who will be credited as the author of the
patch in the permanent changelog. If the ``from`` line is missing,
then the ``From:`` line from the email header will be used to determine
the patch author in the changelog.
The explanation body will be committed to the permanent source
changelog, so should make sense to a competent reader who has long
since forgotten the immediate details of the discussion that might
have led to this patch. Including symptoms of the failure which the
patch addresses (kernel log messages, oops messages, etc.) is
especially useful for people who might be searching the commit logs
looking for the applicable patch. If a patch fixes a compile failure,
it may not be necessary to include _all_ of the compile failures; just
enough that it is likely that someone searching for the patch can find
it. As in the ``summary phrase``, it is important to be both succinct as
well as descriptive.
The ``---`` marker line serves the essential purpose of marking for patch
handling tools where the changelog message ends.
One good use for the additional comments after the ``---`` marker is for
a ``diffstat``, to show what files have changed, and the number of
inserted and deleted lines per file. A ``diffstat`` is especially useful
on bigger patches. Other comments relevant only to the moment or the
maintainer, not suitable for the permanent changelog, should also go
here. A good example of such comments might be ``patch changelogs``
which describe what has changed between the v1 and v2 version of the
patch.
If you are going to include a ``diffstat`` after the ``---`` marker, please
use ``diffstat`` options ``-p 1 -w 70`` so that filenames are listed from
the top of the kernel source tree and don't use too much horizontal
space (easily fit in 80 columns, maybe with some indentation). (``git``
generates appropriate diffstats by default.)
See more details on the proper patch format in the following
references.
.. _explicit_in_reply_to:
15) Explicit In-Reply-To headers
--------------------------------
It can be helpful to manually add In-Reply-To: headers to a patch
(e.g., when using ``git send-email``) to associate the patch with
previous relevant discussion, e.g. to link a bug fix to the email with
the bug report. However, for a multi-patch series, it is generally
best to avoid using In-Reply-To: to link to older versions of the
series. This way multiple versions of the patch don't become an
unmanageable forest of references in email clients. If a link is
helpful, you can use the https://lkml.kernel.org/ redirector (e.g., in
the cover email text) to link to an earlier version of the patch series.
16) Sending ``git pull`` requests
---------------------------------
If you have a series of patches, it may be most convenient to have the
maintainer pull them directly into the subsystem repository with a
``git pull`` operation. Note, however, that pulling patches from a developer
requires a higher degree of trust than taking patches from a mailing list.
As a result, many subsystem maintainers are reluctant to take pull
requests, especially from new, unknown developers. If in doubt you can use
the pull request as the cover letter for a normal posting of the patch
series, giving the maintainer the option of using either.
A pull request should have [GIT] or [PULL] in the subject line. The
request itself should include the repository name and the branch of
interest on a single line; it should look something like::
Please pull from
git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus
to get these changes:
A pull request should also include an overall message saying what will be
included in the request, a ``git shortlog`` listing of the patches
themselves, and a ``diffstat`` showing the overall effect of the patch series.
The easiest way to get all this information together is, of course, to let
``git`` do it for you with the ``git request-pull`` command.
Some maintainers (including Linus) want to see pull requests from signed
commits; that increases their confidence that the request actually came
from you. Linus, in particular, will not pull from public hosting sites
like GitHub in the absence of a signed tag.
The first step toward creating such tags is to make a GNUPG key and get it
signed by one or more core kernel developers. This step can be hard for
new developers, but there is no way around it. Attending conferences can
be a good way to find developers who can sign your key.
Once you have prepared a patch series in ``git`` that you wish to have somebody
pull, create a signed tag with ``git tag -s``. This will create a new tag
identifying the last commit in the series and containing a signature
created with your private key. You will also have the opportunity to add a
changelog-style message to the tag; this is an ideal place to describe the
effects of the pull request as a whole.
If the tree the maintainer will be pulling from is not the repository you
are working from, don't forget to push the signed tag explicitly to the
public tree.
When generating your pull request, use the signed tag as the target. A
command like this will do the trick::
git request-pull master git://my.public.tree/linux.git my-signed-tag
REFERENCES
**********
Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
<http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
<http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html>
Greg Kroah-Hartman, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer".
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-02.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-03.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-04.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-05.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-06.html>
NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!
<https://lkml.org/lkml/2005/7/11/336>
Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle:
:ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingstyle>`
Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
<http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches"
Some strategies to get difficult or controversial changes in.
http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf
This file has moved to process/submitting-patches.rst

39
Documentation/VGA-softcursor.txt
View File

@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
Software cursor for VGA by Pavel Machek <pavel@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz>
======================= and Martin Mares <mj@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz>
Linux now has some ability to manipulate cursor appearance. Normally, you
can set the size of hardware cursor (and also work around some ugly bugs in
those miserable Trident cards--see #define TRIDENT_GLITCH in drivers/video/
vgacon.c). You can now play a few new tricks: you can make your cursor look
like a non-blinking red block, make it inverse background of the character it's
over or to highlight that character and still choose whether the original
hardware cursor should remain visible or not. There may be other things I have
never thought of.
The cursor appearance is controlled by a "<ESC>[?1;2;3c" escape sequence
where 1, 2 and 3 are parameters described below. If you omit any of them,
they will default to zeroes.
Parameter 1 specifies cursor size (0=default, 1=invisible, 2=underline, ...,
8=full block) + 16 if you want the software cursor to be applied + 32 if you
want to always change the background color + 64 if you dislike having the
background the same as the foreground. Highlights are ignored for the last two
flags.
The second parameter selects character attribute bits you want to change
(by simply XORing them with the value of this parameter). On standard VGA,
the high four bits specify background and the low four the foreground. In both
groups, low three bits set color (as in normal color codes used by the console)
and the most significant one turns on highlight (or sometimes blinking--it
depends on the configuration of your VGA).
The third parameter consists of character attribute bits you want to set.
Bit setting takes place before bit toggling, so you can simply clear a bit by
including it in both the set mask and the toggle mask.
Examples:
=========
To get normal blinking underline, use: echo -e '\033[?2c'
To get blinking block, use: echo -e '\033[?6c'
To get red non-blinking block, use: echo -e '\033[?17;0;64c'

97
Documentation/acpi/DSD-properties-rules.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
_DSD Device Properties Usage Rules
----------------------------------
Properties, Property Sets and Property Subsets
----------------------------------------------
The _DSD (Device Specific Data) configuration object, introduced in ACPI 5.1,
allows any type of device configuration data to be provided via the ACPI
namespace. In principle, the format of the data may be arbitrary, but it has to
be identified by a UUID which must be recognized by the driver processing the
_DSD output. However, there are generic UUIDs defined for _DSD recognized by
the ACPI subsystem in the Linux kernel which automatically processes the data
packages associated with them and makes those data available to device drivers
as "device properties".
A device property is a data item consisting of a string key and a value (of a
specific type) associated with it.
In the ACPI _DSD context it is an element of the sub-package following the
generic Device Properties UUID in the _DSD return package as specified in the
Device Properties UUID definition document [1].
It also may be regarded as the definition of a key and the associated data type
that can be returned by _DSD in the Device Properties UUID sub-package for a
given device.
A property set is a collection of properties applicable to a hardware entity
like a device. In the ACPI _DSD context it is the set of all properties that
can be returned in the Device Properties UUID sub-package for the device in
question.
Property subsets are nested collections of properties. Each of them is
associated with an additional key (name) allowing the subset to be referred
to as a whole (and to be treated as a separate entity). The canonical
representation of property subsets is via the mechanism specified in the
Hierarchical Properties Extension UUID definition document [2].
Property sets may be hierarchical. That is, a property set may contain
multiple property subsets that each may contain property subsets of its
own and so on.
General Validity Rule for Property Sets
---------------------------------------
Valid property sets must follow the guidance given by the Device Properties UUID
definition document [1].
_DSD properties are intended to be used in addition to, and not instead of, the
existing mechanisms defined by the ACPI specification. Therefore, as a rule,
they should only be used if the ACPI specification does not make direct
provisions for handling the underlying use case. It generally is invalid to
return property sets which do not follow that rule from _DSD in data packages
associated with the Device Properties UUID.
Additional Considerations
-------------------------
There are cases in which, even if the general rule given above is followed in
principle, the property set may still not be regarded as a valid one.
For example, that applies to device properties which may cause kernel code
(either a device driver or a library/subsystem) to access hardware in a way
possibly leading to a conflict with AML methods in the ACPI namespace. In
particular, that may happen if the kernel code uses device properties to
manipulate hardware normally controlled by ACPI methods related to power
management, like _PSx and _DSW (for device objects) or _ON and _OFF (for power
resource objects), or by ACPI device disabling/enabling methods, like _DIS and
_SRS.
In all cases in which kernel code may do something that will confuse AML as a
result of using device properties, the device properties in question are not
suitable for the ACPI environment and consequently they cannot belong to a valid
property set.
Property Sets and Device Tree Bindings
--------------------------------------
It often is useful to make _DSD return property sets that follow Device Tree
bindings.
In those cases, however, the above validity considerations must be taken into
account in the first place and returning invalid property sets from _DSD must be
avoided. For this reason, it may not be possible to make _DSD return a property
set following the given DT binding literally and completely. Still, for the
sake of code re-use, it may make sense to provide as much of the configuration
data as possible in the form of device properties and complement that with an
ACPI-specific mechanism suitable for the use case at hand.
In any case, property sets following DT bindings literally should not be
expected to automatically work in the ACPI environment regardless of their
contents.
References
----------
[1] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
[2] http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-hierarchical-data-extension-UUID-v1.1.pdf

9
Documentation/acpi/enumeration.txt
View File

@ -415,3 +415,12 @@ the "compatible" property in the _DSD or a _CID as long as one of their
ancestors provides a _DSD with a valid "compatible" property. Such device
objects are then simply regarded as additional "blocks" providing hierarchical
configuration information to the driver of the composite ancestor device.
However, PRP0001 can only be returned from either _HID or _CID of a device
object if all of the properties returned by the _DSD associated with it (either
the _DSD of the device object itself or the _DSD of its ancestor in the
"composite device" case described above) can be used in the ACPI environment.
Otherwise, the _DSD itself is regarded as invalid and therefore the "compatible"
property returned by it is meaningless.
Refer to DSD-properties-rules.txt for more information.

62
Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt
View File

@ -51,6 +51,68 @@ it to 1 marks the GPIO as active low.
In our Bluetooth example the "reset-gpios" refers to the second GpioIo()
resource, second pin in that resource with the GPIO number of 31.
It is possible to leave holes in the array of GPIOs. This is useful in
cases like with SPI host controllers where some chip selects may be
implemented as GPIOs and some as native signals. For example a SPI host
controller can have chip selects 0 and 2 implemented as GPIOs and 1 as
native:
Package () {
"cs-gpios",
Package () {
^GPIO, 19, 0, 0, // chip select 0: GPIO
0, // chip select 1: native signal
^GPIO, 20, 0, 0, // chip select 2: GPIO
}
}
Other supported properties
--------------------------
Following Device Tree compatible device properties are also supported by
_DSD device properties for GPIO controllers:
- gpio-hog
- output-high
- output-low
- input
- line-name
Example:
Name (_DSD, Package () {
// _DSD Hierarchical Properties Extension UUID
ToUUID("dbb8e3e6-5886-4ba6-8795-1319f52a966b"),
Package () {
Package () {"hog-gpio8", "G8PU"}
}
})
Name (G8PU, Package () {
ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
Package () {
Package () {"gpio-hog", 1},
Package () {"gpios", Package () {8, 0}},
Package () {"output-high", 1},
Package () {"line-name", "gpio8-pullup"},
}
})
- gpio-line-names
Example:
Package () {
"gpio-line-names",
Package () {
"SPI0_CS_N", "EXP2_INT", "MUX6_IO", "UART0_RXD", "MUX7_IO",
"LVL_C_A1", "MUX0_IO", "SPI1_MISO"
}
}
See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for more information
about these properties.
ACPI GPIO Mappings Provided by Drivers
--------------------------------------

187
Documentation/acpi/osi.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
ACPI _OSI and _REV methods
--------------------------
An ACPI BIOS can use the "Operating System Interfaces" method (_OSI)
to find out what the operating system supports. Eg. If BIOS
AML code includes _OSI("XYZ"), the kernel's AML interpreter
can evaluate that method, look to see if it supports 'XYZ'
and answer YES or NO to the BIOS.
The ACPI _REV method returns the "Revision of the ACPI specification
that OSPM supports"
This document explains how and why the BIOS and Linux should use these methods.
It also explains how and why they are widely misused.
How to use _OSI
---------------
Linux runs on two groups of machines -- those that are tested by the OEM
to be compatible with Linux, and those that were never tested with Linux,
but where Linux was installed to replace the original OS (Windows or OSX).
The larger group is the systems tested to run only Windows. Not only that,
but many were tested to run with just one specific version of Windows.
So even though the BIOS may use _OSI to query what version of Windows is running,
only a single path through the BIOS has actually been tested.
Experience shows that taking untested paths through the BIOS
exposes Linux to an entire category of BIOS bugs.
For this reason, Linux _OSI defaults must continue to claim compatibility
with all versions of Windows.
But Linux isn't actually compatible with Windows, and the Linux community
has also been hurt with regressions when Linux adds the latest version of
Windows to its list of _OSI strings. So it is possible that additional strings
will be more thoroughly vetted before shipping upstream in the future.
But it is likely that they will all eventually be added.
What should an OEM do if they want to support Linux and Windows
using the same BIOS image? Often they need to do something different
for Linux to deal with how Linux is different from Windows.
Here the BIOS should ask exactly what it wants to know:
_OSI("Linux-OEM-my_interface_name")
where 'OEM' is needed if this is an OEM-specific hook,
and 'my_interface_name' describes the hook, which could be a
quirk, a bug, or a bug-fix.
In addition, the OEM should send a patch to upstream Linux
via the linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org mailing list. When that patch
is checked into Linux, the OS will answer "YES" when the BIOS
on the OEM's system uses _OSI to ask if the interface is supported
by the OS. Linux distributors can back-port that patch for Linux
pre-installs, and it will be included by all distributions that
re-base to upstream. If the distribution can not update the kernel binary,
they can also add an acpi_osi=Linux-OEM-my_interface_name
cmdline parameter to the boot loader, as needed.
If the string refers to a feature where the upstream kernel
eventually grows support, a patch should be sent to remove
the string when that support is added to the kernel.
That was easy. Read on, to find out how to do it wrong.
Before _OSI, there was _OS
--------------------------
ACPI 1.0 specified "_OS" as an
"object that evaluates to a string that identifies the operating system."
The ACPI BIOS flow would include an evaluation of _OS, and the AML
interpreter in the kernel would return to it a string identifying the OS:
Windows 98, SE: "Microsoft Windows"
Windows ME: "Microsoft WindowsME:Millenium Edition"
Windows NT: "Microsoft Windows NT"
The idea was on a platform tasked with running multiple OS's,
the BIOS could use _OS to enable devices that an OS
might support, or enable quirks or bug workarounds
necessary to make the platform compatible with that pre-existing OS.
But _OS had fundamental problems. First, the BIOS needed to know the name
of every possible version of the OS that would run on it, and needed to know
all the quirks of those OS's. Certainly it would make more sense
for the BIOS to ask *specific* things of the OS, such
"do you support a specific interface", and thus in ACPI 3.0,
_OSI was born to replace _OS.
_OS was abandoned, though even today, many BIOS look for
_OS "Microsoft Windows NT", though it seems somewhat far-fetched
that anybody would install those old operating systems
over what came with the machine.
Linux answers "Microsoft Windows NT" to please that BIOS idiom.
That is the *only* viable strategy, as that is what modern Windows does,
and so doing otherwise could steer the BIOS down an untested path.
_OSI is born, and immediately misused
--------------------------------------
With _OSI, the *BIOS* provides the string describing an interface,
and asks the OS: "YES/NO, are you compatible with this interface?"
eg. _OSI("3.0 Thermal Model") would return TRUE if the OS knows how
to deal with the thermal extensions made to the ACPI 3.0 specification.
An old OS that doesn't know about those extensions would answer FALSE,
and a new OS may be able to return TRUE.
For an OS-specific interface, the ACPI spec said that the BIOS and the OS
were to agree on a string of the form such as "Windows-interface_name".
But two bad things happened. First, the Windows ecosystem used _OSI
not as designed, but as a direct replacement for _OS -- identifying
the OS version, rather than an OS supported interface. Indeed, right
from the start, the ACPI 3.0 spec itself codified this misuse
in example code using _OSI("Windows 2001").
This misuse was adopted and continues today.
Linux had no choice but to also return TRUE to _OSI("Windows 2001")
and its successors. To do otherwise would virtually guarantee breaking
a BIOS that has been tested only with that _OSI returning TRUE.
This strategy is problematic, as Linux is never completely compatible with
the latest version of Windows, and sometimes it takes more than a year
to iron out incompatibilities.
Not to be out-done, the Linux community made things worse by returning TRUE
to _OSI("Linux"). Doing so is even worse than the Windows misuse
of _OSI, as "Linux" does not even contain any version information.
_OSI("Linux") led to some BIOS' malfunctioning due to BIOS writer's
using it in untested BIOS flows. But some OEM's used _OSI("Linux")
in tested flows to support real Linux features. In 2009, Linux
removed _OSI("Linux"), and added a cmdline parameter to restore it
for legacy systems still needed it. Further a BIOS_BUG warning prints
for all BIOS's that invoke it.
No BIOS should use _OSI("Linux").
The result is a strategy for Linux to maximize compatibility with
ACPI BIOS that are tested on Windows machines. There is a real risk
of over-stating that compatibility; but the alternative has often been
catastrophic failure resulting from the BIOS taking paths that
were never validated under *any* OS.
Do not use _REV
---------------
Since _OSI("Linux") went away, some BIOS writers used _REV
to support Linux and Windows differences in the same BIOS.
_REV was defined in ACPI 1.0 to return the version of ACPI
supported by the OS and the OS AML interpreter.
Modern Windows returns _REV = 2. Linux used ACPI_CA_SUPPORT_LEVEL,
which would increment, based on the version of the spec supported.
Unfortunately, _REV was also misused. eg. some BIOS would check
for _REV = 3, and do something for Linux, but when Linux returned
_REV = 4, that support broke.
In response to this problem, Linux returns _REV = 2 always,
from mid-2015 onward. The ACPI specification will also be updated
to reflect that _REV is deprecated, and always returns 2.
Apple Mac and _OSI("Darwin")
----------------------------
On Apple's Mac platforms, the ACPI BIOS invokes _OSI("Darwin")
to determine if the machine is running Apple OSX.
Like Linux's _OSI("*Windows*") strategy, Linux defaults to
answering YES to _OSI("Darwin") to enable full access
to the hardware and validated BIOS paths seen by OSX.
Just like on Windows-tested platforms, this strategy has risks.
Starting in Linux-3.18, the kernel answered YES to _OSI("Darwin")
for the purpose of enabling Mac Thunderbolt support. Further,
if the kernel noticed _OSI("Darwin") being invoked, it additionally
disabled all _OSI("*Windows*") to keep poorly written Mac BIOS
from going down untested combinations of paths.
The Linux-3.18 change in default caused power regressions on Mac
laptops, and the 3.18 implementation did not allow changing
the default via cmdline "acpi_osi=!Darwin". Linux-4.7 fixed
the ability to use acpi_osi=!Darwin as a workaround, and
we hope to see Mac Thunderbolt power management support in Linux-4.11.

2
Documentation/acpi/video_extension.txt
View File

@ -101,6 +101,6 @@ received a notification, it will set the backlight level accordingly. This does
not affect the sending of event to user space, they are always sent to user
space regardless of whether or not the video module controls the backlight level
directly. This behaviour can be controlled through the brightness_switch_enabled
module parameter as documented in kernel-parameters.txt. It is recommended to
module parameter as documented in admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst. It is recommended to
disable this behaviour once a GUI environment starts up and wants to have full
control of the backlight level.

411
Documentation/admin-guide/README.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,411 @@
Linux kernel release 4.x <http://kernel.org/>
=============================================
These are the release notes for Linux version 4. Read them carefully,
as they tell you what this is all about, explain how to install the
kernel, and what to do if something goes wrong.
What is Linux?
--------------
Linux is a clone of the operating system Unix, written from scratch by
Linus Torvalds with assistance from a loosely-knit team of hackers across
the Net. It aims towards POSIX and Single UNIX Specification compliance.
It has all the features you would expect in a modern fully-fledged Unix,
including true multitasking, virtual memory, shared libraries, demand
loading, shared copy-on-write executables, proper memory management,
and multistack networking including IPv4 and IPv6.
It is distributed under the GNU General Public License - see the
accompanying COPYING file for more details.
On what hardware does it run?
-----------------------------
Although originally developed first for 32-bit x86-based PCs (386 or higher),
today Linux also runs on (at least) the Compaq Alpha AXP, Sun SPARC and
UltraSPARC, Motorola 68000, PowerPC, PowerPC64, ARM, Hitachi SuperH, Cell,
IBM S/390, MIPS, HP PA-RISC, Intel IA-64, DEC VAX, AMD x86-64, AXIS CRIS,
Xtensa, Tilera TILE, AVR32, ARC and Renesas M32R architectures.
Linux is easily portable to most general-purpose 32- or 64-bit architectures
as long as they have a paged memory management unit (PMMU) and a port of the
GNU C compiler (gcc) (part of The GNU Compiler Collection, GCC). Linux has
also been ported to a number of architectures without a PMMU, although
functionality is then obviously somewhat limited.
Linux has also been ported to itself. You can now run the kernel as a
userspace application - this is called UserMode Linux (UML).
Documentation
-------------
- There is a lot of documentation available both in electronic form on
the Internet and in books, both Linux-specific and pertaining to
general UNIX questions. I'd recommend looking into the documentation
subdirectories on any Linux FTP site for the LDP (Linux Documentation
Project) books. This README is not meant to be documentation on the
system: there are much better sources available.
- There are various README files in the Documentation/ subdirectory:
these typically contain kernel-specific installation notes for some
drivers for example. See Documentation/00-INDEX for a list of what
is contained in each file. Please read the
:ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>` file, as it
contains information about the problems, which may result by upgrading
your kernel.
- The Documentation/DocBook/ subdirectory contains several guides for
kernel developers and users. These guides can be rendered in a
number of formats: PostScript (.ps), PDF, HTML, & man-pages, among others.
After installation, ``make psdocs``, ``make pdfdocs``, ``make htmldocs``,
or ``make mandocs`` will render the documentation in the requested format.
Installing the kernel source
----------------------------
- If you install the full sources, put the kernel tarball in a
directory where you have permissions (e.g. your home directory) and
unpack it::
xz -cd linux-4.X.tar.xz | tar xvf -
Replace "X" with the version number of the latest kernel.
Do NOT use the /usr/src/linux area! This area has a (usually
incomplete) set of kernel headers that are used by the library header
files. They should match the library, and not get messed up by
whatever the kernel-du-jour happens to be.
- You can also upgrade between 4.x releases by patching. Patches are
distributed in the xz format. To install by patching, get all the
newer patch files, enter the top level directory of the kernel source
(linux-4.X) and execute::
xz -cd ../patch-4.x.xz | patch -p1
Replace "x" for all versions bigger than the version "X" of your current
source tree, **in_order**, and you should be ok. You may want to remove
the backup files (some-file-name~ or some-file-name.orig), and make sure
that there are no failed patches (some-file-name# or some-file-name.rej).
If there are, either you or I have made a mistake.
Unlike patches for the 4.x kernels, patches for the 4.x.y kernels
(also known as the -stable kernels) are not incremental but instead apply
directly to the base 4.x kernel. For example, if your base kernel is 4.0
and you want to apply the 4.0.3 patch, you must not first apply the 4.0.1
and 4.0.2 patches. Similarly, if you are running kernel version 4.0.2 and
want to jump to 4.0.3, you must first reverse the 4.0.2 patch (that is,
patch -R) **before** applying the 4.0.3 patch. You can read more on this in
:ref:`Documentation/process/applying-patches.rst <applying_patches>`.
Alternatively, the script patch-kernel can be used to automate this
process. It determines the current kernel version and applies any
patches found::
linux/scripts/patch-kernel linux
The first argument in the command above is the location of the
kernel source. Patches are applied from the current directory, but
an alternative directory can be specified as the second argument.
- Make sure you have no stale .o files and dependencies lying around::
cd linux
make mrproper
You should now have the sources correctly installed.
Software requirements
---------------------
Compiling and running the 4.x kernels requires up-to-date
versions of various software packages. Consult
:ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>` for the minimum version numbers
required and how to get updates for these packages. Beware that using
excessively old versions of these packages can cause indirect
errors that are very difficult to track down, so don't assume that
you can just update packages when obvious problems arise during
build or operation.
Build directory for the kernel
------------------------------
When compiling the kernel, all output files will per default be
stored together with the kernel source code.
Using the option ``make O=output/dir`` allows you to specify an alternate
place for the output files (including .config).
Example::
kernel source code: /usr/src/linux-4.X
build directory: /home/name/build/kernel
To configure and build the kernel, use::
cd /usr/src/linux-4.X
make O=/home/name/build/kernel menuconfig
make O=/home/name/build/kernel
sudo make O=/home/name/build/kernel modules_install install
Please note: If the ``O=output/dir`` option is used, then it must be
used for all invocations of make.
Configuring the kernel
----------------------
Do not skip this step even if you are only upgrading one minor
version. New configuration options are added in each release, and
odd problems will turn up if the configuration files are not set up
as expected. If you want to carry your existing configuration to a
new version with minimal work, use ``make oldconfig``, which will
only ask you for the answers to new questions.
- Alternative configuration commands are::
"make config" Plain text interface.
"make menuconfig" Text based color menus, radiolists & dialogs.
"make nconfig" Enhanced text based color menus.
"make xconfig" Qt based configuration tool.
"make gconfig" GTK+ based configuration tool.
"make oldconfig" Default all questions based on the contents of
your existing ./.config file and asking about
new config symbols.
"make silentoldconfig"
Like above, but avoids cluttering the screen
with questions already answered.
Additionally updates the dependencies.
"make olddefconfig"
Like above, but sets new symbols to their default
values without prompting.
"make defconfig" Create a ./.config file by using the default
symbol values from either arch/$ARCH/defconfig
or arch/$ARCH/configs/${PLATFORM}_defconfig,
depending on the architecture.
"make ${PLATFORM}_defconfig"
Create a ./.config file by using the default
symbol values from
arch/$ARCH/configs/${PLATFORM}_defconfig.
Use "make help" to get a list of all available
platforms of your architecture.
"make allyesconfig"
Create a ./.config file by setting symbol
values to 'y' as much as possible.
"make allmodconfig"
Create a ./.config file by setting symbol
values to 'm' as much as possible.
"make allnoconfig" Create a ./.config file by setting symbol
values to 'n' as much as possible.
"make randconfig" Create a ./.config file by setting symbol
values to random values.
"make localmodconfig" Create a config based on current config and
loaded modules (lsmod). Disables any module
option that is not needed for the loaded modules.
To create a localmodconfig for another machine,
store the lsmod of that machine into a file
and pass it in as a LSMOD parameter.
target$ lsmod > /tmp/mylsmod
target$ scp /tmp/mylsmod host:/tmp
host$ make LSMOD=/tmp/mylsmod localmodconfig
The above also works when cross compiling.
"make localyesconfig" Similar to localmodconfig, except it will convert
all module options to built in (=y) options.
You can find more information on using the Linux kernel config tools
in Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt.
- NOTES on ``make config``:
- Having unnecessary drivers will make the kernel bigger, and can
under some circumstances lead to problems: probing for a
nonexistent controller card may confuse your other controllers
- A kernel with math-emulation compiled in will still use the
coprocessor if one is present: the math emulation will just
never get used in that case. The kernel will be slightly larger,
but will work on different machines regardless of whether they
have a math coprocessor or not.
- The "kernel hacking" configuration details usually result in a
bigger or slower kernel (or both), and can even make the kernel
less stable by configuring some routines to actively try to
break bad code to find kernel problems (kmalloc()). Thus you
should probably answer 'n' to the questions for "development",
"experimental", or "debugging" features.
Compiling the kernel
--------------------
- Make sure you have at least gcc 3.2 available.
For more information, refer to :ref:`Documentation/process/changes.rst <changes>`.
Please note that you can still run a.out user programs with this kernel.
- Do a ``make`` to create a compressed kernel image. It is also
possible to do ``make install`` if you have lilo installed to suit the
kernel makefiles, but you may want to check your particular lilo setup first.
To do the actual install, you have to be root, but none of the normal
build should require that. Don't take the name of root in vain.
- If you configured any of the parts of the kernel as ``modules``, you
will also have to do ``make modules_install``.
- Verbose kernel compile/build output:
Normally, the kernel build system runs in a fairly quiet mode (but not
totally silent). However, sometimes you or other kernel developers need
to see compile, link, or other commands exactly as they are executed.
For this, use "verbose" build mode. This is done by passing
``V=1`` to the ``make`` command, e.g.::
make V=1 all
To have the build system also tell the reason for the rebuild of each
target, use ``V=2``. The default is ``V=0``.
- Keep a backup kernel handy in case something goes wrong. This is
especially true for the development releases, since each new release
contains new code which has not been debugged. Make sure you keep a
backup of the modules corresponding to that kernel, as well. If you
are installing a new kernel with the same version number as your
working kernel, make a backup of your modules directory before you
do a ``make modules_install``.
Alternatively, before compiling, use the kernel config option
"LOCALVERSION" to append a unique suffix to the regular kernel version.
LOCALVERSION can be set in the "General Setup" menu.
- In order to boot your new kernel, you'll need to copy the kernel
image (e.g. .../linux/arch/x86/boot/bzImage after compilation)
to the place where your regular bootable kernel is found.
- Booting a kernel directly from a floppy without the assistance of a
bootloader such as LILO, is no longer supported.
If you boot Linux from the hard drive, chances are you use LILO, which
uses the kernel image as specified in the file /etc/lilo.conf. The
kernel image file is usually /vmlinuz, /boot/vmlinuz, /bzImage or
/boot/bzImage. To use the new kernel, save a copy of the old image
and copy the new image over the old one. Then, you MUST RERUN LILO
to update the loading map! If you don't, you won't be able to boot
the new kernel image.
Reinstalling LILO is usually a matter of running /sbin/lilo.
You may wish to edit /etc/lilo.conf to specify an entry for your
old kernel image (say, /vmlinux.old) in case the new one does not
work. See the LILO docs for more information.
After reinstalling LILO, you should be all set. Shutdown the system,
reboot, and enjoy!
If you ever need to change the default root device, video mode,
ramdisk size, etc. in the kernel image, use the ``rdev`` program (or
alternatively the LILO boot options when appropriate). No need to
recompile the kernel to change these parameters.
- Reboot with the new kernel and enjoy.
If something goes wrong
-----------------------
- If you have problems that seem to be due to kernel bugs, please check
the file MAINTAINERS to see if there is a particular person associated
with the part of the kernel that you are having trouble with. If there
isn't anyone listed there, then the second best thing is to mail
them to me (torvalds@linux-foundation.org), and possibly to any other
relevant mailing-list or to the newsgroup.
- In all bug-reports, *please* tell what kernel you are talking about,
how to duplicate the problem, and what your setup is (use your common
sense). If the problem is new, tell me so, and if the problem is
old, please try to tell me when you first noticed it.
- If the bug results in a message like::
unable to handle kernel paging request at address C0000010
Oops: 0002
EIP: 0010:XXXXXXXX
eax: xxxxxxxx ebx: xxxxxxxx ecx: xxxxxxxx edx: xxxxxxxx
esi: xxxxxxxx edi: xxxxxxxx ebp: xxxxxxxx
ds: xxxx es: xxxx fs: xxxx gs: xxxx
Pid: xx, process nr: xx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
or similar kernel debugging information on your screen or in your
system log, please duplicate it *exactly*. The dump may look
incomprehensible to you, but it does contain information that may
help debugging the problem. The text above the dump is also
important: it tells something about why the kernel dumped code (in
the above example, it's due to a bad kernel pointer). More information
on making sense of the dump is in Documentation/admin-guide/oops-tracing.rst
- If you compiled the kernel with CONFIG_KALLSYMS you can send the dump
as is, otherwise you will have to use the ``ksymoops`` program to make
sense of the dump (but compiling with CONFIG_KALLSYMS is usually preferred).
This utility can be downloaded from
ftp://ftp.<country>.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/ .
Alternatively, you can do the dump lookup by hand:
- In debugging dumps like the above, it helps enormously if you can
look up what the EIP value means. The hex value as such doesn't help
me or anybody else very much: it will depend on your particular
kernel setup. What you should do is take the hex value from the EIP
line (ignore the ``0010:``), and look it up in the kernel namelist to
see which kernel function contains the offending address.
To find out the kernel function name, you'll need to find the system
binary associated with the kernel that exhibited the symptom. This is
the file 'linux/vmlinux'. To extract the namelist and match it against
the EIP from the kernel crash, do::
nm vmlinux | sort | less
This will give you a list of kernel addresses sorted in ascending
order, from which it is simple to find the function that contains the
offending address. Note that the address given by the kernel
debugging messages will not necessarily match exactly with the
function addresses (in fact, that is very unlikely), so you can't
just 'grep' the list: the list will, however, give you the starting
point of each kernel function, so by looking for the function that
has a starting address lower than the one you are searching for but
is followed by a function with a higher address you will find the one
you want. In fact, it may be a good idea to include a bit of
"context" in your problem report, giving a few lines around the
interesting one.
If you for some reason cannot do the above (you have a pre-compiled
kernel image or similar), telling me as much about your setup as
possible will help. Please read the :ref:`admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst <reportingbugs>`
document for details.
- Alternatively, you can use gdb on a running kernel. (read-only; i.e. you
cannot change values or set break points.) To do this, first compile the
kernel with -g; edit arch/x86/Makefile appropriately, then do a ``make
clean``. You'll also need to enable CONFIG_PROC_FS (via ``make config``).
After you've rebooted with the new kernel, do ``gdb vmlinux /proc/kcore``.
You can now use all the usual gdb commands. The command to look up the
point where your system crashed is ``l *0xXXXXXXXX``. (Replace the XXXes
with the EIP value.)
gdb'ing a non-running kernel currently fails because ``gdb`` (wrongly)
disregards the starting offset for which the kernel is compiled.

151
Documentation/admin-guide/binfmt-misc.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
Kernel Support for miscellaneous (your favourite) Binary Formats v1.1
=====================================================================
This Kernel feature allows you to invoke almost (for restrictions see below)
every program by simply typing its name in the shell.
This includes for example compiled Java(TM), Python or Emacs programs.
To achieve this you must tell binfmt_misc which interpreter has to be invoked
with which binary. Binfmt_misc recognises the binary-type by matching some bytes
at the beginning of the file with a magic byte sequence (masking out specified
bits) you have supplied. Binfmt_misc can also recognise a filename extension
aka ``.com`` or ``.exe``.
First you must mount binfmt_misc::
mount binfmt_misc -t binfmt_misc /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc
To actually register a new binary type, you have to set up a string looking like
``:name:type:offset:magic:mask:interpreter:flags`` (where you can choose the
``:`` upon your needs) and echo it to ``/proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register``.
Here is what the fields mean:
- ``name``
is an identifier string. A new /proc file will be created with this
``name below /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc``; cannot contain slashes ``/`` for
obvious reasons.
- ``type``
is the type of recognition. Give ``M`` for magic and ``E`` for extension.
- ``offset``
is the offset of the magic/mask in the file, counted in bytes. This
defaults to 0 if you omit it (i.e. you write ``:name:type::magic...``).
Ignored when using filename extension matching.
- ``magic``
is the byte sequence binfmt_misc is matching for. The magic string
may contain hex-encoded characters like ``\x0a`` or ``\xA4``. Note that you
must escape any NUL bytes; parsing halts at the first one. In a shell
environment you might have to write ``\\x0a`` to prevent the shell from
eating your ``\``.
If you chose filename extension matching, this is the extension to be
recognised (without the ``.``, the ``\x0a`` specials are not allowed).
Extension matching is case sensitive, and slashes ``/`` are not allowed!
- ``mask``
is an (optional, defaults to all 0xff) mask. You can mask out some
bits from matching by supplying a string like magic and as long as magic.
The mask is anded with the byte sequence of the file. Note that you must
escape any NUL bytes; parsing halts at the first one. Ignored when using
filename extension matching.
- ``interpreter``
is the program that should be invoked with the binary as first
argument (specify the full path)
- ``flags``
is an optional field that controls several aspects of the invocation
of the interpreter. It is a string of capital letters, each controls a
certain aspect. The following flags are supported:
``P`` - preserve-argv[0]
Legacy behavior of binfmt_misc is to overwrite
the original argv[0] with the full path to the binary. When this
flag is included, binfmt_misc will add an argument to the argument
vector for this purpose, thus preserving the original ``argv[0]``.
e.g. If your interp is set to ``/bin/foo`` and you run ``blah``
(which is in ``/usr/local/bin``), then the kernel will execute
``/bin/foo`` with ``argv[]`` set to ``["/bin/foo", "/usr/local/bin/blah", "blah"]``. The interp has to be aware of this so it can
execute ``/usr/local/bin/blah``
with ``argv[]`` set to ``["blah"]``.
``O`` - open-binary
Legacy behavior of binfmt_misc is to pass the full path
of the binary to the interpreter as an argument. When this flag is
included, binfmt_misc will open the file for reading and pass its
descriptor as an argument, instead of the full path, thus allowing
the interpreter to execute non-readable binaries. This feature
should be used with care - the interpreter has to be trusted not to
emit the contents of the non-readable binary.
``C`` - credentials
Currently, the behavior of binfmt_misc is to calculate
the credentials and security token of the new process according to
the interpreter. When this flag is included, these attributes are
calculated according to the binary. It also implies the ``O`` flag.
This feature should be used with care as the interpreter
will run with root permissions when a setuid binary owned by root
is run with binfmt_misc.
``F`` - fix binary
The usual behaviour of binfmt_misc is to spawn the
binary lazily when the misc format file is invoked. However,
this doesn``t work very well in the face of mount namespaces and
changeroots, so the ``F`` mode opens the binary as soon as the
emulation is installed and uses the opened image to spawn the
emulator, meaning it is always available once installed,
regardless of how the environment changes.
There are some restrictions:
- the whole register string may not exceed 1920 characters
- the magic must reside in the first 128 bytes of the file, i.e.
offset+size(magic) has to be less than 128
- the interpreter string may not exceed 127 characters
To use binfmt_misc you have to mount it first. You can mount it with
``mount -t binfmt_misc none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc`` command, or you can add
a line ``none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc binfmt_misc defaults 0 0`` to your
``/etc/fstab`` so it auto mounts on boot.
You may want to add the binary formats in one of your ``/etc/rc`` scripts during
boot-up. Read the manual of your init program to figure out how to do this
right.
Think about the order of adding entries! Later added entries are matched first!
A few examples (assumed you are in ``/proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc``):
- enable support for em86 (like binfmt_em86, for Alpha AXP only)::
echo ':i386:M::\x7fELF\x01\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x02\x00\x03:\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfe\xfe\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfb\xff\xff:/bin/em86:' > register
echo ':i486:M::\x7fELF\x01\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x02\x00\x06:\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfe\xfe\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfb\xff\xff:/bin/em86:' > register
- enable support for packed DOS applications (pre-configured dosemu hdimages)::
echo ':DEXE:M::\x0eDEX::/usr/bin/dosexec:' > register
- enable support for Windows executables using wine::
echo ':DOSWin:M::MZ::/usr/local/bin/wine:' > register
For java support see Documentation/admin-guide/java.rst
You can enable/disable binfmt_misc or one binary type by echoing 0 (to disable)
or 1 (to enable) to ``/proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/status`` or
``/proc/.../the_name``.
Catting the file tells you the current status of ``binfmt_misc/the_entry``.
You can remove one entry or all entries by echoing -1 to ``/proc/.../the_name``
or ``/proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/status``.
Hints
-----
If you want to pass special arguments to your interpreter, you can
write a wrapper script for it. See Documentation/admin-guide/java.rst for an
example.
Your interpreter should NOT look in the PATH for the filename; the kernel
passes it the full filename (or the file descriptor) to use. Using ``$PATH`` can
cause unexpected behaviour and can be a security hazard.
Richard Günther <rguenth@tat.physik.uni-tuebingen.de>

38
Documentation/admin-guide/braille-console.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
Linux Braille Console
=====================
To get early boot messages on a braille device (before userspace screen
readers can start), you first need to compile the support for the usual serial
console (see :ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/serial-console.rst <serial_console>`), and
for braille device
(in :menuselection:`Device Drivers --> Accessibility support --> Console on braille device`).
Then you need to specify a ``console=brl``, option on the kernel command line, the
format is::
console=brl,serial_options...
where ``serial_options...`` are the same as described in
:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/serial-console.rst <serial_console>`.
So for instance you can use ``console=brl,ttyS0`` if the braille device is connected to the first serial port, and ``console=brl,ttyS0,115200`` to
override the baud rate to 115200, etc.
By default, the braille device will just show the last kernel message (console
mode). To review previous messages, press the Insert key to switch to the VT
review mode. In review mode, the arrow keys permit to browse in the VT content,
:kbd:`PAGE-UP`/:kbd:`PAGE-DOWN` keys go at the top/bottom of the screen, and
the :kbd:`HOME` key goes back
to the cursor, hence providing very basic screen reviewing facility.
Sound feedback can be obtained by adding the ``braille_console.sound=1`` kernel
parameter.
For simplicity, only one braille console can be enabled, other uses of
``console=brl,...`` will be discarded. Also note that it does not interfere with
the console selection mechanism described in
:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/serial-console.rst <serial_console>`.
For now, only the VisioBraille device is supported.
Samuel Thibault <samuel.thibault@ens-lyon.org>

76
Documentation/admin-guide/bug-bisect.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
Bisecting a bug
+++++++++++++++
Last updated: 28 October 2016
Introduction
============
Always try the latest kernel from kernel.org and build from source. If you are
not confident in doing that please report the bug to your distribution vendor
instead of to a kernel developer.
Finding bugs is not always easy. Have a go though. If you can't find it don't
give up. Report as much as you have found to the relevant maintainer. See
MAINTAINERS for who that is for the subsystem you have worked on.
Before you submit a bug report read
:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst <reportingbugs>`.
Devices not appearing
=====================
Often this is caused by udev/systemd. Check that first before blaming it
on the kernel.
Finding patch that caused a bug
===============================
Using the provided tools with ``git`` makes finding bugs easy provided the bug
is reproducible.
Steps to do it:
- build the Kernel from its git source
- start bisect with [#f1]_::
$ git bisect start
- mark the broken changeset with::
$ git bisect bad [commit]
- mark a changeset where the code is known to work with::
$ git bisect good [commit]
- rebuild the Kernel and test
- interact with git bisect by using either::
$ git bisect good
or::
$ git bisect bad
depending if the bug happened on the changeset you're testing
- After some interactions, git bisect will give you the changeset that
likely caused the bug.
- For example, if you know that the current version is bad, and version
4.8 is good, you could do::
$ git bisect start
$ git bisect bad # Current version is bad
$ git bisect good v4.8
.. [#f1] You can, optionally, provide both good and bad arguments at git
start with ``git bisect start [BAD] [GOOD]``
For further references, please read:
- The man page for ``git-bisect``
- `Fighting regressions with git bisect <https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/git-bisect-lk2009.html>`_
- `Fully automated bisecting with "git bisect run" <https://lwn.net/Articles/317154>`_
- `Using Git bisect to figure out when brokenness was introduced <http://webchick.net/node/99>`_

369
Documentation/admin-guide/bug-hunting.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,369 @@
Bug hunting
===========
Kernel bug reports often come with a stack dump like the one below::
------------[ cut here ]------------
WARNING: CPU: 1 PID: 28102 at kernel/module.c:1108 module_put+0x57/0x70
Modules linked in: dvb_usb_gp8psk(-) dvb_usb dvb_core nvidia_drm(PO) nvidia_modeset(PO) snd_hda_codec_hdmi snd_hda_intel snd_hda_codec snd_hwdep snd_hda_core snd_pcm snd_timer snd soundcore nvidia(PO) [last unloaded: rc_core]
CPU: 1 PID: 28102 Comm: rmmod Tainted: P WC O 4.8.4-build.1 #1
Hardware name: MSI MS-7309/MS-7309, BIOS V1.12 02/23/2009
00000000 c12ba080 00000000 00000000 c103ed6a c1616014 00000001 00006dc6
c1615862 00000454 c109e8a7 c109e8a7 00000009 ffffffff 00000000 f13f6a10
f5f5a600 c103ee33 00000009 00000000 00000000 c109e8a7 f80ca4d0 c109f617
Call Trace:
[<c12ba080>] ? dump_stack+0x44/0x64
[<c103ed6a>] ? __warn+0xfa/0x120
[<c109e8a7>] ? module_put+0x57/0x70
[<c109e8a7>] ? module_put+0x57/0x70
[<c103ee33>] ? warn_slowpath_null+0x23/0x30
[<c109e8a7>] ? module_put+0x57/0x70
[<f80ca4d0>] ? gp8psk_fe_set_frontend+0x460/0x460 [dvb_usb_gp8psk]
[<c109f617>] ? symbol_put_addr+0x27/0x50
[<f80bc9ca>] ? dvb_usb_adapter_frontend_exit+0x3a/0x70 [dvb_usb]
[<f80bb3bf>] ? dvb_usb_exit+0x2f/0xd0 [dvb_usb]
[<c13d03bc>] ? usb_disable_endpoint+0x7c/0xb0
[<f80bb48a>] ? dvb_usb_device_exit+0x2a/0x50 [dvb_usb]
[<c13d2882>] ? usb_unbind_interface+0x62/0x250
[<c136b514>] ? __pm_runtime_idle+0x44/0x70
[<c13620d8>] ? __device_release_driver+0x78/0x120
[<c1362907>] ? driver_detach+0x87/0x90
[<c1361c48>] ? bus_remove_driver+0x38/0x90
[<c13d1c18>] ? usb_deregister+0x58/0xb0
[<c109fbb0>] ? SyS_delete_module+0x130/0x1f0
[<c1055654>] ? task_work_run+0x64/0x80
[<c1000fa5>] ? exit_to_usermode_loop+0x85/0x90
[<c10013f0>] ? do_fast_syscall_32+0x80/0x130
[<c1549f43>] ? sysenter_past_esp+0x40/0x6a
---[ end trace 6ebc60ef3981792f ]---
Such stack traces provide enough information to identify the line inside the
Kernel's source code where the bug happened. Depending on the severity of
the issue, it may also contain the word **Oops**, as on this one::
BUG: unable to handle kernel NULL pointer dereference at (null)
IP: [<c06969d4>] iret_exc+0x7d0/0xa59
*pdpt = 000000002258a001 *pde = 0000000000000000
Oops: 0002 [#1] PREEMPT SMP
...
Despite being an **Oops** or some other sort of stack trace, the offended
line is usually required to identify and handle the bug. Along this chapter,
we'll refer to "Oops" for all kinds of stack traces that need to be analized.
.. note::
``ksymoops`` is useless on 2.6 or upper. Please use the Oops in its original
format (from ``dmesg``, etc). Ignore any references in this or other docs to
"decoding the Oops" or "running it through ksymoops".
If you post an Oops from 2.6+ that has been run through ``ksymoops``,
people will just tell you to repost it.
Where is the Oops message is located?
-------------------------------------
Normally the Oops text is read from the kernel buffers by klogd and
handed to ``syslogd`` which writes it to a syslog file, typically
``/var/log/messages`` (depends on ``/etc/syslog.conf``). On systems with
systemd, it may also be stored by the ``journald`` daemon, and accessed
by running ``journalctl`` command.
Sometimes ``klogd`` dies, in which case you can run ``dmesg > file`` to
read the data from the kernel buffers and save it. Or you can
``cat /proc/kmsg > file``, however you have to break in to stop the transfer,
``kmsg`` is a "never ending file".
If the machine has crashed so badly that you cannot enter commands or
the disk is not available then you have three options:
(1) Hand copy the text from the screen and type it in after the machine
has restarted. Messy but it is the only option if you have not
planned for a crash. Alternatively, you can take a picture of
the screen with a digital camera - not nice, but better than
nothing. If the messages scroll off the top of the console, you
may find that booting with a higher resolution (eg, ``vga=791``)
will allow you to read more of the text. (Caveat: This needs ``vesafb``,
so won't help for 'early' oopses)
(2) Boot with a serial console (see
:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/serial-console.rst <serial_console>`),
run a null modem to a second machine and capture the output there
using your favourite communication program. Minicom works well.
(3) Use Kdump (see Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt),
extract the kernel ring buffer from old memory with using dmesg
gdbmacro in Documentation/kdump/gdbmacros.txt.
Finding the bug's location
--------------------------
Reporting a bug works best if you point the location of the bug at the
Kernel source file. There are two methods for doing that. Usually, using
``gdb`` is easier, but the Kernel should be pre-compiled with debug info.
gdb
^^^
The GNU debug (``gdb``) is the best way to figure out the exact file and line
number of the OOPS from the ``vmlinux`` file.
The usage of gdb works best on a kernel compiled with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO``.
This can be set by running::
$ ./scripts/config -d COMPILE_TEST -e DEBUG_KERNEL -e DEBUG_INFO
On a kernel compiled with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO``, you can simply copy the
EIP value from the OOPS::
EIP: 0060:[<c021e50e>] Not tainted VLI
And use GDB to translate that to human-readable form::
$ gdb vmlinux
(gdb) l *0xc021e50e
If you don't have ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO`` enabled, you use the function
offset from the OOPS::
EIP is at vt_ioctl+0xda8/0x1482
And recompile the kernel with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO`` enabled::
$ ./scripts/config -d COMPILE_TEST -e DEBUG_KERNEL -e DEBUG_INFO
$ make vmlinux
$ gdb vmlinux
(gdb) l *vt_ioctl+0xda8
0x1888 is in vt_ioctl (drivers/tty/vt/vt_ioctl.c:293).
288 {
289 struct vc_data *vc = NULL;
290 int ret = 0;
291
292 console_lock();
293 if (VT_BUSY(vc_num))
294 ret = -EBUSY;
295 else if (vc_num)
296 vc = vc_deallocate(vc_num);
297 console_unlock();
or, if you want to be more verbose::
(gdb) p vt_ioctl
$1 = {int (struct tty_struct *, unsigned int, unsigned long)} 0xae0 <vt_ioctl>
(gdb) l *0xae0+0xda8
You could, instead, use the object file::
$ make drivers/tty/
$ gdb drivers/tty/vt/vt_ioctl.o
(gdb) l *vt_ioctl+0xda8
If you have a call trace, such as::
Call Trace:
[<ffffffff8802c8e9>] :jbd:log_wait_commit+0xa3/0xf5
[<ffffffff810482d9>] autoremove_wake_function+0x0/0x2e
[<ffffffff8802770b>] :jbd:journal_stop+0x1be/0x1ee
...
this shows the problem likely in the :jbd: module. You can load that module
in gdb and list the relevant code::
$ gdb fs/jbd/jbd.ko
(gdb) l *log_wait_commit+0xa3
.. note::
You can also do the same for any function call at the stack trace,
like this one::
[<f80bc9ca>] ? dvb_usb_adapter_frontend_exit+0x3a/0x70 [dvb_usb]
The position where the above call happened can be seen with::
$ gdb drivers/media/usb/dvb-usb/dvb-usb.o
(gdb) l *dvb_usb_adapter_frontend_exit+0x3a
objdump
^^^^^^^
To debug a kernel, use objdump and look for the hex offset from the crash
output to find the valid line of code/assembler. Without debug symbols, you
will see the assembler code for the routine shown, but if your kernel has
debug symbols the C code will also be available. (Debug symbols can be enabled
in the kernel hacking menu of the menu configuration.) For example::
$ objdump -r -S -l --disassemble net/dccp/ipv4.o
.. note::
You need to be at the top level of the kernel tree for this to pick up
your C files.
If you don't have access to the code you can also debug on some crash dumps
e.g. crash dump output as shown by Dave Miller::
EIP is at +0x14/0x4c0
...
Code: 44 24 04 e8 6f 05 00 00 e9 e8 fe ff ff 8d 76 00 8d bc 27 00 00
00 00 55 57 56 53 81 ec bc 00 00 00 8b ac 24 d0 00 00 00 8b 5d 08
<8b> 83 3c 01 00 00 89 44 24 14 8b 45 28 85 c0 89 44 24 18 0f 85
Put the bytes into a "foo.s" file like this:
.text
.globl foo
foo:
.byte .... /* bytes from Code: part of OOPS dump */
Compile it with "gcc -c -o foo.o foo.s" then look at the output of
"objdump --disassemble foo.o".
Output:
ip_queue_xmit:
push %ebp
push %edi
push %esi
push %ebx
sub $0xbc, %esp
mov 0xd0(%esp), %ebp ! %ebp = arg0 (skb)
mov 0x8(%ebp), %ebx ! %ebx = skb->sk
mov 0x13c(%ebx), %eax ! %eax = inet_sk(sk)->opt
Reporting the bug
-----------------
Once you find where the bug happened, by inspecting its location,
you could either try to fix it yourself or report it upstream.
In order to report it upstream, you should identify the mailing list
used for the development of the affected code. This can be done by using
the ``get_maintainer.pl`` script.
For example, if you find a bug at the gspca's conex.c file, you can get
their maintainers with::
$ ./scripts/get_maintainer.pl -f drivers/media/usb/gspca/sonixj.c
Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> (odd fixer:GSPCA USB WEBCAM DRIVER,commit_signer:1/1=100%)
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@kernel.org> (maintainer:MEDIA INPUT INFRASTRUCTURE (V4L/DVB),commit_signer:1/1=100%)
Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> (commit_signer:1/1=100%)
Bhaktipriya Shridhar <bhaktipriya96@gmail.com> (commit_signer:1/1=100%,authored:1/1=100%,added_lines:4/4=100%,removed_lines:9/9=100%)
linux-media@vger.kernel.org (open list:GSPCA USB WEBCAM DRIVER)
linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org (open list)
Please notice that it will point to:
- The last developers that touched on the source code. On the above example,
Tejun and Bhaktipriya (in this specific case, none really envolved on the
development of this file);
- The driver maintainer (Hans Verkuil);
- The subsystem maintainer (Mauro Carvalho Chehab)
- The driver and/or subsystem mailing list (linux-media@vger.kernel.org);
- the Linux Kernel mailing list (linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org).
Usually, the fastest way to have your bug fixed is to report it to mailing
list used for the development of the code (linux-media ML) copying the driver maintainer (Hans).
If you are totally stumped as to whom to send the report, and
``get_maintainer.pl`` didn't provide you anything useful, send it to
linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org.
Thanks for your help in making Linux as stable as humanly possible.
Fixing the bug
--------------
If you know programming, you could help us by not only reporting the bug,
but also providing us with a solution. After all open source is about
sharing what you do and don't you want to be recognised for your genius?
If you decide to take this way, once you have worked out a fix please submit
it upstream.
Please do read
ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>` though
to help your code get accepted.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes on Oops tracing with ``klogd``
------------------------------------
In order to help Linus and the other kernel developers there has been
substantial support incorporated into ``klogd`` for processing protection
faults. In order to have full support for address resolution at least
version 1.3-pl3 of the ``sysklogd`` package should be used.
When a protection fault occurs the ``klogd`` daemon automatically
translates important addresses in the kernel log messages to their
symbolic equivalents. This translated kernel message is then
forwarded through whatever reporting mechanism ``klogd`` is using. The
protection fault message can be simply cut out of the message files
and forwarded to the kernel developers.
Two types of address resolution are performed by ``klogd``. The first is
static translation and the second is dynamic translation. Static
translation uses the System.map file in much the same manner that
ksymoops does. In order to do static translation the ``klogd`` daemon
must be able to find a system map file at daemon initialization time.
See the klogd man page for information on how ``klogd`` searches for map
files.
Dynamic address translation is important when kernel loadable modules
are being used. Since memory for kernel modules is allocated from the
kernel's dynamic memory pools there are no fixed locations for either
the start of the module or for functions and symbols in the module.
The kernel supports system calls which allow a program to determine
which modules are loaded and their location in memory. Using these
system calls the klogd daemon builds a symbol table which can be used
to debug a protection fault which occurs in a loadable kernel module.
At the very minimum klogd will provide the name of the module which
generated the protection fault. There may be additional symbolic
information available if the developer of the loadable module chose to
export symbol information from the module.
Since the kernel module environment can be dynamic there must be a
mechanism for notifying the ``klogd`` daemon when a change in module
environment occurs. There are command line options available which
allow klogd to signal the currently executing daemon that symbol
information should be refreshed. See the ``klogd`` manual page for more
information.
A patch is included with the sysklogd distribution which modifies the
``modules-2.0.0`` package to automatically signal klogd whenever a module
is loaded or unloaded. Applying this patch provides essentially
seamless support for debugging protection faults which occur with
kernel loadable modules.
The following is an example of a protection fault in a loadable module
processed by ``klogd``::
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: Unable to handle kernel paging request at virtual address f15e97cc
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: current->tss.cr3 = 0062d000, %cr3 = 0062d000
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: *pde = 00000000
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: Oops: 0002
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: CPU: 0
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: EIP: 0010:[oops:_oops+16/3868]
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: EFLAGS: 00010212
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: eax: 315e97cc ebx: 003a6f80 ecx: 001be77b edx: 00237c0c
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: esi: 00000000 edi: bffffdb3 ebp: 00589f90 esp: 00589f8c
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: ds: 0018 es: 0018 fs: 002b gs: 002b ss: 0018
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: Process oops_test (pid: 3374, process nr: 21, stackpage=00589000)
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: Stack: 315e97cc 00589f98 0100b0b4 bffffed4 0012e38e 00240c64 003a6f80 00000001
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: 00000000 00237810 bfffff00 0010a7fa 00000003 00000001 00000000 bfffff00
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: bffffdb3 bffffed4 ffffffda 0000002b 0007002b 0000002b 0000002b 00000036
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: Call Trace: [oops:_oops_ioctl+48/80] [_sys_ioctl+254/272] [_system_call+82/128]
Aug 29 09:51:01 blizard kernel: Code: c7 00 05 00 00 00 eb 08 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 89 ec 5d c3
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
::
Dr. G.W. Wettstein Oncology Research Div. Computing Facility
Roger Maris Cancer Center INTERNET: greg@wind.rmcc.com
820 4th St. N.
Fargo, ND 58122
Phone: 701-234-7556

10
Documentation/admin-guide/conf.py Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
# -*- coding: utf-8; mode: python -*-
project = 'Linux Kernel User Documentation'
tags.add("subproject")
latex_documents = [
('index', 'linux-user.tex', 'Linux Kernel User Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]

268
Documentation/admin-guide/devices.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
Linux allocated devices (4.x+ version)
======================================
This list is the Linux Device List, the official registry of allocated
device numbers and ``/dev`` directory nodes for the Linux operating
system.
The LaTeX version of this document is no longer maintained, nor is
the document that used to reside at lanana.org. This version in the
mainline Linux kernel is the master document. Updates shall be sent
as patches to the kernel maintainers (see the
:ref:`Documentation/process/submitting-patches.rst <submittingpatches>` document).
Specifically explore the sections titled "CHAR and MISC DRIVERS", and
"BLOCK LAYER" in the MAINTAINERS file to find the right maintainers
to involve for character and block devices.
This document is included by reference into the Filesystem Hierarchy
Standard (FHS). The FHS is available from http://www.pathname.com/fhs/.
Allocations marked (68k/Amiga) apply to Linux/68k on the Amiga
platform only. Allocations marked (68k/Atari) apply to Linux/68k on
the Atari platform only.
This document is in the public domain. The authors requests, however,
that semantically altered versions are not distributed without
permission of the authors, assuming the authors can be contacted without
an unreasonable effort.
.. attention::
DEVICE DRIVERS AUTHORS PLEASE READ THIS
Linux now has extensive support for dynamic allocation of device numbering
and can use ``sysfs`` and ``udev`` (``systemd``) to handle the naming needs.
There are still some exceptions in the serial and boot device area. Before
asking for a device number make sure you actually need one.
To have a major number allocated, or a minor number in situations
where that applies (e.g. busmice), please submit a patch and send to
the authors as indicated above.
Keep the description of the device *in the same format
as this list*. The reason for this is that it is the only way we have
found to ensure we have all the requisite information to publish your
device and avoid conflicts.
Finally, sometimes we have to play "namespace police." Please don't be
offended. We often get submissions for ``/dev`` names that would be bound
to cause conflicts down the road. We are trying to avoid getting in a
situation where we would have to suffer an incompatible forward
change. Therefore, please consult with us **before** you make your
device names and numbers in any way public, at least to the point
where it would be at all difficult to get them changed.
Your cooperation is appreciated.
.. include:: devices.txt
:literal:
Additional ``/dev/`` directory entries
--------------------------------------
This section details additional entries that should or may exist in
the /dev directory. It is preferred that symbolic links use the same
form (absolute or relative) as is indicated here. Links are
classified as "hard" or "symbolic" depending on the preferred type of
link; if possible, the indicated type of link should be used.
Compulsory links
++++++++++++++++
These links should exist on all systems:
=============== =============== =============== ===============================
/dev/fd /proc/self/fd symbolic File descriptors
/dev/stdin fd/0 symbolic stdin file descriptor
/dev/stdout fd/1 symbolic stdout file descriptor
/dev/stderr fd/2 symbolic stderr file descriptor
/dev/nfsd socksys symbolic Required by iBCS-2
/dev/X0R null symbolic Required by iBCS-2
=============== =============== =============== ===============================
Note: ``/dev/X0R`` is <letter X>-<digit 0>-<letter R>.
Recommended links
+++++++++++++++++
It is recommended that these links exist on all systems:
=============== =============== =============== ===============================
/dev/core /proc/kcore symbolic Backward compatibility
/dev/ramdisk ram0 symbolic Backward compatibility
/dev/ftape qft0 symbolic Backward compatibility
/dev/bttv0 video0 symbolic Backward compatibility
/dev/radio radio0 symbolic Backward compatibility
/dev/i2o* /dev/i2o/* symbolic Backward compatibility
/dev/scd? sr? hard Alternate SCSI CD-ROM name
=============== =============== =============== ===============================
Locally defined links
+++++++++++++++++++++
The following links may be established locally to conform to the
configuration of the system. This is merely a tabulation of existing
practice, and does not constitute a recommendation. However, if they
exist, they should have the following uses.
=============== =============== =============== ===============================
/dev/mouse mouse port symbolic Current mouse device
/dev/tape tape device symbolic Current tape device
/dev/cdrom CD-ROM device symbolic Current CD-ROM device
/dev/cdwriter CD-writer symbolic Current CD-writer device
/dev/scanner scanner symbolic Current scanner device
/dev/modem modem port symbolic Current dialout device
/dev/root root device symbolic Current root filesystem
/dev/swap swap device symbolic Current swap device
=============== =============== =============== ===============================
``/dev/modem`` should not be used for a modem which supports dialin as
well as dialout, as it tends to cause lock file problems. If it
exists, ``/dev/modem`` should point to the appropriate primary TTY device
(the use of the alternate callout devices is deprecated).
For SCSI devices, ``/dev/tape`` and ``/dev/cdrom`` should point to the
*cooked* devices (``/dev/st*`` and ``/dev/sr*``, respectively), whereas
``/dev/cdwriter`` and /dev/scanner should point to the appropriate generic
SCSI devices (/dev/sg*).
``/dev/mouse`` may point to a primary serial TTY device, a hardware mouse
device, or a socket for a mouse driver program (e.g. ``/dev/gpmdata``).
Sockets and pipes
+++++++++++++++++
Non-transient sockets and named pipes may exist in /dev. Common entries are:
=============== =============== ===============================================
/dev/printer socket lpd local socket
/dev/log socket syslog local socket
/dev/gpmdata socket gpm mouse multiplexer
=============== =============== ===============================================
Mount points
++++++++++++
The following names are reserved for mounting special filesystems
under /dev. These special filesystems provide kernel interfaces that
cannot be provided with standard device nodes.
=============== =============== ===============================================
/dev/pts devpts PTY slave filesystem
/dev/shm tmpfs POSIX shared memory maintenance access
=============== =============== ===============================================
Terminal devices
----------------
Terminal, or TTY devices are a special class of character devices. A
terminal device is any device that could act as a controlling terminal
for a session; this includes virtual consoles, serial ports, and
pseudoterminals (PTYs).
All terminal devices share a common set of capabilities known as line
disciplines; these include the common terminal line discipline as well
as SLIP and PPP modes.
All terminal devices are named similarly; this section explains the
naming and use of the various types of TTYs. Note that the naming
conventions include several historical warts; some of these are
Linux-specific, some were inherited from other systems, and some
reflect Linux outgrowing a borrowed convention.
A hash mark (``#``) in a device name is used here to indicate a decimal
number without leading zeroes.
Virtual consoles and the console device
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Virtual consoles are full-screen terminal displays on the system video
monitor. Virtual consoles are named ``/dev/tty#``, with numbering
starting at ``/dev/tty1``; ``/dev/tty0`` is the current virtual console.
``/dev/tty0`` is the device that should be used to access the system video
card on those architectures for which the frame buffer devices
(``/dev/fb*``) are not applicable. Do not use ``/dev/console``
for this purpose.
The console device, ``/dev/console``, is the device to which system
messages should be sent, and on which logins should be permitted in
single-user mode. Starting with Linux 2.1.71, ``/dev/console`` is managed
by the kernel; for previous versions it should be a symbolic link to
either ``/dev/tty0``, a specific virtual console such as ``/dev/tty1``, or to
a serial port primary (``tty*``, not ``cu*``) device, depending on the
configuration of the system.
Serial ports
++++++++++++
Serial ports are RS-232 serial ports and any device which simulates
one, either in hardware (such as internal modems) or in software (such
as the ISDN driver.) Under Linux, each serial ports has two device
names, the primary or callin device and the alternate or callout one.
Each kind of device is indicated by a different letter. For any
letter X, the names of the devices are ``/dev/ttyX#`` and ``/dev/cux#``,
respectively; for historical reasons, ``/dev/ttyS#`` and ``/dev/ttyC#``
correspond to ``/dev/cua#`` and ``/dev/cub#``. In the future, it should be
expected that multiple letters will be used; all letters will be upper
case for the "tty" device (e.g. ``/dev/ttyDP#``) and lower case for the
"cu" device (e.g. ``/dev/cudp#``).
The names ``/dev/ttyQ#`` and ``/dev/cuq#`` are reserved for local use.
The alternate devices provide for kernel-based exclusion and somewhat
different defaults than the primary devices. Their main purpose is to
allow the use of serial ports with programs with no inherent or broken
support for serial ports. Their use is deprecated, and they may be
removed from a future version of Linux.
Arbitration of serial ports is provided by the use of lock files with
the names ``/var/lock/LCK..ttyX#``. The contents of the lock file should
be the PID of the locking process as an ASCII number.
It is common practice to install links such as /dev/modem
which point to serial ports. In order to ensure proper locking in the
presence of these links, it is recommended that software chase
symlinks and lock all possible names; additionally, it is recommended
that a lock file be installed with the corresponding alternate
device. In order to avoid deadlocks, it is recommended that the locks
are acquired in the following order, and released in the reverse:
1. The symbolic link name, if any (``/var/lock/LCK..modem``)
2. The "tty" name (``/var/lock/LCK..ttyS2``)
3. The alternate device name (``/var/lock/LCK..cua2``)
In the case of nested symbolic links, the lock files should be
installed in the order the symlinks are resolved.
Under no circumstances should an application hold a lock while waiting
for another to be released. In addition, applications which attempt
to create lock files for the corresponding alternate device names
should take into account the possibility of being used on a non-serial
port TTY, for which no alternate device would exist.
Pseudoterminals (PTYs)
++++++++++++++++++++++
Pseudoterminals, or PTYs, are used to create login sessions or provide
other capabilities requiring a TTY line discipline (including SLIP or
PPP capability) to arbitrary data-generation processes. Each PTY has
a master side, named ``/dev/pty[p-za-e][0-9a-f]``, and a slave side, named
``/dev/tty[p-za-e][0-9a-f]``. The kernel arbitrates the use of PTYs by
allowing each master side to be opened only once.
Once the master side has been opened, the corresponding slave device
can be used in the same manner as any TTY device. The master and
slave devices are connected by the kernel, generating the equivalent
of a bidirectional pipe with TTY capabilities.
Recent versions of the Linux kernels and GNU libc contain support for
the System V/Unix98 naming scheme for PTYs, which assigns a common
device, ``/dev/ptmx``, to all the masters (opening it will automatically
give you a previously unassigned PTY) and a subdirectory, ``/dev/pts``,
for the slaves; the slaves are named with decimal integers (``/dev/pts/#``
in our notation). This removes the problem of exhausting the
namespace and enables the kernel to automatically create the device
nodes for the slaves on demand using the "devpts" filesystem.

1176
Documentation/devices.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

353
Documentation/admin-guide/dynamic-debug-howto.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,353 @@
Dynamic debug
+++++++++++++
Introduction
============
This document describes how to use the dynamic debug (dyndbg) feature.
Dynamic debug is designed to allow you to dynamically enable/disable
kernel code to obtain additional kernel information. Currently, if
``CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG`` is set, then all ``pr_debug()``/``dev_dbg()`` and
``print_hex_dump_debug()``/``print_hex_dump_bytes()`` calls can be dynamically
enabled per-callsite.
If ``CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG`` is not set, ``print_hex_dump_debug()`` is just
shortcut for ``print_hex_dump(KERN_DEBUG)``.
For ``print_hex_dump_debug()``/``print_hex_dump_bytes()``, format string is
its ``prefix_str`` argument, if it is constant string; or ``hexdump``
in case ``prefix_str`` is build dynamically.
Dynamic debug has even more useful features:
* Simple query language allows turning on and off debugging
statements by matching any combination of 0 or 1 of:
- source filename
- function name
- line number (including ranges of line numbers)
- module name
- format string
* Provides a debugfs control file: ``<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control``
which can be read to display the complete list of known debug
statements, to help guide you
Controlling dynamic debug Behaviour
===================================
The behaviour of ``pr_debug()``/``dev_dbg()`` are controlled via writing to a
control file in the 'debugfs' filesystem. Thus, you must first mount
the debugfs filesystem, in order to make use of this feature.
Subsequently, we refer to the control file as:
``<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control``. For example, if you want to enable
printing from source file ``svcsock.c``, line 1603 you simply do::
nullarbor:~ # echo 'file svcsock.c line 1603 +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
If you make a mistake with the syntax, the write will fail thus::
nullarbor:~ # echo 'file svcsock.c wtf 1 +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
-bash: echo: write error: Invalid argument
Viewing Dynamic Debug Behaviour
===============================
You can view the currently configured behaviour of all the debug
statements via::
nullarbor:~ # cat <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
# filename:lineno [module]function flags format
/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:323 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_cleanup =_ "SVCRDMA Module Removed, deregister RPC RDMA transport\012"
/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:341 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init =_ "\011max_inline : %d\012"
/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:340 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init =_ "\011sq_depth : %d\012"
/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svc_rdma.c:338 [svcxprt_rdma]svc_rdma_init =_ "\011max_requests : %d\012"
...
You can also apply standard Unix text manipulation filters to this
data, e.g.::
nullarbor:~ # grep -i rdma <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control | wc -l
62
nullarbor:~ # grep -i tcp <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control | wc -l
42
The third column shows the currently enabled flags for each debug
statement callsite (see below for definitions of the flags). The
default value, with no flags enabled, is ``=_``. So you can view all
the debug statement callsites with any non-default flags::
nullarbor:~ # awk '$3 != "=_"' <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
# filename:lineno [module]function flags format
/usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svcsock.c:1603 [sunrpc]svc_send p "svc_process: st_sendto returned %d\012"
Command Language Reference
==========================
At the lexical level, a command comprises a sequence of words separated
by spaces or tabs. So these are all equivalent::
nullarbor:~ # echo -c 'file svcsock.c line 1603 +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
nullarbor:~ # echo -c ' file svcsock.c line 1603 +p ' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'file svcsock.c line 1603 +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
Command submissions are bounded by a write() system call.
Multiple commands can be written together, separated by ``;`` or ``\n``::
~# echo "func pnpacpi_get_resources +p; func pnp_assign_mem +p" \
> <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
If your query set is big, you can batch them too::
~# cat query-batch-file > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
A another way is to use wildcard. The match rule support ``*`` (matches
zero or more characters) and ``?`` (matches exactly one character).For
example, you can match all usb drivers::
~# echo "file drivers/usb/* +p" > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
At the syntactical level, a command comprises a sequence of match
specifications, followed by a flags change specification::
command ::= match-spec* flags-spec
The match-spec's are used to choose a subset of the known pr_debug()
callsites to which to apply the flags-spec. Think of them as a query
with implicit ANDs between each pair. Note that an empty list of
match-specs will select all debug statement callsites.
A match specification comprises a keyword, which controls the
attribute of the callsite to be compared, and a value to compare
against. Possible keywords are:::
match-spec ::= 'func' string |
'file' string |
'module' string |
'format' string |
'line' line-range
line-range ::= lineno |
'-'lineno |
lineno'-' |
lineno'-'lineno
lineno ::= unsigned-int
.. note::
``line-range`` cannot contain space, e.g.
"1-30" is valid range but "1 - 30" is not.
The meanings of each keyword are:
func
The given string is compared against the function name
of each callsite. Example::
func svc_tcp_accept
file
The given string is compared against either the full pathname, the
src-root relative pathname, or the basename of the source file of
each callsite. Examples::
file svcsock.c
file kernel/freezer.c
file /usr/src/packages/BUILD/sgi-enhancednfs-1.4/default/net/sunrpc/svcsock.c
module
The given string is compared against the module name
of each callsite. The module name is the string as
seen in ``lsmod``, i.e. without the directory or the ``.ko``
suffix and with ``-`` changed to ``_``. Examples::
module sunrpc
module nfsd
format
The given string is searched for in the dynamic debug format
string. Note that the string does not need to match the
entire format, only some part. Whitespace and other
special characters can be escaped using C octal character
escape ``\ooo`` notation, e.g. the space character is ``\040``.
Alternatively, the string can be enclosed in double quote
characters (``"``) or single quote characters (``'``).
Examples::
format svcrdma: // many of the NFS/RDMA server pr_debugs
format readahead // some pr_debugs in the readahead cache
format nfsd:\040SETATTR // one way to match a format with whitespace
format "nfsd: SETATTR" // a neater way to match a format with whitespace
format 'nfsd: SETATTR' // yet another way to match a format with whitespace
line
The given line number or range of line numbers is compared
against the line number of each ``pr_debug()`` callsite. A single
line number matches the callsite line number exactly. A
range of line numbers matches any callsite between the first
and last line number inclusive. An empty first number means
the first line in the file, an empty line number means the
last number in the file. Examples::
line 1603 // exactly line 1603
line 1600-1605 // the six lines from line 1600 to line 1605
line -1605 // the 1605 lines from line 1 to line 1605
line 1600- // all lines from line 1600 to the end of the file
The flags specification comprises a change operation followed
by one or more flag characters. The change operation is one
of the characters::
- remove the given flags
+ add the given flags
= set the flags to the given flags
The flags are::
p enables the pr_debug() callsite.
f Include the function name in the printed message
l Include line number in the printed message
m Include module name in the printed message
t Include thread ID in messages not generated from interrupt context
_ No flags are set. (Or'd with others on input)
For ``print_hex_dump_debug()`` and ``print_hex_dump_bytes()``, only ``p`` flag
have meaning, other flags ignored.
For display, the flags are preceded by ``=``
(mnemonic: what the flags are currently equal to).
Note the regexp ``^[-+=][flmpt_]+$`` matches a flags specification.
To clear all flags at once, use ``=_`` or ``-flmpt``.
Debug messages during Boot Process
==================================
To activate debug messages for core code and built-in modules during
the boot process, even before userspace and debugfs exists, use
``dyndbg="QUERY"``, ``module.dyndbg="QUERY"``, or ``ddebug_query="QUERY"``
(``ddebug_query`` is obsoleted by ``dyndbg``, and deprecated). QUERY follows
the syntax described above, but must not exceed 1023 characters. Your
bootloader may impose lower limits.
These ``dyndbg`` params are processed just after the ddebug tables are
processed, as part of the arch_initcall. Thus you can enable debug
messages in all code run after this arch_initcall via this boot
parameter.
On an x86 system for example ACPI enablement is a subsys_initcall and::
dyndbg="file ec.c +p"
will show early Embedded Controller transactions during ACPI setup if
your machine (typically a laptop) has an Embedded Controller.
PCI (or other devices) initialization also is a hot candidate for using
this boot parameter for debugging purposes.
If ``foo`` module is not built-in, ``foo.dyndbg`` will still be processed at
boot time, without effect, but will be reprocessed when module is
loaded later. ``dyndbg_query=`` and bare ``dyndbg=`` are only processed at
boot.
Debug Messages at Module Initialization Time
============================================
When ``modprobe foo`` is called, modprobe scans ``/proc/cmdline`` for
``foo.params``, strips ``foo.``, and passes them to the kernel along with
params given in modprobe args or ``/etc/modprob.d/*.conf`` files,
in the following order:
1. parameters given via ``/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf``::
options foo dyndbg=+pt
options foo dyndbg # defaults to +p
2. ``foo.dyndbg`` as given in boot args, ``foo.`` is stripped and passed::
foo.dyndbg=" func bar +p; func buz +mp"
3. args to modprobe::
modprobe foo dyndbg==pmf # override previous settings
These ``dyndbg`` queries are applied in order, with last having final say.
This allows boot args to override or modify those from ``/etc/modprobe.d``
(sensible, since 1 is system wide, 2 is kernel or boot specific), and
modprobe args to override both.
In the ``foo.dyndbg="QUERY"`` form, the query must exclude ``module foo``.
``foo`` is extracted from the param-name, and applied to each query in
``QUERY``, and only 1 match-spec of each type is allowed.
The ``dyndbg`` option is a "fake" module parameter, which means:
- modules do not need to define it explicitly
- every module gets it tacitly, whether they use pr_debug or not
- it doesn't appear in ``/sys/module/$module/parameters/``
To see it, grep the control file, or inspect ``/proc/cmdline.``
For ``CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG`` kernels, any settings given at boot-time (or
enabled by ``-DDEBUG`` flag during compilation) can be disabled later via
the sysfs interface if the debug messages are no longer needed::
echo "module module_name -p" > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
Examples
========
::
// enable the message at line 1603 of file svcsock.c
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'file svcsock.c line 1603 +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// enable all the messages in file svcsock.c
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'file svcsock.c +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// enable all the messages in the NFS server module
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'module nfsd +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// enable all 12 messages in the function svc_process()
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'func svc_process +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// disable all 12 messages in the function svc_process()
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'func svc_process -p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// enable messages for NFS calls READ, READLINK, READDIR and READDIR+.
nullarbor:~ # echo -n 'format "nfsd: READ" +p' >
<debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// enable messages in files of which the paths include string "usb"
nullarbor:~ # echo -n '*usb* +p' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// enable all messages
nullarbor:~ # echo -n '+p' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// add module, function to all enabled messages
nullarbor:~ # echo -n '+mf' > <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control
// boot-args example, with newlines and comments for readability
Kernel command line: ...
// see whats going on in dyndbg=value processing
dynamic_debug.verbose=1
// enable pr_debugs in 2 builtins, #cmt is stripped
dyndbg="module params +p #cmt ; module sys +p"
// enable pr_debugs in 2 functions in a module loaded later
pc87360.dyndbg="func pc87360_init_device +p; func pc87360_find +p"

69
Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
The Linux kernel user's and administrator's guide
=================================================
The following is a collection of user-oriented documents that have been
added to the kernel over time. There is, as yet, little overall order or
organization here — this material was not written to be a single, coherent
document! With luck things will improve quickly over time.
This initial section contains overall information, including the README
file describing the kernel as a whole, documentation on kernel parameters,
etc.
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 1
README
kernel-parameters
devices
Here is a set of documents aimed at users who are trying to track down
problems and bugs in particular.
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 1
reporting-bugs
security-bugs
bug-hunting
bug-bisect
tainted-kernels
ramoops
dynamic-debug-howto
init
This is the beginning of a section with information of interest to
application developers. Documents covering various aspects of the kernel
ABI will be found here.
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 1
sysfs-rules
The rest of this manual consists of various unordered guides on how to
configure specific aspects of kernel behavior to your liking.
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 1
initrd
serial-console
braille-console
parport
md
module-signing
sysrq
unicode
vga-softcursor
binfmt-misc
mono
java
ras
.. only:: subproject and html
Indices
=======
* :ref:`genindex`

29
Documentation/init.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/init.rst
View File

@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ OK, so you've got this pretty unintuitive message (currently located
in init/main.c) and are wondering what the H*** went wrong.
Some high-level reasons for failure (listed roughly in order of execution)
to load the init binary are:
A) Unable to mount root FS
B) init binary doesn't exist on rootfs
C) broken console device
@ -12,37 +13,39 @@ D) binary exists but dependencies not available
E) binary cannot be loaded
Detailed explanations:
0) Set "debug" kernel parameter (in bootloader config file or CONFIG_CMDLINE)
A) Set "debug" kernel parameter (in bootloader config file or CONFIG_CMDLINE)
to get more detailed kernel messages.
A) make sure you have the correct root FS type
(and root= kernel parameter points to the correct partition),
B) make sure you have the correct root FS type
(and ``root=`` kernel parameter points to the correct partition),
required drivers such as storage hardware (such as SCSI or USB!)
and filesystem (ext3, jffs2 etc.) are builtin (alternatively as modules,
to be pre-loaded by an initrd)
C) Possibly a conflict in console= setup --> initial console unavailable.
C) Possibly a conflict in ``console= setup`` --> initial console unavailable.
E.g. some serial consoles are unreliable due to serial IRQ issues (e.g.
missing interrupt-based configuration).
Try using a different console= device or e.g. netconsole= .
Try using a different ``console= device`` or e.g. ``netconsole=``.
D) e.g. required library dependencies of the init binary such as
/lib/ld-linux.so.2 missing or broken. Use readelf -d <INIT>|grep NEEDED
to find out which libraries are required.
``/lib/ld-linux.so.2`` missing or broken. Use
``readelf -d <INIT>|grep NEEDED`` to find out which libraries are required.
E) make sure the binary's architecture matches your hardware.
E.g. i386 vs. x86_64 mismatch, or trying to load x86 on ARM hardware.
In case you tried loading a non-binary file here (shell script?),
you should make sure that the script specifies an interpreter in its shebang
header line (#!/...) that is fully working (including its library
header line (``#!/...``) that is fully working (including its library
dependencies). And before tackling scripts, better first test a simple
non-script binary such as /bin/sh and confirm its successful execution.
To find out more, add code to init/main.c to display kernel_execve()s
non-script binary such as ``/bin/sh`` and confirm its successful execution.
To find out more, add code ``to init/main.c`` to display kernel_execve()s
return values.
Please extend this explanation whenever you find new failure causes
(after all loading the init binary is a CRITICAL and hard transition step
which needs to be made as painless as possible), then submit patch to LKML.
Further TODOs:
- Implement the various run_init_process() invocations via a struct array
which can then store the kernel_execve() result value and on failure
log it all by iterating over _all_ results (very important usability fix).
- Implement the various ``run_init_process()`` invocations via a struct array
which can then store the ``kernel_execve()`` result value and on failure
log it all by iterating over **all** results (very important usability fix).
- try to make the implementation itself more helpful in general,
e.g. by providing additional error messages at affected places.

199
Documentation/initrd.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/initrd.rst
View File

@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Using the initial RAM disk (initrd)
===================================
Written 1996,2000 by Werner Almesberger <werner.almesberger@epfl.ch> and
Hans Lermen <lermen@fgan.de>
Hans Lermen <lermen@fgan.de>
initrd provides the capability to load a RAM disk by the boot loader.
@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ where the kernel comes up with a minimum set of compiled-in drivers, and
where additional modules are loaded from initrd.
This document gives a brief overview of the use of initrd. A more detailed
discussion of the boot process can be found in [1].
discussion of the boot process can be found in [#f1]_.
Operation
@ -27,10 +27,10 @@ When using initrd, the system typically boots as follows:
1) the boot loader loads the kernel and the initial RAM disk
2) the kernel converts initrd into a "normal" RAM disk and
frees the memory used by initrd
3) if the root device is not /dev/ram0, the old (deprecated)
3) if the root device is not ``/dev/ram0``, the old (deprecated)
change_root procedure is followed. see the "Obsolete root change
mechanism" section below.
4) root device is mounted. if it is /dev/ram0, the initrd image is
4) root device is mounted. if it is ``/dev/ram0``, the initrd image is
then mounted as root
5) /sbin/init is executed (this can be any valid executable, including
shell scripts; it is run with uid 0 and can do basically everything
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ When using initrd, the system typically boots as follows:
6) init mounts the "real" root file system
7) init places the root file system at the root directory using the
pivot_root system call
8) init execs the /sbin/init on the new root filesystem, performing
8) init execs the ``/sbin/init`` on the new root filesystem, performing
the usual boot sequence
9) the initrd file system is removed
@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ be accessible.
Boot command-line options
-------------------------
initrd adds the following new options:
initrd adds the following new options::
initrd=<path> (e.g. LOADLIN)
@ -83,36 +83,36 @@ Recent kernels have support for populating a ramdisk from a compressed cpio
archive. On such systems, the creation of a ramdisk image doesn't need to
involve special block devices or loopbacks; you merely create a directory on
disk with the desired initrd content, cd to that directory, and run (as an
example):
example)::
find . | cpio --quiet -H newc -o | gzip -9 -n > /boot/imagefile.img
find . | cpio --quiet -H newc -o | gzip -9 -n > /boot/imagefile.img
Examining the contents of an existing image file is just as simple:
Examining the contents of an existing image file is just as simple::
mkdir /tmp/imagefile
cd /tmp/imagefile
gzip -cd /boot/imagefile.img | cpio -imd --quiet
mkdir /tmp/imagefile
cd /tmp/imagefile
gzip -cd /boot/imagefile.img | cpio -imd --quiet
Installation
------------
First, a directory for the initrd file system has to be created on the
"normal" root file system, e.g.
"normal" root file system, e.g.::
# mkdir /initrd
# mkdir /initrd
The name is not relevant. More details can be found on the pivot_root(2)
man page.
The name is not relevant. More details can be found on the
:manpage:`pivot_root(2)` man page.
If the root file system is created during the boot procedure (i.e. if
you're building an install floppy), the root file system creation
procedure should create the /initrd directory.
procedure should create the ``/initrd`` directory.
If initrd will not be mounted in some cases, its content is still
accessible if the following device has been created:
accessible if the following device has been created::
# mknod /dev/initrd b 1 250
# chmod 400 /dev/initrd
# mknod /dev/initrd b 1 250
# chmod 400 /dev/initrd
Second, the kernel has to be compiled with RAM disk support and with
support for the initial RAM disk enabled. Also, at least all components
@ -131,60 +131,76 @@ kernels, at least three types of devices are suitable for that:
We'll describe the loopback device method:
1) make sure loopback block devices are configured into the kernel
2) create an empty file system of the appropriate size, e.g.
# dd if=/dev/zero of=initrd bs=300k count=1
# mke2fs -F -m0 initrd
2) create an empty file system of the appropriate size, e.g.::
# dd if=/dev/zero of=initrd bs=300k count=1
# mke2fs -F -m0 initrd
(if space is critical, you may want to use the Minix FS instead of Ext2)
3) mount the file system, e.g.
# mount -t ext2 -o loop initrd /mnt
4) create the console device:
3) mount the file system, e.g.::
# mount -t ext2 -o loop initrd /mnt
4) create the console device::
# mkdir /mnt/dev
# mknod /mnt/dev/console c 5 1
5) copy all the files that are needed to properly use the initrd
environment. Don't forget the most important file, /sbin/init
Note that /sbin/init's permissions must include "x" (execute).
environment. Don't forget the most important file, ``/sbin/init``
.. note:: ``/sbin/init`` permissions must include "x" (execute).
6) correct operation the initrd environment can frequently be tested
even without rebooting with the command
# chroot /mnt /sbin/init
even without rebooting with the command::
# chroot /mnt /sbin/init
This is of course limited to initrds that do not interfere with the
general system state (e.g. by reconfiguring network interfaces,
overwriting mounted devices, trying to start already running demons,
etc. Note however that it is usually possible to use pivot_root in
such a chroot'ed initrd environment.)
7) unmount the file system
# umount /mnt
7) unmount the file system::
# umount /mnt
8) the initrd is now in the file "initrd". Optionally, it can now be
compressed
# gzip -9 initrd
compressed::
# gzip -9 initrd
For experimenting with initrd, you may want to take a rescue floppy and
only add a symbolic link from /sbin/init to /bin/sh. Alternatively, you
can try the experimental newlib environment [2] to create a small
only add a symbolic link from ``/sbin/init`` to ``/bin/sh``. Alternatively, you
can try the experimental newlib environment [#f2]_ to create a small
initrd.
Finally, you have to boot the kernel and load initrd. Almost all Linux
boot loaders support initrd. Since the boot process is still compatible
with an older mechanism, the following boot command line parameters
have to be given:
have to be given::
root=/dev/ram0 rw
(rw is only necessary if writing to the initrd file system.)
With LOADLIN, you simply execute
With LOADLIN, you simply execute::
LOADLIN <kernel> initrd=<disk_image>
e.g. LOADLIN C:\LINUX\BZIMAGE initrd=C:\LINUX\INITRD.GZ root=/dev/ram0 rw
With LILO, you add the option INITRD=<path> to either the global section
or to the section of the respective kernel in /etc/lilo.conf, and pass
the options using APPEND, e.g.
e.g.::
LOADLIN C:\LINUX\BZIMAGE initrd=C:\LINUX\INITRD.GZ root=/dev/ram0 rw
With LILO, you add the option ``INITRD=<path>`` to either the global section
or to the section of the respective kernel in ``/etc/lilo.conf``, and pass
the options using APPEND, e.g.::
image = /bzImage
initrd = /boot/initrd.gz
append = "root=/dev/ram0 rw"
and run /sbin/lilo
and run ``/sbin/lilo``
For other boot loaders, please refer to the respective documentation.
@ -204,33 +220,33 @@ The procedure involves the following steps:
- unmounting the initrd file system and de-allocating the RAM disk
Mounting the new root file system is easy: it just needs to be mounted on
a directory under the current root. Example:
a directory under the current root. Example::
# mkdir /new-root
# mount -o ro /dev/hda1 /new-root
# mkdir /new-root
# mount -o ro /dev/hda1 /new-root
The root change is accomplished with the pivot_root system call, which
is also available via the pivot_root utility (see pivot_root(8) man
page; pivot_root is distributed with util-linux version 2.10h or higher
[3]). pivot_root moves the current root to a directory under the new
is also available via the ``pivot_root`` utility (see :manpage:`pivot_root(8)`
man page; ``pivot_root`` is distributed with util-linux version 2.10h or higher
[#f3]_). ``pivot_root`` moves the current root to a directory under the new
root, and puts the new root at its place. The directory for the old root
must exist before calling pivot_root. Example:
must exist before calling ``pivot_root``. Example::
# cd /new-root
# mkdir initrd
# pivot_root . initrd
# cd /new-root
# mkdir initrd
# pivot_root . initrd
Now, the init process may still access the old root via its
executable, shared libraries, standard input/output/error, and its
current root directory. All these references are dropped by the
following command:
following command::
# exec chroot . what-follows <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1
# exec chroot . what-follows <dev/console >dev/console 2>&1
Where what-follows is a program under the new root, e.g. /sbin/init
Where what-follows is a program under the new root, e.g. ``/sbin/init``
If the new root file system will be used with udev and has no valid
/dev directory, udev must be initialized before invoking chroot in order
to provide /dev/console.
``/dev`` directory, udev must be initialized before invoking chroot in order
to provide ``/dev/console``.
Note: implementation details of pivot_root may change with time. In order
to ensure compatibility, the following points should be observed:
@ -244,13 +260,13 @@ to ensure compatibility, the following points should be observed:
- use relative paths for dev/console in the exec command
Now, the initrd can be unmounted and the memory allocated by the RAM
disk can be freed:
disk can be freed::
# umount /initrd
# blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0
# umount /initrd
# blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0
It is also possible to use initrd with an NFS-mounted root, see the
pivot_root(8) man page for details.
:manpage:`pivot_root(8)` man page for details.
Usage scenarios
@ -263,21 +279,21 @@ as follows:
1) system boots from floppy or other media with a minimal kernel
(e.g. support for RAM disks, initrd, a.out, and the Ext2 FS) and
loads initrd
2) /sbin/init determines what is needed to (1) mount the "real" root FS
2) ``/sbin/init`` determines what is needed to (1) mount the "real" root FS
(i.e. device type, device drivers, file system) and (2) the
distribution media (e.g. CD-ROM, network, tape, ...). This can be
done by asking the user, by auto-probing, or by using a hybrid
approach.
3) /sbin/init loads the necessary kernel modules
4) /sbin/init creates and populates the root file system (this doesn't
3) ``/sbin/init`` loads the necessary kernel modules
4) ``/sbin/init`` creates and populates the root file system (this doesn't
have to be a very usable system yet)
5) /sbin/init invokes pivot_root to change the root file system and
5) ``/sbin/init`` invokes ``pivot_root`` to change the root file system and
execs - via chroot - a program that continues the installation
6) the boot loader is installed
7) the boot loader is configured to load an initrd with the set of
modules that was used to bring up the system (e.g. /initrd can be
modules that was used to bring up the system (e.g. ``/initrd`` can be
modified, then unmounted, and finally, the image is written from
/dev/ram0 or /dev/rd/0 to a file)
``/dev/ram0`` or ``/dev/rd/0`` to a file)
8) now the system is bootable and additional installation tasks can be
performed
@ -290,7 +306,7 @@ different hardware configurations in a single administrative domain. In
such cases, it is desirable to generate only a small set of kernels
(ideally only one) and to keep the system-specific part of configuration
information as small as possible. In this case, a common initrd could be
generated with all the necessary modules. Then, only /sbin/init or a file
generated with all the necessary modules. Then, only ``/sbin/init`` or a file
read by it would have to be different.
A third scenario is more convenient recovery disks, because information
@ -301,9 +317,9 @@ auto-detection).
Last not least, CD-ROM distributors may use it for better installation
from CD, e.g. by using a boot floppy and bootstrapping a bigger RAM disk
via initrd from CD; or by booting via a loader like LOADLIN or directly
via initrd from CD; or by booting via a loader like ``LOADLIN`` or directly
from the CD-ROM, and loading the RAM disk from CD without need of
floppies.
floppies.
Obsolete root change mechanism
@ -316,51 +332,52 @@ continued availability.
It works by mounting the "real" root device (i.e. the one set with rdev
in the kernel image or with root=... at the boot command line) as the
root file system when linuxrc exits. The initrd file system is then
unmounted, or, if it is still busy, moved to a directory /initrd, if
unmounted, or, if it is still busy, moved to a directory ``/initrd``, if
such a directory exists on the new root file system.
In order to use this mechanism, you do not have to specify the boot
command options root, init, or rw. (If specified, they will affect
the real root file system, not the initrd environment.)
If /proc is mounted, the "real" root device can be changed from within
linuxrc by writing the number of the new root FS device to the special
file /proc/sys/kernel/real-root-dev, e.g.
file /proc/sys/kernel/real-root-dev, e.g.::
# echo 0x301 >/proc/sys/kernel/real-root-dev
Note that the mechanism is incompatible with NFS and similar file
systems.
This old, deprecated mechanism is commonly called "change_root", while
the new, supported mechanism is called "pivot_root".
This old, deprecated mechanism is commonly called ``change_root``, while
the new, supported mechanism is called ``pivot_root``.
Mixed change_root and pivot_root mechanism
------------------------------------------
In case you did not want to use root=/dev/ram0 to trigger the pivot_root
mechanism, you may create both /linuxrc and /sbin/init in your initrd image.
In case you did not want to use ``root=/dev/ram0`` to trigger the pivot_root
mechanism, you may create both ``/linuxrc`` and ``/sbin/init`` in your initrd
image.
/linuxrc would contain only the following:
``/linuxrc`` would contain only the following::
#! /bin/sh
mount -n -t proc proc /proc
echo 0x0100 >/proc/sys/kernel/real-root-dev
umount -n /proc
#! /bin/sh
mount -n -t proc proc /proc
echo 0x0100 >/proc/sys/kernel/real-root-dev
umount -n /proc
Once linuxrc exited, the kernel would mount again your initrd as root,
this time executing /sbin/init. Again, it would be the duty of this init
to build the right environment (maybe using the root= device passed on
the cmdline) before the final execution of the real /sbin/init.
this time executing ``/sbin/init``. Again, it would be the duty of this init
to build the right environment (maybe using the ``root= device`` passed on
the cmdline) before the final execution of the real ``/sbin/init``.
Resources
---------
[1] Almesberger, Werner; "Booting Linux: The History and the Future"
.. [#f1] Almesberger, Werner; "Booting Linux: The History and the Future"
http://www.almesberger.net/cv/papers/ols2k-9.ps.gz
[2] newlib package (experimental), with initrd example
http://sources.redhat.com/newlib/
[3] util-linux: Miscellaneous utilities for Linux
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/
.. [#f2] newlib package (experimental), with initrd example
https://www.sourceware.org/newlib/
.. [#f3] util-linux: Miscellaneous utilities for Linux
https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/

277
Documentation/java.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/java.rst
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Java(tm) Binary Kernel Support for Linux v1.03
----------------------------------------------
Java(tm) Binary Kernel Support for Linux v1.03
----------------------------------------------
Linux beats them ALL! While all other OS's are TALKING about direct
support of Java Binaries in the OS, Linux is doing it!
@ -19,70 +19,82 @@ other program after you have done the following:
as the application itself).
2) You have to compile BINFMT_MISC either as a module or into
the kernel (CONFIG_BINFMT_MISC) and set it up properly.
the kernel (``CONFIG_BINFMT_MISC``) and set it up properly.
If you choose to compile it as a module, you will have
to insert it manually with modprobe/insmod, as kmod
cannot easily be supported with binfmt_misc.
cannot easily be supported with binfmt_misc.
Read the file 'binfmt_misc.txt' in this directory to know
more about the configuration process.
3) Add the following configuration items to binfmt_misc
(you should really have read binfmt_misc.txt now):
support for Java applications:
(you should really have read ``binfmt_misc.txt`` now):
support for Java applications::
':Java:M::\xca\xfe\xba\xbe::/usr/local/bin/javawrapper:'
support for executable Jar files:
support for executable Jar files::
':ExecutableJAR:E::jar::/usr/local/bin/jarwrapper:'
support for Java Applets:
support for Java Applets::
':Applet:E::html::/usr/bin/appletviewer:'
or the following, if you want to be more selective:
or the following, if you want to be more selective::
':Applet:M::<!--applet::/usr/bin/appletviewer:'
Of course you have to fix the path names. The path/file names given in this
document match the Debian 2.1 system. (i.e. jdk installed in /usr,
custom wrappers from this document in /usr/local)
document match the Debian 2.1 system. (i.e. jdk installed in ``/usr``,
custom wrappers from this document in ``/usr/local``)
Note, that for the more selective applet support you have to modify
existing html-files to contain <!--applet--> in the first line
('<' has to be the first character!) to let this work!
existing html-files to contain ``<!--applet-->`` in the first line
(``<`` has to be the first character!) to let this work!
For the compiled Java programs you need a wrapper script like the
following (this is because Java is broken in case of the filename
handling), again fix the path names, both in the script and in the
above given configuration string.
You, too, need the little program after the script. Compile like
gcc -O2 -o javaclassname javaclassname.c
and stick it to /usr/local/bin.
You, too, need the little program after the script. Compile like::
gcc -O2 -o javaclassname javaclassname.c
and stick it to ``/usr/local/bin``.
Both the javawrapper shellscript and the javaclassname program
were supplied by Colin J. Watson <cjw44@cam.ac.uk>.
====================== Cut here ===================
#!/bin/bash
# /usr/local/bin/javawrapper - the wrapper for binfmt_misc/java
Javawrapper shell script:
if [ -z "$1" ]; then
.. code-block:: sh
#!/bin/bash
# /usr/local/bin/javawrapper - the wrapper for binfmt_misc/java
if [ -z "$1" ]; then
exec 1>&2
echo Usage: $0 class-file
exit 1
fi
fi
CLASS=$1
FQCLASS=`/usr/local/bin/javaclassname $1`
FQCLASSN=`echo $FQCLASS | sed -e 's/^.*\.\([^.]*\)$/\1/'`
FQCLASSP=`echo $FQCLASS | sed -e 's-\.-/-g' -e 's-^[^/]*$--' -e 's-/[^/]*$--'`
CLASS=$1
FQCLASS=`/usr/local/bin/javaclassname $1`
FQCLASSN=`echo $FQCLASS | sed -e 's/^.*\.\([^.]*\)$/\1/'`
FQCLASSP=`echo $FQCLASS | sed -e 's-\.-/-g' -e 's-^[^/]*$--' -e 's-/[^/]*$--'`
# for example:
# CLASS=Test.class
# FQCLASS=foo.bar.Test
# FQCLASSN=Test
# FQCLASSP=foo/bar
# for example:
# CLASS=Test.class
# FQCLASS=foo.bar.Test
# FQCLASSN=Test
# FQCLASSP=foo/bar
unset CLASSBASE
unset CLASSBASE
declare -i LINKLEVEL=0
declare -i LINKLEVEL=0
while :; do
while :; do
if [ "`basename $CLASS .class`" == "$FQCLASSN" ]; then
# See if this directory works straight off
cd -L `dirname $CLASS`
@ -119,9 +131,9 @@ while :; do
exit 1
fi
CLASS=`ls --color=no -l $CLASS | sed -e 's/^.* \([^ ]*\)$/\1/'`
done
done
if [ -z "$CLASSBASE" ]; then
if [ -z "$CLASSBASE" ]; then
if [ -z "$FQCLASSP" ]; then
GOODNAME=$FQCLASSN.class
else
@ -131,96 +143,97 @@ if [ -z "$CLASSBASE" ]; then
echo $0:
echo " $FQCLASS should be in a file called $GOODNAME"
exit 1
fi
fi
if ! echo $CLASSPATH | grep -q "^\(.*:\)*$CLASSBASE\(:.*\)*"; then
if ! echo $CLASSPATH | grep -q "^\(.*:\)*$CLASSBASE\(:.*\)*"; then
# class is not in CLASSPATH, so prepend dir of class to CLASSPATH
if [ -z "${CLASSPATH}" ] ; then
export CLASSPATH=$CLASSBASE
else
export CLASSPATH=$CLASSBASE:$CLASSPATH
fi
fi
fi
shift
/usr/bin/java $FQCLASS "$@"
====================== Cut here ===================
shift
/usr/bin/java $FQCLASS "$@"
javaclassname.c:
====================== Cut here ===================
/* javaclassname.c
*
* Extracts the class name from a Java class file; intended for use in a Java
* wrapper of the type supported by the binfmt_misc option in the Linux kernel.
*
* Copyright (C) 1999 Colin J. Watson <cjw44@cam.ac.uk>.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
*/
.. code-block:: c
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
/* javaclassname.c
*
* Extracts the class name from a Java class file; intended for use in a Java
* wrapper of the type supported by the binfmt_misc option in the Linux kernel.
*
* Copyright (C) 1999 Colin J. Watson <cjw44@cam.ac.uk>.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
*/
/* From Sun's Java VM Specification, as tag entries in the constant pool. */
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#define CP_UTF8 1
#define CP_INTEGER 3
#define CP_FLOAT 4
#define CP_LONG 5
#define CP_DOUBLE 6
#define CP_CLASS 7
#define CP_STRING 8
#define CP_FIELDREF 9
#define CP_METHODREF 10
#define CP_INTERFACEMETHODREF 11
#define CP_NAMEANDTYPE 12
#define CP_METHODHANDLE 15
#define CP_METHODTYPE 16
#define CP_INVOKEDYNAMIC 18
/* From Sun's Java VM Specification, as tag entries in the constant pool. */
/* Define some commonly used error messages */
#define CP_UTF8 1
#define CP_INTEGER 3
#define CP_FLOAT 4
#define CP_LONG 5
#define CP_DOUBLE 6
#define CP_CLASS 7
#define CP_STRING 8
#define CP_FIELDREF 9
#define CP_METHODREF 10
#define CP_INTERFACEMETHODREF 11
#define CP_NAMEANDTYPE 12
#define CP_METHODHANDLE 15
#define CP_METHODTYPE 16
#define CP_INVOKEDYNAMIC 18
#define seek_error() error("%s: Cannot seek\n", program)
#define corrupt_error() error("%s: Class file corrupt\n", program)
#define eof_error() error("%s: Unexpected end of file\n", program)
#define utf8_error() error("%s: Only ASCII 1-255 supported\n", program);
/* Define some commonly used error messages */
char *program;
#define seek_error() error("%s: Cannot seek\n", program)
#define corrupt_error() error("%s: Class file corrupt\n", program)
#define eof_error() error("%s: Unexpected end of file\n", program)
#define utf8_error() error("%s: Only ASCII 1-255 supported\n", program);
long *pool;
char *program;
u_int8_t read_8(FILE *classfile);
u_int16_t read_16(FILE *classfile);
void skip_constant(FILE *classfile, u_int16_t *cur);
void error(const char *format, ...);
int main(int argc, char **argv);
long *pool;
/* Reads in an unsigned 8-bit integer. */
u_int8_t read_8(FILE *classfile)
{
u_int8_t read_8(FILE *classfile);
u_int16_t read_16(FILE *classfile);
void skip_constant(FILE *classfile, u_int16_t *cur);
void error(const char *format, ...);
int main(int argc, char **argv);
/* Reads in an unsigned 8-bit integer. */
u_int8_t read_8(FILE *classfile)
{
int b = fgetc(classfile);
if(b == EOF)
eof_error();
return (u_int8_t)b;
}
}
/* Reads in an unsigned 16-bit integer. */
u_int16_t read_16(FILE *classfile)
{
/* Reads in an unsigned 16-bit integer. */
u_int16_t read_16(FILE *classfile)
{
int b1, b2;
b1 = fgetc(classfile);
if(b1 == EOF)
@ -229,11 +242,11 @@ u_int16_t read_16(FILE *classfile)
if(b2 == EOF)
eof_error();
return (u_int16_t)((b1 << 8) | b2);
}
}
/* Reads in a value from the constant pool. */
void skip_constant(FILE *classfile, u_int16_t *cur)
{
/* Reads in a value from the constant pool. */
void skip_constant(FILE *classfile, u_int16_t *cur)
{
u_int16_t len;
int seekerr = 1;
pool[*cur] = ftell(classfile);
@ -270,19 +283,19 @@ void skip_constant(FILE *classfile, u_int16_t *cur)
}
if(seekerr)
seek_error();
}
}
void error(const char *format, ...)
{
void error(const char *format, ...)
{
va_list ap;
va_start(ap, format);
vfprintf(stderr, format, ap);
va_end(ap);
exit(1);
}
}
int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
FILE *classfile;
u_int16_t cp_count, i, this_class, classinfo_ptr;
u_int8_t length;
@ -349,19 +362,19 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
free(pool);
fclose(classfile);
return 0;
}
====================== Cut here ===================
}
jarwrapper::
#!/bin/bash
# /usr/local/java/bin/jarwrapper - the wrapper for binfmt_misc/jar
java -jar $1
====================== Cut here ===================
#!/bin/bash
# /usr/local/java/bin/jarwrapper - the wrapper for binfmt_misc/jar
Now simply ``chmod +x`` the ``.class``, ``.jar`` and/or ``.html`` files you
want to execute.
java -jar $1
====================== Cut here ===================
Now simply chmod +x the .class, .jar and/or .html files you want to execute.
To add a Java program to your path best put a symbolic link to the main
.class file into /usr/bin (or another place you like) omitting the .class
extension. The directory containing the original .class file will be
@ -371,29 +384,36 @@ added to your CLASSPATH during execution.
To test your new setup, enter in the following simple Java app, and name
it "HelloWorld.java":
.. code-block:: java
class HelloWorld {
public static void main(String args[]) {
System.out.println("Hello World!");
}
}
Now compile the application with:
Now compile the application with::
javac HelloWorld.java
Set the executable permissions of the binary file, with:
Set the executable permissions of the binary file, with::
chmod 755 HelloWorld.class
And then execute it:
And then execute it::
./HelloWorld.class
To execute Java Jar files, simple chmod the *.jar files to include
the execution bit, then just do
To execute Java Jar files, simple chmod the ``*.jar`` files to include
the execution bit, then just do::
./Application.jar
To execute Java Applets, simple chmod the *.html files to include
the execution bit, then just do
To execute Java Applets, simple chmod the ``*.html`` files to include
the execution bit, then just do::
./Applet.html
@ -401,4 +421,3 @@ originally by Brian A. Lantz, brian@lantz.com
heavily edited for binfmt_misc by Richard Günther
new scripts by Colin J. Watson <cjw44@cam.ac.uk>
added executable Jar file support by Kurt Huwig <kurt@iku-netz.de>

209
Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
The kernel's command-line parameters
====================================
The following is a consolidated list of the kernel parameters as
implemented by the __setup(), core_param() and module_param() macros
and sorted into English Dictionary order (defined as ignoring all
punctuation and sorting digits before letters in a case insensitive
manner), and with descriptions where known.
The kernel parses parameters from the kernel command line up to "--";
if it doesn't recognize a parameter and it doesn't contain a '.', the
parameter gets passed to init: parameters with '=' go into init's
environment, others are passed as command line arguments to init.
Everything after "--" is passed as an argument to init.
Module parameters can be specified in two ways: via the kernel command
line with a module name prefix, or via modprobe, e.g.::
(kernel command line) usbcore.blinkenlights=1
(modprobe command line) modprobe usbcore blinkenlights=1
Parameters for modules which are built into the kernel need to be
specified on the kernel command line. modprobe looks through the
kernel command line (/proc/cmdline) and collects module parameters
when it loads a module, so the kernel command line can be used for
loadable modules too.
Hyphens (dashes) and underscores are equivalent in parameter names, so::
log_buf_len=1M print-fatal-signals=1
can also be entered as::
log-buf-len=1M print_fatal_signals=1
Double-quotes can be used to protect spaces in values, e.g.::
param="spaces in here"
cpu lists:
----------
Some kernel parameters take a list of CPUs as a value, e.g. isolcpus,
nohz_full, irqaffinity, rcu_nocbs. The format of this list is:
<cpu number>,...,<cpu number>
or
<cpu number>-<cpu number>
(must be a positive range in ascending order)
or a mixture
<cpu number>,...,<cpu number>-<cpu number>
Note that for the special case of a range one can split the range into equal
sized groups and for each group use some amount from the beginning of that
group:
<cpu number>-cpu number>:<used size>/<group size>
For example one can add to the command line following parameter:
isolcpus=1,2,10-20,100-2000:2/25
where the final item represents CPUs 100,101,125,126,150,151,...
This document may not be entirely up to date and comprehensive. The command
"modinfo -p ${modulename}" shows a current list of all parameters of a loadable
module. Loadable modules, after being loaded into the running kernel, also
reveal their parameters in /sys/module/${modulename}/parameters/. Some of these
parameters may be changed at runtime by the command
``echo -n ${value} > /sys/module/${modulename}/parameters/${parm}``.
The parameters listed below are only valid if certain kernel build options were
enabled and if respective hardware is present. The text in square brackets at
the beginning of each description states the restrictions within which a
parameter is applicable::
ACPI ACPI support is enabled.
AGP AGP (Accelerated Graphics Port) is enabled.
ALSA ALSA sound support is enabled.
APIC APIC support is enabled.
APM Advanced Power Management support is enabled.
ARM ARM architecture is enabled.
AVR32 AVR32 architecture is enabled.
AX25 Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled.
BLACKFIN Blackfin architecture is enabled.
CLK Common clock infrastructure is enabled.
CMA Contiguous Memory Area support is enabled.
DRM Direct Rendering Management support is enabled.
DYNAMIC_DEBUG Build in debug messages and enable them at runtime
EDD BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled
EFI EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled
EIDE EIDE/ATAPI support is enabled.
EVM Extended Verification Module
FB The frame buffer device is enabled.
FTRACE Function tracing enabled.
GCOV GCOV profiling is enabled.
HW Appropriate hardware is enabled.
IA-64 IA-64 architecture is enabled.
IMA Integrity measurement architecture is enabled.
IOSCHED More than one I/O scheduler is enabled.
IP_PNP IP DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP is enabled.
IPV6 IPv6 support is enabled.
ISAPNP ISA PnP code is enabled.
ISDN Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
JOY Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
KGDB Kernel debugger support is enabled.
KVM Kernel Virtual Machine support is enabled.
LIBATA Libata driver is enabled
LP Printer support is enabled.
LOOP Loopback device support is enabled.
M68k M68k architecture is enabled.
These options have more detailed description inside of
Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt.
MDA MDA console support is enabled.
MIPS MIPS architecture is enabled.
MOUSE Appropriate mouse support is enabled.
MSI Message Signaled Interrupts (PCI).
MTD MTD (Memory Technology Device) support is enabled.
NET Appropriate network support is enabled.
NUMA NUMA support is enabled.
NFS Appropriate NFS support is enabled.
OSS OSS sound support is enabled.
PV_OPS A paravirtualized kernel is enabled.
PARIDE The ParIDE (parallel port IDE) subsystem is enabled.
PARISC The PA-RISC architecture is enabled.
PCI PCI bus support is enabled.
PCIE PCI Express support is enabled.
PCMCIA The PCMCIA subsystem is enabled.
PNP Plug & Play support is enabled.
PPC PowerPC architecture is enabled.
PPT Parallel port support is enabled.
PS2 Appropriate PS/2 support is enabled.
RAM RAM disk support is enabled.
S390 S390 architecture is enabled.
SCSI Appropriate SCSI support is enabled.
A lot of drivers have their options described inside
the Documentation/scsi/ sub-directory.
SECURITY Different security models are enabled.
SELINUX SELinux support is enabled.
APPARMOR AppArmor support is enabled.
SERIAL Serial support is enabled.
SH SuperH architecture is enabled.
SMP The kernel is an SMP kernel.
SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled.
SWSUSP Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled.
TPM TPM drivers are enabled.
TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
UMS USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
USB USB support is enabled.
USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
V4L Video For Linux support is enabled.
VMMIO Driver for memory mapped virtio devices is enabled.
VGA The VGA console has been enabled.
VT Virtual terminal support is enabled.
WDT Watchdog support is enabled.
XT IBM PC/XT MFM hard disk support is enabled.
X86-32 X86-32, aka i386 architecture is enabled.
X86-64 X86-64 architecture is enabled.
More X86-64 boot options can be found in
Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt .
X86 Either 32-bit or 64-bit x86 (same as X86-32+X86-64)
X86_UV SGI UV support is enabled.
XEN Xen support is enabled
In addition, the following text indicates that the option::
BUGS= Relates to possible processor bugs on the said processor.
KNL Is a kernel start-up parameter.
BOOT Is a boot loader parameter.
Parameters denoted with BOOT are actually interpreted by the boot
loader, and have no meaning to the kernel directly.
Do not modify the syntax of boot loader parameters without extreme
need or coordination with <Documentation/x86/boot.txt>.
There are also arch-specific kernel-parameters not documented here.
See for example <Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt>.
Note that ALL kernel parameters listed below are CASE SENSITIVE, and that
a trailing = on the name of any parameter states that that parameter will
be entered as an environment variable, whereas its absence indicates that
it will appear as a kernel argument readable via /proc/cmdline by programs
running once the system is up.
The number of kernel parameters is not limited, but the length of the
complete command line (parameters including spaces etc.) is limited to
a fixed number of characters. This limit depends on the architecture
and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
./include/asm/setup.h as COMMAND_LINE_SIZE.
Finally, the [KMG] suffix is commonly described after a number of kernel
parameter values. These 'K', 'M', and 'G' letters represent the _binary_
multipliers 'Kilo', 'Mega', and 'Giga', equalling 2^10, 2^20, and 2^30
bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted:
.. include:: kernel-parameters.txt
:literal:
Todo
----
Add more DRM drivers.

286
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
View File

@ -1,202 +1,3 @@
Kernel Parameters
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following is a consolidated list of the kernel parameters as
implemented by the __setup(), core_param() and module_param() macros
and sorted into English Dictionary order (defined as ignoring all
punctuation and sorting digits before letters in a case insensitive
manner), and with descriptions where known.
The kernel parses parameters from the kernel command line up to "--";
if it doesn't recognize a parameter and it doesn't contain a '.', the
parameter gets passed to init: parameters with '=' go into init's
environment, others are passed as command line arguments to init.
Everything after "--" is passed as an argument to init.
Module parameters can be specified in two ways: via the kernel command
line with a module name prefix, or via modprobe, e.g.:
(kernel command line) usbcore.blinkenlights=1
(modprobe command line) modprobe usbcore blinkenlights=1
Parameters for modules which are built into the kernel need to be
specified on the kernel command line. modprobe looks through the
kernel command line (/proc/cmdline) and collects module parameters
when it loads a module, so the kernel command line can be used for
loadable modules too.
Hyphens (dashes) and underscores are equivalent in parameter names, so
log_buf_len=1M print-fatal-signals=1
can also be entered as
log-buf-len=1M print_fatal_signals=1
Double-quotes can be used to protect spaces in values, e.g.:
param="spaces in here"
cpu lists:
----------
Some kernel parameters take a list of CPUs as a value, e.g. isolcpus,
nohz_full, irqaffinity, rcu_nocbs. The format of this list is:
<cpu number>,...,<cpu number>
or
<cpu number>-<cpu number>
(must be a positive range in ascending order)
or a mixture
<cpu number>,...,<cpu number>-<cpu number>
Note that for the special case of a range one can split the range into equal
sized groups and for each group use some amount from the beginning of that
group:
<cpu number>-cpu number>:<used size>/<group size>
For example one can add to the command line following parameter:
isolcpus=1,2,10-20,100-2000:2/25
where the final item represents CPUs 100,101,125,126,150,151,...
This document may not be entirely up to date and comprehensive. The command
"modinfo -p ${modulename}" shows a current list of all parameters of a loadable
module. Loadable modules, after being loaded into the running kernel, also
reveal their parameters in /sys/module/${modulename}/parameters/. Some of these
parameters may be changed at runtime by the command
"echo -n ${value} > /sys/module/${modulename}/parameters/${parm}".
The parameters listed below are only valid if certain kernel build options were
enabled and if respective hardware is present. The text in square brackets at
the beginning of each description states the restrictions within which a
parameter is applicable:
ACPI ACPI support is enabled.
AGP AGP (Accelerated Graphics Port) is enabled.
ALSA ALSA sound support is enabled.
APIC APIC support is enabled.
APM Advanced Power Management support is enabled.
ARM ARM architecture is enabled.
AVR32 AVR32 architecture is enabled.
AX25 Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled.
BLACKFIN Blackfin architecture is enabled.
CLK Common clock infrastructure is enabled.
CMA Contiguous Memory Area support is enabled.
DRM Direct Rendering Management support is enabled.
DYNAMIC_DEBUG Build in debug messages and enable them at runtime
EDD BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled
EFI EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled
EIDE EIDE/ATAPI support is enabled.
EVM Extended Verification Module
FB The frame buffer device is enabled.
FTRACE Function tracing enabled.
GCOV GCOV profiling is enabled.
HW Appropriate hardware is enabled.
IA-64 IA-64 architecture is enabled.
IMA Integrity measurement architecture is enabled.
IOSCHED More than one I/O scheduler is enabled.
IP_PNP IP DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP is enabled.
IPV6 IPv6 support is enabled.
ISAPNP ISA PnP code is enabled.
ISDN Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
JOY Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
KGDB Kernel debugger support is enabled.
KVM Kernel Virtual Machine support is enabled.
LIBATA Libata driver is enabled
LP Printer support is enabled.
LOOP Loopback device support is enabled.
M68k M68k architecture is enabled.
These options have more detailed description inside of
Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt.
MDA MDA console support is enabled.
MIPS MIPS architecture is enabled.
MOUSE Appropriate mouse support is enabled.
MSI Message Signaled Interrupts (PCI).
MTD MTD (Memory Technology Device) support is enabled.
NET Appropriate network support is enabled.
NUMA NUMA support is enabled.
NFS Appropriate NFS support is enabled.
OSS OSS sound support is enabled.
PV_OPS A paravirtualized kernel is enabled.
PARIDE The ParIDE (parallel port IDE) subsystem is enabled.
PARISC The PA-RISC architecture is enabled.
PCI PCI bus support is enabled.
PCIE PCI Express support is enabled.
PCMCIA The PCMCIA subsystem is enabled.
PNP Plug & Play support is enabled.
PPC PowerPC architecture is enabled.
PPT Parallel port support is enabled.
PS2 Appropriate PS/2 support is enabled.
RAM RAM disk support is enabled.
S390 S390 architecture is enabled.
SCSI Appropriate SCSI support is enabled.
A lot of drivers have their options described inside
the Documentation/scsi/ sub-directory.
SECURITY Different security models are enabled.
SELINUX SELinux support is enabled.
APPARMOR AppArmor support is enabled.
SERIAL Serial support is enabled.
SH SuperH architecture is enabled.
SMP The kernel is an SMP kernel.
SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled.
SWSUSP Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled.
TPM TPM drivers are enabled.
TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
UMS USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
USB USB support is enabled.
USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
V4L Video For Linux support is enabled.
VMMIO Driver for memory mapped virtio devices is enabled.
VGA The VGA console has been enabled.
VT Virtual terminal support is enabled.
WDT Watchdog support is enabled.
XT IBM PC/XT MFM hard disk support is enabled.
X86-32 X86-32, aka i386 architecture is enabled.
X86-64 X86-64 architecture is enabled.
More X86-64 boot options can be found in
Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt .
X86 Either 32-bit or 64-bit x86 (same as X86-32+X86-64)
X86_UV SGI UV support is enabled.
XEN Xen support is enabled
In addition, the following text indicates that the option:
BUGS= Relates to possible processor bugs on the said processor.
KNL Is a kernel start-up parameter.
BOOT Is a boot loader parameter.
Parameters denoted with BOOT are actually interpreted by the boot
loader, and have no meaning to the kernel directly.
Do not modify the syntax of boot loader parameters without extreme
need or coordination with <Documentation/x86/boot.txt>.
There are also arch-specific kernel-parameters not documented here.
See for example <Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt>.
Note that ALL kernel parameters listed below are CASE SENSITIVE, and that
a trailing = on the name of any parameter states that that parameter will
be entered as an environment variable, whereas its absence indicates that
it will appear as a kernel argument readable via /proc/cmdline by programs
running once the system is up.
The number of kernel parameters is not limited, but the length of the
complete command line (parameters including spaces etc.) is limited to
a fixed number of characters. This limit depends on the architecture
and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
./include/asm/setup.h as COMMAND_LINE_SIZE.
Finally, the [KMG] suffix is commonly described after a number of kernel
parameter values. These 'K', 'M', and 'G' letters represent the _binary_
multipliers 'Kilo', 'Mega', and 'Giga', equalling 2^10, 2^20, and 2^30
bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
acpi= [HW,ACPI,X86,ARM64]
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface
Format: { force | on | off | strict | noirq | rsdt |
@ -305,6 +106,16 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
use by PCI
Format: <irq>,<irq>...
acpi_mask_gpe= [HW,ACPI]
Due to the existence of _Lxx/_Exx, some GPEs triggered
by unsupported hardware/firmware features can result in
GPE floodings that cannot be automatically disabled by
the GPE dispatcher.
This facility can be used to prevent such uncontrolled
GPE floodings.
Format: <int>
Support masking of GPEs numbered from 0x00 to 0x7f.
acpi_no_auto_serialize [HW,ACPI]
Disable auto-serialization of AML methods
AML control methods that contain the opcodes to create
@ -811,7 +622,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
bits, and "f" is flow control ("r" for RTS or
omit it). Default is "9600n8".
See Documentation/serial-console.txt for more
See Documentation/admin-guide/serial-console.rst for more
information. See
Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt for an
alternative.
@ -1062,6 +873,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
dscc4.setup= [NET]
dump_apple_properties [X86]
Dump name and content of EFI device properties on
x86 Macs. Useful for driver authors to determine
what data is available or for reverse-engineering.
dyndbg[="val"] [KNL,DYNAMIC_DEBUG]
module.dyndbg[="val"]
Enable debug messages at boot time. See
@ -1074,12 +890,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
nopku [X86] Disable Memory Protection Keys CPU feature found
in some Intel CPUs.
eagerfpu= [X86]
on enable eager fpu restore
off disable eager fpu restore
auto selects the default scheme, which automatically
enables eagerfpu restore for xsaveopt.
module.async_probe [KNL]
Enable asynchronous probe on this module.
@ -1641,6 +1451,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
The builtin appraise policy appraises all files
owned by uid=0.
ima_canonical_fmt [IMA]
Use the canonical format for the binary runtime
measurements, instead of host native format.
ima_hash= [IMA]
Format: { md5 | sha1 | rmd160 | sha256 | sha384
| sha512 | ... }
@ -1760,6 +1574,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
disable
Do not enable intel_pstate as the default
scaling driver for the supported processors
passive
Use intel_pstate as a scaling driver, but configure it
to work with generic cpufreq governors (instead of
enabling its internal governor). This mode cannot be
used along with the hardware-managed P-states (HWP)
feature.
force
Enable intel_pstate on systems that prohibit it by default
in favor of acpi-cpufreq. Forcing the intel_pstate driver
@ -1780,6 +1600,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
Description Table, specifies preferred power management
profile as "Enterprise Server" or "Performance Server",
then this feature is turned on by default.
per_cpu_perf_limits
Allow per-logical-CPU P-State performance control limits using
cpufreq sysfs interface
intremap= [X86-64, Intel-IOMMU]
on enable Interrupt Remapping (default)
@ -1958,9 +1781,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
kmemcheck=2 (one-shot mode)
Default: 2 (one-shot mode)
kstack=N [X86] Print N words from the kernel stack
in oops dumps.
kvm.ignore_msrs=[KVM] Ignore guest accesses to unhandled MSRs.
Default is 0 (don't ignore, but inject #GP)
@ -2235,7 +2055,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
mce=option [X86-64] See Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
md= [HW] RAID subsystems devices and level
See Documentation/md.txt.
See Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst.
mdacon= [MDA]
Format: <first>,<last>
@ -2325,6 +2145,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
memory contents and reserves bad memory
regions that are detected.
mem_sleep_default= [SUSPEND] Default system suspend mode:
s2idle - Suspend-To-Idle
shallow - Power-On Suspend or equivalent (if supported)
deep - Suspend-To-RAM or equivalent (if supported)
See Documentation/power/states.txt.
meye.*= [HW] Set MotionEye Camera parameters
See Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt.
@ -2401,7 +2227,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
that the amount of memory usable for all allocations
is not too small.
movable_node [KNL,X86] Boot-time switch to enable the effects
movable_node [KNL] Boot-time switch to enable the effects
of CONFIG_MOVABLE_NODE=y. See mm/Kconfig for details.
MTD_Partition= [MTD]
@ -2545,7 +2371,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
will be sent.
The default is to send the implementation identification
information.
nfs.recover_lost_locks =
[NFSv4] Attempt to recover locks that were lost due
to a lease timeout on the server. Please note that
@ -2754,6 +2580,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
no-kvmapf [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized asynchronous page
fault handling.
no-vmw-sched-clock
[X86,PV_OPS] Disable paravirtualized VMware scheduler
clock and use the default one.
no-steal-acc [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized steal time accounting.
steal time is computed, but won't influence scheduler
behaviour
@ -3235,6 +3065,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
may be specified.
Format: <port>,<port>....
powersave=off [PPC] This option disables power saving features.
It specifically disables cpuidle and sets the
platform machine description specific power_save
function to NULL. On Idle the CPU just reduces
execution priority.
ppc_strict_facility_enable
[PPC] This option catches any kernel floating point,
Altivec, VSX and SPE outside of regions specifically
@ -3318,7 +3154,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
r128= [HW,DRM]
raid= [HW,RAID]
See Documentation/md.txt.
See Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst.
ramdisk_size= [RAM] Sizes of RAM disks in kilobytes
See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
@ -3668,13 +3504,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
[KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level.
See Documentation/cgroup-v1/cpusets.txt.
relative_sleep_states=
[SUSPEND] Use sleep state labeling where the deepest
state available other than hibernation is always "mem".
Format: { "0" | "1" }
0 -- Traditional sleep state labels.
1 -- Relative sleep state labels.
reserve= [KNL,BUGS] Force the kernel to ignore some iomem area
reservetop= [X86-32]
@ -3824,12 +3653,6 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
shapers= [NET]
Maximal number of shapers.
show_msr= [x86] show boot-time MSR settings
Format: { <integer> }
Show boot-time (BIOS-initialized) MSR settings.
The parameter means the number of CPUs to show,
for example 1 means boot CPU only.
simeth= [IA-64]
simscsi=
@ -3998,10 +3821,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
it if 0 is given (See Documentation/cgroup-v1/memory.txt)
swiotlb= [ARM,IA-64,PPC,MIPS,X86]
Format: { <int> | force }
Format: { <int> | force | noforce }
<int> -- Number of I/O TLB slabs
force -- force using of bounce buffers even if they
wouldn't be automatically used by the kernel
noforce -- Never use bounce buffers (for debugging)
switches= [HW,M68k]
@ -4197,7 +4021,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
See also Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt
udbg-immortal [PPC] When debugging early kernel crashes that
happen after console_init() and before a proper
happen after console_init() and before a proper
console driver takes over, this boot options might
help "seeing" what's going on.
@ -4564,9 +4388,3 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
xirc2ps_cs= [NET,PCMCIA]
Format:
<irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]]
______________________________________________________________________
TODO:
Add more DRM drivers.

520
Documentation/md.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/md.rst
View File

@ -1,42 +1,77 @@
Tools that manage md devices can be found at
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/raid/
RAID arrays
===========
Boot time assembly of RAID arrays
---------------------------------
Tools that manage md devices can be found at
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/raid/
You can boot with your md device with the following kernel command
lines:
for old raid arrays without persistent superblocks:
for old raid arrays without persistent superblocks::
md=<md device no.>,<raid level>,<chunk size factor>,<fault level>,dev0,dev1,...,devn
for raid arrays with persistent superblocks
for raid arrays with persistent superblocks::
md=<md device no.>,dev0,dev1,...,devn
or, to assemble a partitionable array:
or, to assemble a partitionable array::
md=d<md device no.>,dev0,dev1,...,devn
md device no. = the number of the md device ...
0 means md0,
1 md1,
2 md2,
3 md3,
4 md4
raid level = -1 linear mode
0 striped mode
other modes are only supported with persistent super blocks
``md device no.``
+++++++++++++++++
chunk size factor = (raid-0 and raid-1 only)
Set the chunk size as 4k << n.
fault level = totally ignored
dev0-devn: e.g. /dev/hda1,/dev/hdc1,/dev/sda1,/dev/sdb1
A possible loadlin line (Harald Hoyer <HarryH@Royal.Net>) looks like this:
The number of the md device
e:\loadlin\loadlin e:\zimage root=/dev/md0 md=0,0,4,0,/dev/hdb2,/dev/hdc3 ro
================= =========
``md device no.`` device
================= =========
0 md0
1 md1
2 md2
3 md3
4 md4
================= =========
``raid level``
++++++++++++++
level of the RAID array
=============== =============
``raid level`` level
=============== =============
-1 linear mode
0 striped mode
=============== =============
other modes are only supported with persistent super blocks
``chunk size factor``
+++++++++++++++++++++
(raid-0 and raid-1 only)
Set the chunk size as 4k << n.
``fault level``
+++++++++++++++
Totally ignored
``dev0`` to ``devn``
++++++++++++++++++++
e.g. ``/dev/hda1``, ``/dev/hdc1``, ``/dev/sda1``, ``/dev/sdb1``
A possible loadlin line (Harald Hoyer <HarryH@Royal.Net>) looks like this::
e:\loadlin\loadlin e:\zimage root=/dev/md0 md=0,0,4,0,/dev/hdb2,/dev/hdc3 ro
Boot time autodetection of RAID arrays
@ -45,10 +80,10 @@ Boot time autodetection of RAID arrays
When md is compiled into the kernel (not as module), partitions of
type 0xfd are scanned and automatically assembled into RAID arrays.
This autodetection may be suppressed with the kernel parameter
"raid=noautodetect". As of kernel 2.6.9, only drives with a type 0
``raid=noautodetect``. As of kernel 2.6.9, only drives with a type 0
superblock can be autodetected and run at boot time.
The kernel parameter "raid=partitionable" (or "raid=part") means
The kernel parameter ``raid=partitionable`` (or ``raid=part``) means
that all auto-detected arrays are assembled as partitionable.
Boot time assembly of degraded/dirty arrays
@ -56,22 +91,23 @@ Boot time assembly of degraded/dirty arrays
If a raid5 or raid6 array is both dirty and degraded, it could have
undetectable data corruption. This is because the fact that it is
'dirty' means that the parity cannot be trusted, and the fact that it
``dirty`` means that the parity cannot be trusted, and the fact that it
is degraded means that some datablocks are missing and cannot reliably
be reconstructed (due to no parity).
For this reason, md will normally refuse to start such an array. This
requires the sysadmin to take action to explicitly start the array
despite possible corruption. This is normally done with
despite possible corruption. This is normally done with::
mdadm --assemble --force ....
This option is not really available if the array has the root
filesystem on it. In order to support this booting from such an
array, md supports a module parameter "start_dirty_degraded" which,
array, md supports a module parameter ``start_dirty_degraded`` which,
when set to 1, bypassed the checks and will allows dirty degraded
arrays to be started.
So, to boot with a root filesystem of a dirty degraded raid[56], use
So, to boot with a root filesystem of a dirty degraded raid 5 or 6, use::
md-mod.start_dirty_degraded=1
@ -80,30 +116,30 @@ Superblock formats
------------------
The md driver can support a variety of different superblock formats.
Currently, it supports superblock formats "0.90.0" and the "md-1" format
Currently, it supports superblock formats ``0.90.0`` and the ``md-1`` format
introduced in the 2.5 development series.
The kernel will autodetect which format superblock is being used.
Superblock format '0' is treated differently to others for legacy
Superblock format ``0`` is treated differently to others for legacy
reasons - it is the original superblock format.
General Rules - apply for all superblock formats
------------------------------------------------
An array is 'created' by writing appropriate superblocks to all
An array is ``created`` by writing appropriate superblocks to all
devices.
It is 'assembled' by associating each of these devices with an
It is ``assembled`` by associating each of these devices with an
particular md virtual device. Once it is completely assembled, it can
be accessed.
An array should be created by a user-space tool. This will write
superblocks to all devices. It will usually mark the array as
'unclean', or with some devices missing so that the kernel md driver
can create appropriate redundancy (copying in raid1, parity
calculation in raid4/5).
``unclean``, or with some devices missing so that the kernel md driver
can create appropriate redundancy (copying in raid 1, parity
calculation in raid 4/5).
When an array is assembled, it is first initialized with the
SET_ARRAY_INFO ioctl. This contains, in particular, a major and minor
@ -126,13 +162,12 @@ Devices that have failed or are not yet active can be detached from an
array using HOT_REMOVE_DISK.
Specific Rules that apply to format-0 super block arrays, and
arrays with no superblock (non-persistent).
-------------------------------------------------------------
Specific Rules that apply to format-0 super block arrays, and arrays with no superblock (non-persistent)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
An array can be 'created' by describing the array (level, chunksize
etc) in a SET_ARRAY_INFO ioctl. This must have major_version==0 and
raid_disks != 0.
An array can be ``created`` by describing the array (level, chunksize
etc) in a SET_ARRAY_INFO ioctl. This must have ``major_version==0`` and
``raid_disks != 0``.
Then uninitialized devices can be added with ADD_NEW_DISK. The
structure passed to ADD_NEW_DISK must specify the state of the device
@ -142,24 +177,26 @@ Once started with RUN_ARRAY, uninitialized spares can be added with
HOT_ADD_DISK.
MD devices in sysfs
-------------------
md devices appear in sysfs (/sys) as regular block devices,
e.g.
md devices appear in sysfs (``/sys``) as regular block devices,
e.g.::
/sys/block/md0
Each 'md' device will contain a subdirectory called 'md' which
Each ``md`` device will contain a subdirectory called ``md`` which
contains further md-specific information about the device.
All md devices contain:
level
a text file indicating the 'raid level'. e.g. raid0, raid1,
a text file indicating the ``raid level``. e.g. raid0, raid1,
raid5, linear, multipath, faulty.
If no raid level has been set yet (array is still being
assembled), the value will reflect whatever has been written
to it, which may be a name like the above, or may be a number
such as '0', '5', etc.
such as ``0``, ``5``, etc.
raid_disks
a text file with a simple number indicating the number of devices
@ -172,10 +209,10 @@ All md devices contain:
A change to this attribute will not be permitted if it would
reduce the size of the array. To reduce the number of drives
in an e.g. raid5, the array size must first be reduced by
setting the 'array_size' attribute.
setting the ``array_size`` attribute.
chunk_size
This is the size in bytes for 'chunks' and is only relevant to
This is the size in bytes for ``chunks`` and is only relevant to
raid levels that involve striping (0,4,5,6,10). The address space
of the array is conceptually divided into chunks and consecutive
chunks are striped onto neighbouring devices.
@ -183,7 +220,7 @@ All md devices contain:
of 2. This can only be set while assembling an array
layout
The "layout" for the array for the particular level. This is
The ``layout`` for the array for the particular level. This is
simply a number that is interpretted differently by different
levels. It can be written while assembling an array.
@ -193,22 +230,24 @@ All md devices contain:
devices. Writing a number (in Kilobytes) which is less than
the available size will set the size. Any reconfiguration of the
array (e.g. adding devices) will not cause the size to change.
Writing the word 'default' will cause the effective size of the
Writing the word ``default`` will cause the effective size of the
array to be whatever size is actually available based on
'level', 'chunk_size' and 'component_size'.
``level``, ``chunk_size`` and ``component_size``.
This can be used to reduce the size of the array before reducing
the number of devices in a raid4/5/6, or to support external
metadata formats which mandate such clipping.
reshape_position
This is either "none" or a sector number within the devices of
the array where "reshape" is up to. If this is set, the three
This is either ``none`` or a sector number within the devices of
the array where ``reshape`` is up to. If this is set, the three
attributes mentioned above (raid_disks, chunk_size, layout) can
potentially have 2 values, an old and a new value. If these
values differ, reading the attribute returns
values differ, reading the attribute returns::
new (old)
and writing will effect the 'new' value, leaving the 'old'
and writing will effect the ``new`` value, leaving the ``old``
unchanged.
component_size
@ -223,9 +262,9 @@ All md devices contain:
metadata_version
This indicates the format that is being used to record metadata
about the array. It can be 0.90 (traditional format), 1.0, 1.1,
1.2 (newer format in varying locations) or "none" indicating that
1.2 (newer format in varying locations) or ``none`` indicating that
the kernel isn't managing metadata at all.
Alternately it can be "external:" followed by a string which
Alternately it can be ``external:`` followed by a string which
is set by user-space. This indicates that metadata is managed
by a user-space program. Any device failure or other event that
requires a metadata update will cause array activity to be
@ -233,9 +272,9 @@ All md devices contain:
resync_start
The point at which resync should start. If no resync is needed,
this will be a very large number (or 'none' since 2.6.30-rc1). At
this will be a very large number (or ``none`` since 2.6.30-rc1). At
array creation it will default to 0, though starting the array as
'clean' will set it much larger.
``clean`` will set it much larger.
new_dev
This file can be written but not read. The value written should
@ -246,10 +285,10 @@ All md devices contain:
safe_mode_delay
When an md array has seen no write requests for a certain period
of time, it will be marked as 'clean'. When another write
request arrives, the array is marked as 'dirty' before the write
commences. This is known as 'safe_mode'.
The 'certain period' is controlled by this file which stores the
of time, it will be marked as ``clean``. When another write
request arrives, the array is marked as ``dirty`` before the write
commences. This is known as ``safe_mode``.
The ``certain period`` is controlled by this file which stores the
period as a number of seconds. The default is 200msec (0.200).
Writing a value of 0 disables safemode.
@ -260,38 +299,50 @@ All md devices contain:
cannot be explicitly set, and some transitions are not allowed.
Select/poll works on this file. All changes except between
active_idle and active (which can be frequent and are not
very interesting) are notified. active->active_idle is
reported if the metadata is externally managed.
Active_idle and active (which can be frequent and are not
very interesting) are notified. active->active_idle is
reported if the metadata is externally managed.
clear
No devices, no size, no level
Writing is equivalent to STOP_ARRAY ioctl
inactive
May have some settings, but array is not active
all IO results in error
all IO results in error
When written, doesn't tear down array, but just stops it
suspended (not supported yet)
All IO requests will block. The array can be reconfigured.
Writing this, if accepted, will block until array is quiessent
readonly
no resync can happen. no superblocks get written.
write requests fail
read-auto
like readonly, but behaves like 'clean' on a write request.
clean - no pending writes, but otherwise active.
Write requests fail
read-auto
like readonly, but behaves like ``clean`` on a write request.
clean
no pending writes, but otherwise active.
When written to inactive array, starts without resync
If a write request arrives then
if metadata is known, mark 'dirty' and switch to 'active'.
if not known, block and switch to write-pending
if metadata is known, mark ``dirty`` and switch to ``active``.
if not known, block and switch to write-pending
If written to an active array that has pending writes, then fails.
active
fully active: IO and resync can be happening.
When written to inactive array, starts with resync
write-pending
clean, but writes are blocked waiting for 'active' to be written.
clean, but writes are blocked waiting for ``active`` to be written.
active-idle
like active, but no writes have been seen for a while (safe_mode_delay).
@ -299,57 +350,71 @@ All md devices contain:
bitmap/location
This indicates where the write-intent bitmap for the array is
stored.
It can be one of "none", "file" or "[+-]N".
"file" may later be extended to "file:/file/name"
"[+-]N" means that many sectors from the start of the metadata.
This is replicated on all devices. For arrays with externally
managed metadata, the offset is from the beginning of the
device.
It can be one of ``none``, ``file`` or ``[+-]N``.
``file`` may later be extended to ``file:/file/name``
``[+-]N`` means that many sectors from the start of the metadata.
This is replicated on all devices. For arrays with externally
managed metadata, the offset is from the beginning of the
device.
bitmap/chunksize
The size, in bytes, of the chunk which will be represented by a
single bit. For RAID456, it is a portion of an individual
device. For RAID10, it is a portion of the array. For RAID1, it
is both (they come to the same thing).
bitmap/time_base
The time, in seconds, between looking for bits in the bitmap to
be cleared. In the current implementation, a bit will be cleared
between 2 and 3 times "time_base" after all the covered blocks
between 2 and 3 times ``time_base`` after all the covered blocks
are known to be in-sync.
bitmap/backlog
When write-mostly devices are active in a RAID1, write requests
to those devices proceed in the background - the filesystem (or
other user of the device) does not have to wait for them.
'backlog' sets a limit on the number of concurrent background
``backlog`` sets a limit on the number of concurrent background
writes. If there are more than this, new writes will by
synchronous.
bitmap/metadata
This can be either 'internal' or 'external'.
'internal' is the default and means the metadata for the bitmap
is stored in the first 256 bytes of the allocated space and is
managed by the md module.
'external' means that bitmap metadata is managed externally to
the kernel (i.e. by some userspace program)
This can be either ``internal`` or ``external``.
``internal``
is the default and means the metadata for the bitmap
is stored in the first 256 bytes of the allocated space and is
managed by the md module.
``external``
means that bitmap metadata is managed externally to
the kernel (i.e. by some userspace program)
bitmap/can_clear
This is either 'true' or 'false'. If 'true', then bits in the
This is either ``true`` or ``false``. If ``true``, then bits in the
bitmap will be cleared when the corresponding blocks are thought
to be in-sync. If 'false', bits will never be cleared.
This is automatically set to 'false' if a write happens on a
to be in-sync. If ``false``, bits will never be cleared.
This is automatically set to ``false`` if a write happens on a
degraded array, or if the array becomes degraded during a write.
When metadata is managed externally, it should be set to true
once the array becomes non-degraded, and this fact has been
recorded in the metadata.
As component devices are added to an md array, they appear in the 'md'
directory as new directories named
As component devices are added to an md array, they appear in the ``md``
directory as new directories named::
dev-XXX
where XXX is a name that the kernel knows for the device, e.g. hdb1.
where ``XXX`` is a name that the kernel knows for the device, e.g. hdb1.
Each directory contains:
block
a symlink to the block device in /sys/block, e.g.
a symlink to the block device in /sys/block, e.g.::
/sys/block/md0/md/dev-hdb1/block -> ../../../../block/hdb/hdb1
super
@ -358,51 +423,83 @@ Each directory contains:
state
A file recording the current state of the device in the array
which can be a comma separated list of
faulty - device has been kicked from active use due to
a detected fault, or it has unacknowledged bad
blocks
in_sync - device is a fully in-sync member of the array
writemostly - device will only be subject to read
requests if there are no other options.
This applies only to raid1 arrays.
blocked - device has failed, and the failure hasn't been
acknowledged yet by the metadata handler.
Writes that would write to this device if
it were not faulty are blocked.
spare - device is working, but not a full member.
This includes spares that are in the process
of being recovered to
write_error - device has ever seen a write error.
want_replacement - device is (mostly) working but probably
should be replaced, either due to errors or
due to user request.
replacement - device is a replacement for another active
device with same raid_disk.
which can be a comma separated list of:
faulty
device has been kicked from active use due to
a detected fault, or it has unacknowledged bad
blocks
in_sync
device is a fully in-sync member of the array
writemostly
device will only be subject to read
requests if there are no other options.
This applies only to raid1 arrays.
blocked
device has failed, and the failure hasn't been
acknowledged yet by the metadata handler.
Writes that would write to this device if
it were not faulty are blocked.
spare
device is working, but not a full member.
This includes spares that are in the process
of being recovered to
write_error
device has ever seen a write error.
want_replacement
device is (mostly) working but probably
should be replaced, either due to errors or
due to user request.
replacement
device is a replacement for another active
device with same raid_disk.
This list may grow in future.
This can be written to.
Writing "faulty" simulates a failure on the device.
Writing "remove" removes the device from the array.
Writing "writemostly" sets the writemostly flag.
Writing "-writemostly" clears the writemostly flag.
Writing "blocked" sets the "blocked" flag.
Writing "-blocked" clears the "blocked" flags and allows writes
to complete and possibly simulates an error.
Writing "in_sync" sets the in_sync flag.
Writing "write_error" sets writeerrorseen flag.
Writing "-write_error" clears writeerrorseen flag.
Writing "want_replacement" is allowed at any time except to a
replacement device or a spare. It sets the flag.
Writing "-want_replacement" is allowed at any time. It clears
the flag.
Writing "replacement" or "-replacement" is only allowed before
starting the array. It sets or clears the flag.
Writing ``faulty`` simulates a failure on the device.
Writing ``remove`` removes the device from the array.
Writing ``writemostly`` sets the writemostly flag.
Writing ``-writemostly`` clears the writemostly flag.
Writing ``blocked`` sets the ``blocked`` flag.
Writing ``-blocked`` clears the ``blocked`` flags and allows writes
to complete and possibly simulates an error.
Writing ``in_sync`` sets the in_sync flag.
Writing ``write_error`` sets writeerrorseen flag.
Writing ``-write_error`` clears writeerrorseen flag.
Writing ``want_replacement`` is allowed at any time except to a
replacement device or a spare. It sets the flag.
Writing ``-want_replacement`` is allowed at any time. It clears
the flag.
Writing ``replacement`` or ``-replacement`` is only allowed before
starting the array. It sets or clears the flag.
This file responds to select/poll. Any change to 'faulty'
or 'blocked' causes an event.
This file responds to select/poll. Any change to ``faulty``
or ``blocked`` causes an event.
errors
An approximate count of read errors that have been detected on
@ -417,9 +514,9 @@ Each directory contains:
slot
This gives the role that the device has in the array. It will
either be 'none' if the device is not active in the array
either be ``none`` if the device is not active in the array
(i.e. is a spare or has failed) or an integer less than the
'raid_disks' number for the array indicating which position
``raid_disks`` number for the array indicating which position
it currently fills. This can only be set while assembling an
array. A device for which this is set is assumed to be working.
@ -437,7 +534,7 @@ Each directory contains:
written, it will be rejected.
recovery_start
When the device is not 'in_sync', this records the number of
When the device is not ``in_sync``, this records the number of
sectors from the start of the device which are known to be
correct. This is normally zero, but during a recovery
operation it will steadily increase, and if the recovery is
@ -447,21 +544,21 @@ Each directory contains:
This can be set whenever the device is not an active member of
the array, either before the array is activated, or before
the 'slot' is set.
the ``slot`` is set.
Setting this to ``none`` is equivalent to setting ``in_sync``.
Setting to any other value also clears the ``in_sync`` flag.
Setting this to 'none' is equivalent to setting 'in_sync'.
Setting to any other value also clears the 'in_sync' flag.
bad_blocks
This gives the list of all known bad blocks in the form of
start address and length (in sectors respectively). If output
is too big to fit in a page, it will be truncated. Writing
"sector length" to this file adds new acknowledged (i.e.
``sector length`` to this file adds new acknowledged (i.e.
recorded to disk safely) bad blocks.
unacknowledged_bad_blocks
This gives the list of known-but-not-yet-saved-to-disk bad
blocks in the same form of 'bad_blocks'. If output is too big
blocks in the same form of ``bad_blocks``. If output is too big
to fit in a page, it will be truncated. Writing to this file
adds bad blocks without acknowledging them. This is largely
for testing.
@ -469,16 +566,18 @@ Each directory contains:
An active md device will also contain an entry for each active device
in the array. These are named
in the array. These are named::
rdNN
where 'NN' is the position in the array, starting from 0.
where ``NN`` is the position in the array, starting from 0.
So for a 3 drive array there will be rd0, rd1, rd2.
These are symbolic links to the appropriate 'dev-XXX' entry.
Thus, for example,
These are symbolic links to the appropriate ``dev-XXX`` entry.
Thus, for example::
cat /sys/block/md*/md/rd*/state
will show 'in_sync' on every line.
will show ``in_sync`` on every line.
@ -488,50 +587,62 @@ also have
sync_action
a text file that can be used to monitor and control the rebuild
process. It contains one word which can be one of:
resync - redundancy is being recalculated after unclean
shutdown or creation
recover - a hot spare is being built to replace a
failed/missing device
idle - nothing is happening
check - A full check of redundancy was requested and is
happening. This reads all blocks and checks
them. A repair may also happen for some raid
levels.
repair - A full check and repair is happening. This is
similar to 'resync', but was requested by the
user, and the write-intent bitmap is NOT used to
optimise the process.
resync
redundancy is being recalculated after unclean
shutdown or creation
recover
a hot spare is being built to replace a
failed/missing device
idle
nothing is happening
check
A full check of redundancy was requested and is
happening. This reads all blocks and checks
them. A repair may also happen for some raid
levels.
repair
A full check and repair is happening. This is
similar to ``resync``, but was requested by the
user, and the write-intent bitmap is NOT used to
optimise the process.
This file is writable, and each of the strings that could be
read are meaningful for writing.
'idle' will stop an active resync/recovery etc. There is no
guarantee that another resync/recovery may not be automatically
started again, though some event will be needed to trigger
this.
'resync' or 'recovery' can be used to restart the
corresponding operation if it was stopped with 'idle'.
'check' and 'repair' will start the appropriate process
providing the current state is 'idle'.
``idle`` will stop an active resync/recovery etc. There is no
guarantee that another resync/recovery may not be automatically
started again, though some event will be needed to trigger
this.
``resync`` or ``recovery`` can be used to restart the
corresponding operation if it was stopped with ``idle``.
``check`` and ``repair`` will start the appropriate process
providing the current state is ``idle``.
This file responds to select/poll. Any important change in the value
triggers a poll event. Sometimes the value will briefly be
"recover" if a recovery seems to be needed, but cannot be
achieved. In that case, the transition to "recover" isn't
``recover`` if a recovery seems to be needed, but cannot be
achieved. In that case, the transition to ``recover`` isn't
notified, but the transition away is.
degraded
This contains a count of the number of devices by which the
arrays is degraded. So an optimal array will show '0'. A
single failed/missing drive will show '1', etc.
arrays is degraded. So an optimal array will show ``0``. A
single failed/missing drive will show ``1``, etc.
This file responds to select/poll, any increase or decrease
in the count of missing devices will trigger an event.
mismatch_count
When performing 'check' and 'repair', and possibly when
performing 'resync', md will count the number of errors that are
found. The count in 'mismatch_cnt' is the number of sectors
that were re-written, or (for 'check') would have been
When performing ``check`` and ``repair``, and possibly when
performing ``resync``, md will count the number of errors that are
found. The count in ``mismatch_cnt`` is the number of sectors
that were re-written, or (for ``check``) would have been
re-written. As most raid levels work in units of pages rather
than sectors, this may be larger than the number of actual errors
by a factor of the number of sectors in a page.
@ -542,27 +653,30 @@ also have
would need to check the corresponding blocks. Either individual
numbers or start-end pairs can be written. Multiple numbers
can be separated by a space.
Note that the numbers are 'bit' numbers, not 'block' numbers.
Note that the numbers are ``bit`` numbers, not ``block`` numbers.
They should be scaled by the bitmap_chunksize.
sync_speed_min
sync_speed_max
This are similar to /proc/sys/dev/raid/speed_limit_{min,max}
sync_speed_min, sync_speed_max
This are similar to ``/proc/sys/dev/raid/speed_limit_{min,max}``
however they only apply to the particular array.
If no value has been written to these, or if the word 'system'
If no value has been written to these, or if the word ``system``
is written, then the system-wide value is used. If a value,
in kibibytes-per-second is written, then it is used.
When the files are read, they show the currently active value
followed by "(local)" or "(system)" depending on whether it is
followed by ``(local)`` or ``(system)`` depending on whether it is
a locally set or system-wide value.
sync_completed
This shows the number of sectors that have been completed of
whatever the current sync_action is, followed by the number of
sectors in total that could need to be processed. The two
numbers are separated by a '/' thus effectively showing one
numbers are separated by a ``/`` thus effectively showing one
value, a fraction of the process that is complete.
A 'select' on this attribute will return when resync completes,
A ``select`` on this attribute will return when resync completes,
when it reaches the current sync_max (below) and possibly at
other times.
@ -570,26 +684,24 @@ also have
This shows the current actual speed, in K/sec, of the current
sync_action. It is averaged over the last 30 seconds.
suspend_lo
suspend_hi
suspend_lo, suspend_hi
The two values, given as numbers of sectors, indicate a range
within the array where IO will be blocked. This is currently
only supported for raid4/5/6.
sync_min
sync_max
sync_min, sync_max
The two values, given as numbers of sectors, indicate a range
within the array where 'check'/'repair' will operate. Must be
a multiple of chunk_size. When it reaches "sync_max" it will
within the array where ``check``/``repair`` will operate. Must be
a multiple of chunk_size. When it reaches ``sync_max`` it will
pause, rather than complete.
You can use 'select' or 'poll' on "sync_completed" to wait for
You can use ``select`` or ``poll`` on ``sync_completed`` to wait for
that number to reach sync_max. Then you can either increase
"sync_max", or can write 'idle' to "sync_action".
``sync_max``, or can write ``idle`` to ``sync_action``.
The value of 'max' for "sync_max" effectively disables the limit.
The value of ``max`` for ``sync_max`` effectively disables the limit.
When a resync is active, the value can only ever be increased,
never decreased.
The value of '0' is the minimum for "sync_min".
The value of ``0`` is the minimum for ``sync_min``.
@ -598,13 +710,15 @@ personality module that manages it.
These are specific to the implementation of the module and could
change substantially if the implementation changes.
These currently include
These currently include:
stripe_cache_size (currently raid5 only)
number of entries in the stripe cache. This is writable, but
there are upper and lower limits (32768, 17). Default is 256.
strip_cache_active (currently raid5 only)
number of active entries in the stripe cache
preread_bypass_threshold (currently raid5 only)
number of times a stripe requiring preread will be bypassed by
a stripe that does not require preread. For fairness defaults

126
Documentation/module-signing.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/module-signing.rst
View File

@ -1,22 +1,21 @@
==============================
KERNEL MODULE SIGNING FACILITY
==============================
Kernel module signing facility
------------------------------
CONTENTS
- Overview.
- Configuring module signing.
- Generating signing keys.
- Public keys in the kernel.
- Manually signing modules.
- Signed modules and stripping.
- Loading signed modules.
- Non-valid signatures and unsigned modules.
- Administering/protecting the private key.
.. CONTENTS
..
.. - Overview.
.. - Configuring module signing.
.. - Generating signing keys.
.. - Public keys in the kernel.
.. - Manually signing modules.
.. - Signed modules and stripping.
.. - Loading signed modules.
.. - Non-valid signatures and unsigned modules.
.. - Administering/protecting the private key.
========
OVERVIEW
Overview
========
The kernel module signing facility cryptographically signs modules during
@ -36,17 +35,19 @@ SHA-512 (the algorithm is selected by data in the signature).
==========================
CONFIGURING MODULE SIGNING
Configuring module signing
==========================
The module signing facility is enabled by going to the "Enable Loadable Module
Support" section of the kernel configuration and turning on
The module signing facility is enabled by going to the
:menuselection:`Enable Loadable Module Support` section of
the kernel configuration and turning on::
CONFIG_MODULE_SIG "Module signature verification"
This has a number of options available:
(1) "Require modules to be validly signed" (CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE)
(1) :menuselection:`Require modules to be validly signed`
(``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE``)
This specifies how the kernel should deal with a module that has a
signature for which the key is not known or a module that is unsigned.
@ -64,35 +65,39 @@ This has a number of options available:
cannot be parsed, it will be rejected out of hand.
(2) "Automatically sign all modules" (CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_ALL)
(2) :menuselection:`Automatically sign all modules`
(``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_ALL``)
If this is on then modules will be automatically signed during the
modules_install phase of a build. If this is off, then the modules must
be signed manually using:
be signed manually using::
scripts/sign-file
(3) "Which hash algorithm should modules be signed with?"
(3) :menuselection:`Which hash algorithm should modules be signed with?`
This presents a choice of which hash algorithm the installation phase will
sign the modules with:
CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA1 "Sign modules with SHA-1"
CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA224 "Sign modules with SHA-224"
CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA256 "Sign modules with SHA-256"
CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA384 "Sign modules with SHA-384"
CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA512 "Sign modules with SHA-512"
=============================== ==========================================
``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA1`` :menuselection:`Sign modules with SHA-1`
``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA224`` :menuselection:`Sign modules with SHA-224`
``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA256`` :menuselection:`Sign modules with SHA-256`
``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA384`` :menuselection:`Sign modules with SHA-384`
``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_SHA512`` :menuselection:`Sign modules with SHA-512`
=============================== ==========================================
The algorithm selected here will also be built into the kernel (rather
than being a module) so that modules signed with that algorithm can have
their signatures checked without causing a dependency loop.
(4) "File name or PKCS#11 URI of module signing key" (CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_KEY)
(4) :menuselection:`File name or PKCS#11 URI of module signing key`
(``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_KEY``)
Setting this option to something other than its default of
"certs/signing_key.pem" will disable the autogeneration of signing keys
``certs/signing_key.pem`` will disable the autogeneration of signing keys
and allow the kernel modules to be signed with a key of your choosing.
The string provided should identify a file containing both a private key
and its corresponding X.509 certificate in PEM form, or — on systems where
@ -102,10 +107,11 @@ This has a number of options available:
If the PEM file containing the private key is encrypted, or if the
PKCS#11 token requries a PIN, this can be provided at build time by
means of the KBUILD_SIGN_PIN variable.
means of the ``KBUILD_SIGN_PIN`` variable.
(5) "Additional X.509 keys for default system keyring" (CONFIG_SYSTEM_TRUSTED_KEYS)
(5) :menuselection:`Additional X.509 keys for default system keyring`
(``CONFIG_SYSTEM_TRUSTED_KEYS``)
This option can be set to the filename of a PEM-encoded file containing
additional certificates which will be included in the system keyring by
@ -116,7 +122,7 @@ packages to the kernel build processes for the tool that does the signing.
=======================
GENERATING SIGNING KEYS
Generating signing keys
=======================
Cryptographic keypairs are required to generate and check signatures. A
@ -126,14 +132,14 @@ it can be deleted or stored securely. The public key gets built into the
kernel so that it can be used to check the signatures as the modules are
loaded.
Under normal conditions, when CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_KEY is unchanged from its
Under normal conditions, when ``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_KEY`` is unchanged from its
default, the kernel build will automatically generate a new keypair using
openssl if one does not exist in the file:
openssl if one does not exist in the file::
certs/signing_key.pem
during the building of vmlinux (the public part of the key needs to be built
into vmlinux) using parameters in the:
into vmlinux) using parameters in the::
certs/x509.genkey
@ -142,14 +148,14 @@ file (which is also generated if it does not already exist).
It is strongly recommended that you provide your own x509.genkey file.
Most notably, in the x509.genkey file, the req_distinguished_name section
should be altered from the default:
should be altered from the default::
[ req_distinguished_name ]
#O = Unspecified company
CN = Build time autogenerated kernel key
#emailAddress = unspecified.user@unspecified.company
The generated RSA key size can also be set with:
The generated RSA key size can also be set with::
[ req ]
default_bits = 4096
@ -158,23 +164,23 @@ The generated RSA key size can also be set with:
It is also possible to manually generate the key private/public files using the
x509.genkey key generation configuration file in the root node of the Linux
kernel sources tree and the openssl command. The following is an example to
generate the public/private key files:
generate the public/private key files::
openssl req -new -nodes -utf8 -sha256 -days 36500 -batch -x509 \
-config x509.genkey -outform PEM -out kernel_key.pem \
-keyout kernel_key.pem
The full pathname for the resulting kernel_key.pem file can then be specified
in the CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_KEY option, and the certificate and key therein will
in the ``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_KEY`` option, and the certificate and key therein will
be used instead of an autogenerated keypair.
=========================
PUBLIC KEYS IN THE KERNEL
Public keys in the kernel
=========================
The kernel contains a ring of public keys that can be viewed by root. They're
in a keyring called ".system_keyring" that can be seen by:
in a keyring called ".system_keyring" that can be seen by::
[root@deneb ~]# cat /proc/keys
...
@ -184,27 +190,27 @@ in a keyring called ".system_keyring" that can be seen by:
Beyond the public key generated specifically for module signing, additional
trusted certificates can be provided in a PEM-encoded file referenced by the
CONFIG_SYSTEM_TRUSTED_KEYS configuration option.
``CONFIG_SYSTEM_TRUSTED_KEYS`` configuration option.
Further, the architecture code may take public keys from a hardware store and
add those in also (e.g. from the UEFI key database).
Finally, it is possible to add additional public keys by doing:
Finally, it is possible to add additional public keys by doing::
keyctl padd asymmetric "" [.system_keyring-ID] <[key-file]
e.g.:
e.g.::
keyctl padd asymmetric "" 0x223c7853 <my_public_key.x509
Note, however, that the kernel will only permit keys to be added to
.system_keyring _if_ the new key's X.509 wrapper is validly signed by a key
``.system_keyring _if_`` the new key's X.509 wrapper is validly signed by a key
that is already resident in the .system_keyring at the time the key was added.
=========================
MANUALLY SIGNING MODULES
=========================
========================
Manually signing modules
========================
To manually sign a module, use the scripts/sign-file tool available in
the Linux kernel source tree. The script requires 4 arguments:
@ -214,7 +220,7 @@ the Linux kernel source tree. The script requires 4 arguments:
3. The public key filename
4. The kernel module to be signed
The following is an example to sign a kernel module:
The following is an example to sign a kernel module::
scripts/sign-file sha512 kernel-signkey.priv \
kernel-signkey.x509 module.ko
@ -228,11 +234,11 @@ $KBUILD_SIGN_PIN environment variable.
============================
SIGNED MODULES AND STRIPPING
Signed modules and stripping
============================
A signed module has a digital signature simply appended at the end. The string
"~Module signature appended~." at the end of the module's file confirms that a
``~Module signature appended~.`` at the end of the module's file confirms that a
signature is present but it does not confirm that the signature is valid!
Signed modules are BRITTLE as the signature is outside of the defined ELF
@ -242,19 +248,19 @@ debug information present at the time of signing.
======================
LOADING SIGNED MODULES
Loading signed modules
======================
Modules are loaded with insmod, modprobe, init_module() or finit_module(),
exactly as for unsigned modules as no processing is done in userspace. The
signature checking is all done within the kernel.
Modules are loaded with insmod, modprobe, ``init_module()`` or
``finit_module()``, exactly as for unsigned modules as no processing is
done in userspace. The signature checking is all done within the kernel.
=========================================
NON-VALID SIGNATURES AND UNSIGNED MODULES
Non-valid signatures and unsigned modules
=========================================
If CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE is enabled or module.sig_enforce=1 is supplied on
If ``CONFIG_MODULE_SIG_FORCE`` is enabled or module.sig_enforce=1 is supplied on
the kernel command line, the kernel will only load validly signed modules
for which it has a public key. Otherwise, it will also load modules that are
unsigned. Any module for which the kernel has a key, but which proves to have
@ -264,7 +270,7 @@ Any module that has an unparseable signature will be rejected.
=========================================
ADMINISTERING/PROTECTING THE PRIVATE KEY
Administering/protecting the private key
=========================================
Since the private key is used to sign modules, viruses and malware could use
@ -275,5 +281,5 @@ in the root node of the kernel source tree.
If you use the same private key to sign modules for multiple kernel
configurations, you must ensure that the module version information is
sufficient to prevent loading a module into a different kernel. Either
set CONFIG_MODVERSIONS=y or ensure that each configuration has a different
kernel release string by changing EXTRAVERSION or CONFIG_LOCALVERSION.
set ``CONFIG_MODVERSIONS=y`` or ensure that each configuration has a different
kernel release string by changing ``EXTRAVERSION`` or ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``.

44
Documentation/mono.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/mono.rst
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Mono(tm) Binary Kernel Support for Linux
-----------------------------------------
Mono(tm) Binary Kernel Support for Linux
-----------------------------------------
To configure Linux to automatically execute Mono-based .NET binaries
(in the form of .exe files) without the need to use the mono CLR
@ -19,22 +19,24 @@ other program after you have done the following:
http://www.go-mono.com/compiling.html
Once the Mono CLR support has been installed, just check that
/usr/bin/mono (which could be located elsewhere, for example
/usr/local/bin/mono) is working.
``/usr/bin/mono`` (which could be located elsewhere, for example
``/usr/local/bin/mono``) is working.
2) You have to compile BINFMT_MISC either as a module or into
the kernel (CONFIG_BINFMT_MISC) and set it up properly.
the kernel (``CONFIG_BINFMT_MISC``) and set it up properly.
If you choose to compile it as a module, you will have
to insert it manually with modprobe/insmod, as kmod
cannot be easily supported with binfmt_misc.
Read the file 'binfmt_misc.txt' in this directory to know
cannot be easily supported with binfmt_misc.
Read the file ``binfmt_misc.txt`` in this directory to know
more about the configuration process.
3) Add the following entries to /etc/rc.local or similar script
3) Add the following entries to ``/etc/rc.local`` or similar script
to be run at system startup:
# Insert BINFMT_MISC module into the kernel
if [ ! -e /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register ]; then
.. code-block:: sh
# Insert BINFMT_MISC module into the kernel
if [ ! -e /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register ]; then
/sbin/modprobe binfmt_misc
# Some distributions, like Fedora Core, perform
# the following command automatically when the
@ -43,24 +45,26 @@ if [ ! -e /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register ]; then
# Thus, it is possible that the following line
# is not needed at all.
mount -t binfmt_misc none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc
fi
fi
# Register support for .NET CLR binaries
if [ -e /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register ]; then
# Register support for .NET CLR binaries
if [ -e /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register ]; then
# Replace /usr/bin/mono with the correct pathname to
# the Mono CLR runtime (usually /usr/local/bin/mono
# when compiling from sources or CVS).
echo ':CLR:M::MZ::/usr/bin/mono:' > /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register
else
else
echo "No binfmt_misc support"
exit 1
fi
fi
4) Check that .exe binaries can be ran without the need of a
wrapper script, simply by launching the .exe file directly
from a command prompt, for example:
4) Check that ``.exe`` binaries can be ran without the need of a
wrapper script, simply by launching the ``.exe`` file directly
from a command prompt, for example::
/usr/bin/xsd.exe
NOTE: If this fails with a permission denied error, check
that the .exe file has execute permissions.
.. note::
If this fails with a permission denied error, check
that the ``.exe`` file has execute permissions.

286
Documentation/admin-guide/parport.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
Parport
+++++++
The ``parport`` code provides parallel-port support under Linux. This
includes the ability to share one port between multiple device
drivers.
You can pass parameters to the ``parport`` code to override its automatic
detection of your hardware. This is particularly useful if you want
to use IRQs, since in general these can't be autoprobed successfully.
By default IRQs are not used even if they **can** be probed. This is
because there are a lot of people using the same IRQ for their
parallel port and a sound card or network card.
The ``parport`` code is split into two parts: generic (which deals with
port-sharing) and architecture-dependent (which deals with actually
using the port).
Parport as modules
==================
If you load the `parport`` code as a module, say::
# insmod parport
to load the generic ``parport`` code. You then must load the
architecture-dependent code with (for example)::
# insmod parport_pc io=0x3bc,0x378,0x278 irq=none,7,auto
to tell the ``parport`` code that you want three PC-style ports, one at
0x3bc with no IRQ, one at 0x378 using IRQ 7, and one at 0x278 with an
auto-detected IRQ. Currently, PC-style (``parport_pc``), Sun ``bpp``,
Amiga, Atari, and MFC3 hardware is supported.
PCI parallel I/O card support comes from ``parport_pc``. Base I/O
addresses should not be specified for supported PCI cards since they
are automatically detected.
modprobe
--------
If you use modprobe , you will find it useful to add lines as below to a
configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory::
alias parport_lowlevel parport_pc
options parport_pc io=0x378,0x278 irq=7,auto
modprobe will load ``parport_pc`` (with the options ``io=0x378,0x278 irq=7,auto``)
whenever a parallel port device driver (such as ``lp``) is loaded.
Note that these are example lines only! You shouldn't in general need
to specify any options to ``parport_pc`` in order to be able to use a
parallel port.
Parport probe [optional]
------------------------
In 2.2 kernels there was a module called ``parport_probe``, which was used
for collecting IEEE 1284 device ID information. This has now been
enhanced and now lives with the IEEE 1284 support. When a parallel
port is detected, the devices that are connected to it are analysed,
and information is logged like this::
parport0: Printer, BJC-210 (Canon)
The probe information is available from files in ``/proc/sys/dev/parport/``.
Parport linked into the kernel statically
=========================================
If you compile the ``parport`` code into the kernel, then you can use
kernel boot parameters to get the same effect. Add something like the
following to your LILO command line::
parport=0x3bc parport=0x378,7 parport=0x278,auto,nofifo
You can have many ``parport=...`` statements, one for each port you want
to add. Adding ``parport=0`` to the kernel command-line will disable
parport support entirely. Adding ``parport=auto`` to the kernel
command-line will make ``parport`` use any IRQ lines or DMA channels that
it auto-detects.
Files in /proc
==============
If you have configured the ``/proc`` filesystem into your kernel, you will
see a new directory entry: ``/proc/sys/dev/parport``. In there will be a
directory entry for each parallel port for which parport is
configured. In each of those directories are a collection of files
describing that parallel port.
The ``/proc/sys/dev/parport`` directory tree looks like::
parport
|-- default
| |-- spintime
| `-- timeslice
|-- parport0
| |-- autoprobe
| |-- autoprobe0
| |-- autoprobe1
| |-- autoprobe2
| |-- autoprobe3
| |-- devices
| | |-- active
| | `-- lp
| | `-- timeslice
| |-- base-addr
| |-- irq
| |-- dma
| |-- modes
| `-- spintime
`-- parport1
|-- autoprobe
|-- autoprobe0
|-- autoprobe1
|-- autoprobe2
|-- autoprobe3
|-- devices
| |-- active
| `-- ppa
| `-- timeslice
|-- base-addr
|-- irq
|-- dma
|-- modes
`-- spintime
.. tabularcolumns:: |p{4.0cm}|p{13.5cm}|
======================= =======================================================
File Contents
======================= =======================================================
``devices/active`` A list of the device drivers using that port. A "+"
will appear by the name of the device currently using
the port (it might not appear against any). The
string "none" means that there are no device drivers
using that port.
``base-addr`` Parallel port's base address, or addresses if the port
has more than one in which case they are separated
with tabs. These values might not have any sensible
meaning for some ports.
``irq`` Parallel port's IRQ, or -1 if none is being used.
``dma`` Parallel port's DMA channel, or -1 if none is being
used.
``modes`` Parallel port's hardware modes, comma-separated,
meaning:
- PCSPP
PC-style SPP registers are available.
- TRISTATE
Port is bidirectional.
- COMPAT
Hardware acceleration for printers is
available and will be used.
- EPP
Hardware acceleration for EPP protocol
is available and will be used.
- ECP
Hardware acceleration for ECP protocol
is available and will be used.
- DMA
DMA is available and will be used.
Note that the current implementation will only take
advantage of COMPAT and ECP modes if it has an IRQ
line to use.
``autoprobe`` Any IEEE-1284 device ID information that has been
acquired from the (non-IEEE 1284.3) device.
``autoprobe[0-3]`` IEEE 1284 device ID information retrieved from
daisy-chain devices that conform to IEEE 1284.3.
``spintime`` The number of microseconds to busy-loop while waiting
for the peripheral to respond. You might find that
adjusting this improves performance, depending on your
peripherals. This is a port-wide setting, i.e. it
applies to all devices on a particular port.
``timeslice`` The number of milliseconds that a device driver is
allowed to keep a port claimed for. This is advisory,
and driver can ignore it if it must.
``default/*`` The defaults for spintime and timeslice. When a new
port is registered, it picks up the default spintime.
When a new device is registered, it picks up the
default timeslice.
======================= =======================================================
Device drivers
==============
Once the parport code is initialised, you can attach device drivers to
specific ports. Normally this happens automatically; if the lp driver
is loaded it will create one lp device for each port found. You can
override this, though, by using parameters either when you load the lp
driver::
# insmod lp parport=0,2
or on the LILO command line::
lp=parport0 lp=parport2
Both the above examples would inform lp that you want ``/dev/lp0`` to be
the first parallel port, and /dev/lp1 to be the **third** parallel port,
with no lp device associated with the second port (parport1). Note
that this is different to the way older kernels worked; there used to
be a static association between the I/O port address and the device
name, so ``/dev/lp0`` was always the port at 0x3bc. This is no longer the
case - if you only have one port, it will default to being ``/dev/lp0``,
regardless of base address.
Also:
* If you selected the IEEE 1284 support at compile time, you can say
``lp=auto`` on the kernel command line, and lp will create devices
only for those ports that seem to have printers attached.
* If you give PLIP the ``timid`` parameter, either with ``plip=timid`` on
the command line, or with ``insmod plip timid=1`` when using modules,
it will avoid any ports that seem to be in use by other devices.
* IRQ autoprobing works only for a few port types at the moment.
Reporting printer problems with parport
=======================================
If you are having problems printing, please go through these steps to
try to narrow down where the problem area is.
When reporting problems with parport, really you need to give all of
the messages that ``parport_pc`` spits out when it initialises. There are
several code paths:
- polling
- interrupt-driven, protocol in software
- interrupt-driven, protocol in hardware using PIO
- interrupt-driven, protocol in hardware using DMA
The kernel messages that ``parport_pc`` logs give an indication of which
code path is being used. (They could be a lot better actually..)
For normal printer protocol, having IEEE 1284 modes enabled or not
should not make a difference.
To turn off the 'protocol in hardware' code paths, disable
``CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO``. Note that when they are enabled they are not
necessarily **used**; it depends on whether the hardware is available,
enabled by the BIOS, and detected by the driver.
So, to start with, disable ``CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO``, and load ``parport_pc``
with ``irq=none``. See if printing works then. It really should,
because this is the simplest code path.
If that works fine, try with ``io=0x378 irq=7`` (adjust for your
hardware), to make it use interrupt-driven in-software protocol.
If **that** works fine, then one of the hardware modes isn't working
right. Enable ``CONFIG_FIFO`` (no, it isn't a module option,
and yes, it should be), set the port to ECP mode in the BIOS and note
the DMA channel, and try with::
io=0x378 irq=7 dma=none (for PIO)
io=0x378 irq=7 dma=3 (for DMA)
----------
philb@gnu.org
tim@cyberelk.net

86
Documentation/ramoops.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/ramoops.rst
View File

@ -5,34 +5,37 @@ Sergiu Iordache <sergiu@chromium.org>
Updated: 17 November 2011
0. Introduction
Introduction
------------
Ramoops is an oops/panic logger that writes its logs to RAM before the system
crashes. It works by logging oopses and panics in a circular buffer. Ramoops
needs a system with persistent RAM so that the content of that area can
survive after a restart.
1. Ramoops concepts
Ramoops concepts
----------------
Ramoops uses a predefined memory area to store the dump. The start and size
and type of the memory area are set using three variables:
* "mem_address" for the start
* "mem_size" for the size. The memory size will be rounded down to a
power of two.
* "mem_type" to specifiy if the memory type (default is pgprot_writecombine).
Typically the default value of mem_type=0 should be used as that sets the pstore
mapping to pgprot_writecombine. Setting mem_type=1 attempts to use
pgprot_noncached, which only works on some platforms. This is because pstore
* ``mem_address`` for the start
* ``mem_size`` for the size. The memory size will be rounded down to a
power of two.
* ``mem_type`` to specifiy if the memory type (default is pgprot_writecombine).
Typically the default value of ``mem_type=0`` should be used as that sets the pstore
mapping to pgprot_writecombine. Setting ``mem_type=1`` attempts to use
``pgprot_noncached``, which only works on some platforms. This is because pstore
depends on atomic operations. At least on ARM, pgprot_noncached causes the
memory to be mapped strongly ordered, and atomic operations on strongly ordered
memory are implementation defined, and won't work on many ARMs such as omaps.
The memory area is divided into "record_size" chunks (also rounded down to
power of two) and each oops/panic writes a "record_size" chunk of
The memory area is divided into ``record_size`` chunks (also rounded down to
power of two) and each oops/panic writes a ``record_size`` chunk of
information.
Dumping both oopses and panics can be done by setting 1 in the "dump_oops"
Dumping both oopses and panics can be done by setting 1 in the ``dump_oops``
variable while setting 0 in that variable dumps only the panics.
The module uses a counter to record multiple dumps but the counter gets reset
@ -43,7 +46,8 @@ This might be useful when a hardware reset was used to bring the machine back
to life (i.e. a watchdog triggered). In such cases, RAM may be somewhat
corrupt, but usually it is restorable.
2. Setting the parameters
Setting the parameters
----------------------
Setting the ramoops parameters can be done in several different manners:
@ -52,12 +56,13 @@ Setting the ramoops parameters can be done in several different manners:
boot and then use the reserved memory for ramoops. For example, assuming a
machine with > 128 MB of memory, the following kernel command line will tell
the kernel to use only the first 128 MB of memory, and place ECC-protected
ramoops region at 128 MB boundary:
"mem=128M ramoops.mem_address=0x8000000 ramoops.ecc=1"
ramoops region at 128 MB boundary::
mem=128M ramoops.mem_address=0x8000000 ramoops.ecc=1
B. Use Device Tree bindings, as described in
Documentation/device-tree/bindings/reserved-memory/ramoops.txt.
For example:
``Documentation/device-tree/bindings/reserved-memory/admin-guide/ramoops.rst``.
For example::
reserved-memory {
#address-cells = <2>;
@ -75,58 +80,63 @@ Setting the ramoops parameters can be done in several different manners:
C. Use a platform device and set the platform data. The parameters can then
be set through that platform data. An example of doing that is:
#include <linux/pstore_ram.h>
[...]
.. code-block:: c
static struct ramoops_platform_data ramoops_data = {
#include <linux/pstore_ram.h>
[...]
static struct ramoops_platform_data ramoops_data = {
.mem_size = <...>,
.mem_address = <...>,
.mem_type = <...>,
.record_size = <...>,
.dump_oops = <...>,
.ecc = <...>,
};
};
static struct platform_device ramoops_dev = {
static struct platform_device ramoops_dev = {
.name = "ramoops",
.dev = {
.platform_data = &ramoops_data,
},
};
};
[... inside a function ...]
int ret;
[... inside a function ...]
int ret;
ret = platform_device_register(&ramoops_dev);
if (ret) {
ret = platform_device_register(&ramoops_dev);
if (ret) {
printk(KERN_ERR "unable to register platform device\n");
return ret;
}
}
You can specify either RAM memory or peripheral devices' memory. However, when
specifying RAM, be sure to reserve the memory by issuing memblock_reserve()
very early in the architecture code, e.g.:
very early in the architecture code, e.g.::
#include <linux/memblock.h>
#include <linux/memblock.h>
memblock_reserve(ramoops_data.mem_address, ramoops_data.mem_size);
memblock_reserve(ramoops_data.mem_address, ramoops_data.mem_size);
3. Dump format
Dump format
-----------
The data dump begins with a header, currently defined as "====" followed by a
The data dump begins with a header, currently defined as ``====`` followed by a
timestamp and a new line. The dump then continues with the actual data.
4. Reading the data
Reading the data
----------------
The dump data can be read from the pstore filesystem. The format for these
files is "dmesg-ramoops-N", where N is the record number in memory. To delete
files is ``dmesg-ramoops-N``, where N is the record number in memory. To delete
a stored record from RAM, simply unlink the respective pstore file.
5. Persistent function tracing
Persistent function tracing
---------------------------
Persistent function tracing might be useful for debugging software or hardware
related hangs. The functions call chain log is stored in a "ftrace-ramoops"
file. Here is an example of usage:
related hangs. The functions call chain log is stored in a ``ftrace-ramoops``
file. Here is an example of usage::
# mount -t debugfs debugfs /sys/kernel/debug/
# echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/pstore/record_ftrace

1190
Documentation/admin-guide/ras.rst Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

68
REPORTING-BUGS → Documentation/admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst
View File

@ -1,3 +1,8 @@
.. _reportingbugs:
Reporting bugs
++++++++++++++
Background
==========
@ -50,12 +55,13 @@ maintainer replies to you, make sure to 'Reply-all' in order to keep the
public mailing list(s) in the email thread.
If you know which driver is causing issues, you can pass one of the driver
files to the get_maintainer.pl script:
files to the get_maintainer.pl script::
perl scripts/get_maintainer.pl -f <filename>
If it is a security bug, please copy the Security Contact listed in the
MAINTAINERS file. They can help coordinate bugfix and disclosure. See
Documentation/SecurityBugs for more information.
:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst <securitybugs>` for more information.
If you can't figure out which subsystem caused the issue, you should file
a bug in kernel.org bugzilla and send email to
@ -69,8 +75,9 @@ Tips for reporting bugs
If you haven't reported a bug before, please read:
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/bugs.html
http://www.catb.org/esr/faqs/smart-questions.html
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/bugs.html
http://www.catb.org/esr/faqs/smart-questions.html
It's REALLY important to report bugs that seem unrelated as separate email
threads or separate bugzilla entries. If you report several unrelated
@ -87,7 +94,7 @@ step-by-step instructions for how a user can trigger the bug.
If the failure includes an "OOPS:", take a picture of the screen, capture
a netconsole trace, or type the message from your screen into the bug
report. Please read "Documentation/oops-tracing.txt" before posting your
report. Please read "Documentation/admin-guide/oops-tracing.rst" before posting your
bug report. This explains what you should do with the "Oops" information
to make it useful to the recipient.
@ -99,34 +106,34 @@ relevant to your bug, feel free to exclude it.
First run the ver_linux script included as scripts/ver_linux, which
reports the version of some important subsystems. Run this script with
the command "sh scripts/ver_linux".
the command ``awk -f scripts/ver_linux``.
Use that information to fill in all fields of the bug report form, and
post it to the mailing list with a subject of "PROBLEM: <one line
summary from [1.]>" for easy identification by the developers.
summary from [1.]>" for easy identification by the developers::
[1.] One line summary of the problem:
[2.] Full description of the problem/report:
[3.] Keywords (i.e., modules, networking, kernel):
[4.] Kernel information
[4.1.] Kernel version (from /proc/version):
[4.2.] Kernel .config file:
[5.] Most recent kernel version which did not have the bug:
[6.] Output of Oops.. message (if applicable) with symbolic information
resolved (see Documentation/oops-tracing.txt)
[7.] A small shell script or example program which triggers the
problem (if possible)
[8.] Environment
[8.1.] Software (add the output of the ver_linux script here)
[8.2.] Processor information (from /proc/cpuinfo):
[8.3.] Module information (from /proc/modules):
[8.4.] Loaded driver and hardware information (/proc/ioports, /proc/iomem)
[8.5.] PCI information ('lspci -vvv' as root)
[8.6.] SCSI information (from /proc/scsi/scsi)
[8.7.] Other information that might be relevant to the problem
(please look in /proc and include all information that you
think to be relevant):
[X.] Other notes, patches, fixes, workarounds:
[1.] One line summary of the problem:
[2.] Full description of the problem/report:
[3.] Keywords (i.e., modules, networking, kernel):
[4.] Kernel information
[4.1.] Kernel version (from /proc/version):
[4.2.] Kernel .config file:
[5.] Most recent kernel version which did not have the bug:
[6.] Output of Oops.. message (if applicable) with symbolic information
resolved (see Documentation/admin-guide/oops-tracing.rst)
[7.] A small shell script or example program which triggers the
problem (if possible)
[8.] Environment
[8.1.] Software (add the output of the ver_linux script here)
[8.2.] Processor information (from /proc/cpuinfo):
[8.3.] Module information (from /proc/modules):
[8.4.] Loaded driver and hardware information (/proc/ioports, /proc/iomem)
[8.5.] PCI information ('lspci -vvv' as root)
[8.6.] SCSI information (from /proc/scsi/scsi)
[8.7.] Other information that might be relevant to the problem
(please look in /proc and include all information that you
think to be relevant):
[X.] Other notes, patches, fixes, workarounds:
Follow up
@ -153,7 +160,8 @@ Expectations for kernel maintainers
Linux kernel maintainers are busy, overworked human beings. Some times
they may not be able to address your bug in a day, a week, or two weeks.
If they don't answer your email, they may be on vacation, or at a Linux
conference. Check the conference schedule at LWN.net for more info:
conference. Check the conference schedule at https://LWN.net for more info:
https://lwn.net/Calendar/
In general, kernel maintainers take 1 to 5 business days to respond to

14
Documentation/SecurityBugs → Documentation/admin-guide/security-bugs.rst
View File

@ -8,8 +8,8 @@ like to know when a security bug is found so that it can be fixed and
disclosed as quickly as possible. Please report security bugs to the
Linux kernel security team.
1) Contact
----------
Contact
-------
The Linux kernel security team can be contacted by email at
<security@kernel.org>. This is a private list of security officers
@ -19,12 +19,12 @@ area maintainers to understand and fix the security vulnerability.
As it is with any bug, the more information provided the easier it
will be to diagnose and fix. Please review the procedure outlined in
REPORTING-BUGS if you are unclear about what information is helpful.
admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst if you are unclear about what information is helpful.
Any exploit code is very helpful and will not be released without
consent from the reporter unless it has already been made public.
2) Disclosure
-------------
Disclosure
----------
The goal of the Linux kernel security team is to work with the
bug submitter to bug resolution as well as disclosure. We prefer
@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ disclosure is from immediate (esp. if it's already publicly known)
to a few weeks. As a basic default policy, we expect report date to
disclosure date to be on the order of 7 days.
3) Non-disclosure agreements
----------------------------
Non-disclosure agreements
-------------------------
The Linux kernel security team is not a formal body and therefore unable
to enter any non-disclosure agreements.

68
Documentation/serial-console.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/serial-console.rst
View File

@ -1,15 +1,21 @@
Linux Serial Console
.. _serial_console:
Linux Serial Console
====================
To use a serial port as console you need to compile the support into your
kernel - by default it is not compiled in. For PC style serial ports
it's the config option next to "Standard/generic (dumb) serial support".
it's the config option next to menu option:
:menuselection:`Character devices --> Serial drivers --> 8250/16550 and compatible serial support --> Console on 8250/16550 and compatible serial port`
You must compile serial support into the kernel and not as a module.
It is possible to specify multiple devices for console output. You can
define a new kernel command line option to select which device(s) to
use for console output.
The format of this option is:
The format of this option is::
console=device,options
@ -28,11 +34,11 @@ The format of this option is:
You can specify multiple console= options on the kernel command line.
Output will appear on all of them. The last device will be used when
you open /dev/console. So, for example:
you open ``/dev/console``. So, for example::
console=ttyS1,9600 console=tty0
defines that opening /dev/console will get you the current foreground
defines that opening ``/dev/console`` will get you the current foreground
virtual console, and kernel messages will appear on both the VGA
console and the 2nd serial port (ttyS1 or COM2) at 9600 baud.
@ -44,61 +50,61 @@ first looks for a VGA card and then for a serial port. So if you don't
have a VGA card in your system the first serial port will automatically
become the console.
You will need to create a new device to use /dev/console. The official
/dev/console is now character device 5,1.
You will need to create a new device to use ``/dev/console``. The official
``/dev/console`` is now character device 5,1.
(You can also use a network device as a console. See
Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt for information on that.)
``Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt`` for information on that.)
Here's an example that will use /dev/ttyS1 (COM2) as the console.
Here's an example that will use ``/dev/ttyS1`` (COM2) as the console.
Replace the sample values as needed.
1. Create /dev/console (real console) and /dev/tty0 (master virtual
console):
1. Create ``/dev/console`` (real console) and ``/dev/tty0`` (master virtual
console)::
cd /dev
rm -f console tty0
mknod -m 622 console c 5 1
mknod -m 622 tty0 c 4 0
cd /dev
rm -f console tty0
mknod -m 622 console c 5 1
mknod -m 622 tty0 c 4 0
2. LILO can also take input from a serial device. This is a very
useful option. To tell LILO to use the serial port:
In lilo.conf (global section):
In lilo.conf (global section)::
serial = 1,9600n8 (ttyS1, 9600 bd, no parity, 8 bits)
serial = 1,9600n8 (ttyS1, 9600 bd, no parity, 8 bits)
3. Adjust to kernel flags for the new kernel,
again in lilo.conf (kernel section)
again in lilo.conf (kernel section)::
append = "console=ttyS1,9600"
append = "console=ttyS1,9600"
4. Make sure a getty runs on the serial port so that you can login to
it once the system is done booting. This is done by adding a line
like this to /etc/inittab (exact syntax depends on your getty):
like this to ``/etc/inittab`` (exact syntax depends on your getty)::
S1:23:respawn:/sbin/getty -L ttyS1 9600 vt100
S1:23:respawn:/sbin/getty -L ttyS1 9600 vt100
5. Init and /etc/ioctl.save
5. Init and ``/etc/ioctl.save``
Sysvinit remembers its stty settings in a file in /etc, called
`/etc/ioctl.save'. REMOVE THIS FILE before using the serial
Sysvinit remembers its stty settings in a file in ``/etc``, called
``/etc/ioctl.save``. REMOVE THIS FILE before using the serial
console for the first time, because otherwise init will probably
set the baudrate to 38400 (baudrate of the virtual console).
6. /dev/console and X
6. ``/dev/console`` and X
Programs that want to do something with the virtual console usually
open /dev/console. If you have created the new /dev/console device,
open ``/dev/console``. If you have created the new ``/dev/console`` device,
and your console is NOT the virtual console some programs will fail.
Those are programs that want to access the VT interface, and use
/dev/console instead of /dev/tty0. Some of those programs are:
``/dev/console instead of /dev/tty0``. Some of those programs are::
Xfree86, svgalib, gpm, SVGATextMode
Xfree86, svgalib, gpm, SVGATextMode
It should be fixed in modern versions of these programs though.
Note that if you boot without a console= option (or with
console=/dev/tty0), /dev/console is the same as /dev/tty0. In that
case everything will still work.
Note that if you boot without a ``console=`` option (or with
``console=/dev/tty0``), ``/dev/console`` is the same as ``/dev/tty0``.
In that case everything will still work.
7. Thanks

192
Documentation/admin-guide/sysfs-rules.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
Rules on how to access information in sysfs
===========================================
The kernel-exported sysfs exports internal kernel implementation details
and depends on internal kernel structures and layout. It is agreed upon
by the kernel developers that the Linux kernel does not provide a stable
internal API. Therefore, there are aspects of the sysfs interface that
may not be stable across kernel releases.
To minimize the risk of breaking users of sysfs, which are in most cases
low-level userspace applications, with a new kernel release, the users
of sysfs must follow some rules to use an as-abstract-as-possible way to
access this filesystem. The current udev and HAL programs already
implement this and users are encouraged to plug, if possible, into the
abstractions these programs provide instead of accessing sysfs directly.
But if you really do want or need to access sysfs directly, please follow
the following rules and then your programs should work with future
versions of the sysfs interface.
- Do not use libsysfs
It makes assumptions about sysfs which are not true. Its API does not
offer any abstraction, it exposes all the kernel driver-core
implementation details in its own API. Therefore it is not better than
reading directories and opening the files yourself.
Also, it is not actively maintained, in the sense of reflecting the
current kernel development. The goal of providing a stable interface
to sysfs has failed; it causes more problems than it solves. It
violates many of the rules in this document.
- sysfs is always at ``/sys``
Parsing ``/proc/mounts`` is a waste of time. Other mount points are a
system configuration bug you should not try to solve. For test cases,
possibly support a ``SYSFS_PATH`` environment variable to overwrite the
application's behavior, but never try to search for sysfs. Never try
to mount it, if you are not an early boot script.
- devices are only "devices"
There is no such thing like class-, bus-, physical devices,
interfaces, and such that you can rely on in userspace. Everything is
just simply a "device". Class-, bus-, physical, ... types are just
kernel implementation details which should not be expected by
applications that look for devices in sysfs.
The properties of a device are:
- devpath (``/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.1/usb2/2-2/2-2:1.0``)
- identical to the DEVPATH value in the event sent from the kernel
at device creation and removal
- the unique key to the device at that point in time
- the kernel's path to the device directory without the leading
``/sys``, and always starting with a slash
- all elements of a devpath must be real directories. Symlinks
pointing to /sys/devices must always be resolved to their real
target and the target path must be used to access the device.
That way the devpath to the device matches the devpath of the
kernel used at event time.
- using or exposing symlink values as elements in a devpath string
is a bug in the application
- kernel name (``sda``, ``tty``, ``0000:00:1f.2``, ...)
- a directory name, identical to the last element of the devpath
- applications need to handle spaces and characters like ``!`` in
the name
- subsystem (``block``, ``tty``, ``pci``, ...)
- simple string, never a path or a link
- retrieved by reading the "subsystem"-link and using only the
last element of the target path
- driver (``tg3``, ``ata_piix``, ``uhci_hcd``)
- a simple string, which may contain spaces, never a path or a
link
- it is retrieved by reading the "driver"-link and using only the
last element of the target path
- devices which do not have "driver"-link just do not have a
driver; copying the driver value in a child device context is a
bug in the application
- attributes
- the files in the device directory or files below subdirectories
of the same device directory
- accessing attributes reached by a symlink pointing to another device,
like the "device"-link, is a bug in the application
Everything else is just a kernel driver-core implementation detail
that should not be assumed to be stable across kernel releases.
- Properties of parent devices never belong into a child device.
Always look at the parent devices themselves for determining device
context properties. If the device ``eth0`` or ``sda`` does not have a
"driver"-link, then this device does not have a driver. Its value is empty.
Never copy any property of the parent-device into a child-device. Parent
device properties may change dynamically without any notice to the
child device.
- Hierarchy in a single device tree
There is only one valid place in sysfs where hierarchy can be examined
and this is below: ``/sys/devices.``
It is planned that all device directories will end up in the tree
below this directory.
- Classification by subsystem
There are currently three places for classification of devices:
``/sys/block,`` ``/sys/class`` and ``/sys/bus.`` It is planned that these will
not contain any device directories themselves, but only flat lists of
symlinks pointing to the unified ``/sys/devices`` tree.
All three places have completely different rules on how to access
device information. It is planned to merge all three
classification directories into one place at ``/sys/subsystem``,
following the layout of the bus directories. All buses and
classes, including the converted block subsystem, will show up
there.
The devices belonging to a subsystem will create a symlink in the
"devices" directory at ``/sys/subsystem/<name>/devices``,
If ``/sys/subsystem`` exists, ``/sys/bus``, ``/sys/class`` and ``/sys/block``
can be ignored. If it does not exist, you always have to scan all three
places, as the kernel is free to move a subsystem from one place to
the other, as long as the devices are still reachable by the same
subsystem name.
Assuming ``/sys/class/<subsystem>`` and ``/sys/bus/<subsystem>``, or
``/sys/block`` and ``/sys/class/block`` are not interchangeable is a bug in
the application.
- Block
The converted block subsystem at ``/sys/class/block`` or
``/sys/subsystem/block`` will contain the links for disks and partitions
at the same level, never in a hierarchy. Assuming the block subsystem to
contain only disks and not partition devices in the same flat list is
a bug in the application.
- "device"-link and <subsystem>:<kernel name>-links
Never depend on the "device"-link. The "device"-link is a workaround
for the old layout, where class devices are not created in
``/sys/devices/`` like the bus devices. If the link-resolving of a
device directory does not end in ``/sys/devices/``, you can use the
"device"-link to find the parent devices in ``/sys/devices/``, That is the
single valid use of the "device"-link; it must never appear in any
path as an element. Assuming the existence of the "device"-link for
a device in ``/sys/devices/`` is a bug in the application.
Accessing ``/sys/class/net/eth0/device`` is a bug in the application.
Never depend on the class-specific links back to the ``/sys/class``
directory. These links are also a workaround for the design mistake
that class devices are not created in ``/sys/devices.`` If a device
directory does not contain directories for child devices, these links
may be used to find the child devices in ``/sys/class.`` That is the single
valid use of these links; they must never appear in any path as an
element. Assuming the existence of these links for devices which are
real child device directories in the ``/sys/devices`` tree is a bug in
the application.
It is planned to remove all these links when all class device
directories live in ``/sys/devices.``
- Position of devices along device chain can change.
Never depend on a specific parent device position in the devpath,
or the chain of parent devices. The kernel is free to insert devices into
the chain. You must always request the parent device you are looking for
by its subsystem value. You need to walk up the chain until you find
the device that matches the expected subsystem. Depending on a specific
position of a parent device or exposing relative paths using ``../`` to
access the chain of parents is a bug in the application.
- When reading and writing sysfs device attribute files, avoid dependency
on specific error codes wherever possible. This minimizes coupling to
the error handling implementation within the kernel.
In general, failures to read or write sysfs device attributes shall
propagate errors wherever possible. Common errors include, but are not
limited to:
``-EIO``: The read or store operation is not supported, typically
returned by the sysfs system itself if the read or store pointer
is ``NULL``.
``-ENXIO``: The read or store operation failed
Error codes will not be changed without good reason, and should a change
to error codes result in user-space breakage, it will be fixed, or the
the offending change will be reverted.
Userspace applications can, however, expect the format and contents of
the attribute files to remain consistent in the absence of a version
attribute change in the context of a given attribute.

289
Documentation/admin-guide/sysrq.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
Linux Magic System Request Key Hacks
====================================
Documentation for sysrq.c
What is the magic SysRq key?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It is a 'magical' key combo you can hit which the kernel will respond to
regardless of whatever else it is doing, unless it is completely locked up.
How do I enable the magic SysRq key?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
You need to say "yes" to 'Magic SysRq key (CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ)' when
configuring the kernel. When running a kernel with SysRq compiled in,
/proc/sys/kernel/sysrq controls the functions allowed to be invoked via
the SysRq key. The default value in this file is set by the
CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ_DEFAULT_ENABLE config symbol, which itself defaults
to 1. Here is the list of possible values in /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq:
- 0 - disable sysrq completely
- 1 - enable all functions of sysrq
- >1 - bitmask of allowed sysrq functions (see below for detailed function
description)::
2 = 0x2 - enable control of console logging level
4 = 0x4 - enable control of keyboard (SAK, unraw)
8 = 0x8 - enable debugging dumps of processes etc.
16 = 0x10 - enable sync command
32 = 0x20 - enable remount read-only
64 = 0x40 - enable signalling of processes (term, kill, oom-kill)
128 = 0x80 - allow reboot/poweroff
256 = 0x100 - allow nicing of all RT tasks
You can set the value in the file by the following command::
echo "number" >/proc/sys/kernel/sysrq
The number may be written here either as decimal or as hexadecimal
with the 0x prefix. CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ_DEFAULT_ENABLE must always be
written in hexadecimal.
Note that the value of ``/proc/sys/kernel/sysrq`` influences only the invocation
via a keyboard. Invocation of any operation via ``/proc/sysrq-trigger`` is
always allowed (by a user with admin privileges).
How do I use the magic SysRq key?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
On x86 - You press the key combo :kbd:`ALT-SysRq-<command key>`.
.. note::
Some
keyboards may not have a key labeled 'SysRq'. The 'SysRq' key is
also known as the 'Print Screen' key. Also some keyboards cannot
handle so many keys being pressed at the same time, so you might
have better luck with press :kbd:`Alt`, press :kbd:`SysRq`,
release :kbd:`SysRq`, press :kbd:`<command key>`, release everything.
On SPARC - You press :kbd:`ALT-STOP-<command key>`, I believe.
On the serial console (PC style standard serial ports only)
You send a ``BREAK``, then within 5 seconds a command key. Sending
``BREAK`` twice is interpreted as a normal BREAK.
On PowerPC
Press :kbd:`ALT - Print Screen` (or :kbd:`F13`) - :kbd:`<command key>`,
:kbd:`Print Screen` (or :kbd:`F13`) - :kbd:`<command key>` may suffice.
On other
If you know of the key combos for other architectures, please
let me know so I can add them to this section.
On all
write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger. e.g.::
echo t > /proc/sysrq-trigger
What are the 'command' keys?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
=========== ===================================================================
Command Function
=========== ===================================================================
``b`` Will immediately reboot the system without syncing or unmounting
your disks.
``c`` Will perform a system crash by a NULL pointer dereference.
A crashdump will be taken if configured.
``d`` Shows all locks that are held.
``e`` Send a SIGTERM to all processes, except for init.
``f`` Will call the oom killer to kill a memory hog process, but do not
panic if nothing can be killed.
``g`` Used by kgdb (kernel debugger)
``h`` Will display help (actually any other key than those listed
here will display help. but ``h`` is easy to remember :-)
``i`` Send a SIGKILL to all processes, except for init.
``j`` Forcibly "Just thaw it" - filesystems frozen by the FIFREEZE ioctl.
``k`` Secure Access Key (SAK) Kills all programs on the current virtual
console. NOTE: See important comments below in SAK section.
``l`` Shows a stack backtrace for all active CPUs.
``m`` Will dump current memory info to your console.
``n`` Used to make RT tasks nice-able
``o`` Will shut your system off (if configured and supported).
``p`` Will dump the current registers and flags to your console.
``q`` Will dump per CPU lists of all armed hrtimers (but NOT regular
timer_list timers) and detailed information about all
clockevent devices.
``r`` Turns off keyboard raw mode and sets it to XLATE.
``s`` Will attempt to sync all mounted filesystems.
``t`` Will dump a list of current tasks and their information to your
console.
``u`` Will attempt to remount all mounted filesystems read-only.
``v`` Forcefully restores framebuffer console
``v`` Causes ETM buffer dump [ARM-specific]
``w`` Dumps tasks that are in uninterruptable (blocked) state.
``x`` Used by xmon interface on ppc/powerpc platforms.
Show global PMU Registers on sparc64.
Dump all TLB entries on MIPS.
``y`` Show global CPU Registers [SPARC-64 specific]
``z`` Dump the ftrace buffer
``0``-``9`` Sets the console log level, controlling which kernel messages
will be printed to your console. (``0``, for example would make
it so that only emergency messages like PANICs or OOPSes would
make it to your console.)
=========== ===================================================================
Okay, so what can I use them for?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Well, unraw(r) is very handy when your X server or a svgalib program crashes.
sak(k) (Secure Access Key) is useful when you want to be sure there is no
trojan program running at console which could grab your password
when you would try to login. It will kill all programs on given console,
thus letting you make sure that the login prompt you see is actually
the one from init, not some trojan program.
.. important::
In its true form it is not a true SAK like the one in a
c2 compliant system, and it should not be mistaken as
such.
It seems others find it useful as (System Attention Key) which is
useful when you want to exit a program that will not let you switch consoles.
(For example, X or a svgalib program.)
``reboot(b)`` is good when you're unable to shut down. But you should also
``sync(s)`` and ``umount(u)`` first.
``crash(c)`` can be used to manually trigger a crashdump when the system is hung.
Note that this just triggers a crash if there is no dump mechanism available.
``sync(s)`` is great when your system is locked up, it allows you to sync your
disks and will certainly lessen the chance of data loss and fscking. Note
that the sync hasn't taken place until you see the "OK" and "Done" appear
on the screen. (If the kernel is really in strife, you may not ever get the
OK or Done message...)
``umount(u)`` is basically useful in the same ways as ``sync(s)``. I generally
``sync(s)``, ``umount(u)``, then ``reboot(b)`` when my system locks. It's saved
me many a fsck. Again, the unmount (remount read-only) hasn't taken place until
you see the "OK" and "Done" message appear on the screen.
The loglevels ``0``-``9`` are useful when your console is being flooded with
kernel messages you do not want to see. Selecting ``0`` will prevent all but
the most urgent kernel messages from reaching your console. (They will
still be logged if syslogd/klogd are alive, though.)
``term(e)`` and ``kill(i)`` are useful if you have some sort of runaway process
you are unable to kill any other way, especially if it's spawning other
processes.
"just thaw ``it(j)``" is useful if your system becomes unresponsive due to a
frozen (probably root) filesystem via the FIFREEZE ioctl.
Sometimes SysRq seems to get 'stuck' after using it, what can I do?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
That happens to me, also. I've found that tapping shift, alt, and control
on both sides of the keyboard, and hitting an invalid sysrq sequence again
will fix the problem. (i.e., something like :kbd:`alt-sysrq-z`). Switching to
another virtual console (:kbd:`ALT+Fn`) and then back again should also help.
I hit SysRq, but nothing seems to happen, what's wrong?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are some keyboards that produce a different keycode for SysRq than the
pre-defined value of 99 (see ``KEY_SYSRQ`` in ``include/linux/input.h``), or
which don't have a SysRq key at all. In these cases, run ``showkey -s`` to find
an appropriate scancode sequence, and use ``setkeycodes <sequence> 99`` to map
this sequence to the usual SysRq code (e.g., ``setkeycodes e05b 99``). It's
probably best to put this command in a boot script. Oh, and by the way, you
exit ``showkey`` by not typing anything for ten seconds.
I want to add SysRQ key events to a module, how does it work?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
In order to register a basic function with the table, you must first include
the header ``include/linux/sysrq.h``, this will define everything else you need.
Next, you must create a ``sysrq_key_op`` struct, and populate it with A) the key
handler function you will use, B) a help_msg string, that will print when SysRQ
prints help, and C) an action_msg string, that will print right before your
handler is called. Your handler must conform to the prototype in 'sysrq.h'.
After the ``sysrq_key_op`` is created, you can call the kernel function
``register_sysrq_key(int key, struct sysrq_key_op *op_p);`` this will
register the operation pointed to by ``op_p`` at table key 'key',
if that slot in the table is blank. At module unload time, you must call
the function ``unregister_sysrq_key(int key, struct sysrq_key_op *op_p)``, which
will remove the key op pointed to by 'op_p' from the key 'key', if and only if
it is currently registered in that slot. This is in case the slot has been
overwritten since you registered it.
The Magic SysRQ system works by registering key operations against a key op
lookup table, which is defined in 'drivers/tty/sysrq.c'. This key table has
a number of operations registered into it at compile time, but is mutable,
and 2 functions are exported for interface to it::
register_sysrq_key and unregister_sysrq_key.
Of course, never ever leave an invalid pointer in the table. I.e., when
your module that called register_sysrq_key() exits, it must call
unregister_sysrq_key() to clean up the sysrq key table entry that it used.
Null pointers in the table are always safe. :)
If for some reason you feel the need to call the handle_sysrq function from
within a function called by handle_sysrq, you must be aware that you are in
a lock (you are also in an interrupt handler, which means don't sleep!), so
you must call ``__handle_sysrq_nolock`` instead.
When I hit a SysRq key combination only the header appears on the console?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sysrq output is subject to the same console loglevel control as all
other console output. This means that if the kernel was booted 'quiet'
as is common on distro kernels the output may not appear on the actual
console, even though it will appear in the dmesg buffer, and be accessible
via the dmesg command and to the consumers of ``/proc/kmsg``. As a specific
exception the header line from the sysrq command is passed to all console
consumers as if the current loglevel was maximum. If only the header
is emitted it is almost certain that the kernel loglevel is too low.
Should you require the output on the console channel then you will need
to temporarily up the console loglevel using :kbd:`alt-sysrq-8` or::
echo 8 > /proc/sysrq-trigger
Remember to return the loglevel to normal after triggering the sysrq
command you are interested in.
I have more questions, who can I ask?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Just ask them on the linux-kernel mailing list:
linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
Credits
~~~~~~~
Written by Mydraal <vulpyne@vulpyne.net>
Updated by Adam Sulmicki <adam@cfar.umd.edu>
Updated by Jeremy M. Dolan <jmd@turbogeek.org> 2001/01/28 10:15:59
Added to by Crutcher Dunnavant <crutcher+kernel@datastacks.com>

59
Documentation/admin-guide/tainted-kernels.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
Tainted kernels
---------------
Some oops reports contain the string **'Tainted: '** after the program
counter. This indicates that the kernel has been tainted by some
mechanism. The string is followed by a series of position-sensitive
characters, each representing a particular tainted value.
1) 'G' if all modules loaded have a GPL or compatible license, 'P' if
any proprietary module has been loaded. Modules without a
MODULE_LICENSE or with a MODULE_LICENSE that is not recognised by
insmod as GPL compatible are assumed to be proprietary.
2) ``F`` if any module was force loaded by ``insmod -f``, ``' '`` if all
modules were loaded normally.
3) ``S`` if the oops occurred on an SMP kernel running on hardware that
hasn't been certified as safe to run multiprocessor.
Currently this occurs only on various Athlons that are not
SMP capable.
4) ``R`` if a module was force unloaded by ``rmmod -f``, ``' '`` if all
modules were unloaded normally.
5) ``M`` if any processor has reported a Machine Check Exception,
``' '`` if no Machine Check Exceptions have occurred.
6) ``B`` if a page-release function has found a bad page reference or
some unexpected page flags.
7) ``U`` if a user or user application specifically requested that the
Tainted flag be set, ``' '`` otherwise.
8) ``D`` if the kernel has died recently, i.e. there was an OOPS or BUG.
9) ``A`` if the ACPI table has been overridden.
10) ``W`` if a warning has previously been issued by the kernel.
(Though some warnings may set more specific taint flags.)
11) ``C`` if a staging driver has been loaded.
12) ``I`` if the kernel is working around a severe bug in the platform
firmware (BIOS or similar).
13) ``O`` if an externally-built ("out-of-tree") module has been loaded.
14) ``E`` if an unsigned module has been loaded in a kernel supporting
module signature.
15) ``L`` if a soft lockup has previously occurred on the system.
16) ``K`` if the kernel has been live patched.
The primary reason for the **'Tainted: '** string is to tell kernel
debuggers if this is a clean kernel or if anything unusual has
occurred. Tainting is permanent: even if an offending module is
unloaded, the tainted value remains to indicate that the kernel is not
trustworthy.

24
Documentation/unicode.txt → Documentation/admin-guide/unicode.rst
View File

@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
Unicode support
===============
Last update: 2005-01-17, version 1.4
This file is maintained by H. Peter Anvin <unicode@lanana.org> as part
of the Linux Assigned Names And Numbers Authority (LANANA) project.
The current version can be found at:
http://www.lanana.org/docs/unicode/unicode.txt
http://www.lanana.org/docs/unicode/admin-guide/unicode.rst
------------------------
Introduction
------------
The Linux kernel code has been rewritten to use Unicode to map
characters to fonts. By downloading a single Unicode-to-font table,
@ -16,12 +20,14 @@ the font as indicated.
This changes the semantics of the eight-bit character tables subtly.
The four character tables are now:
=============== =============================== ================
Map symbol Map name Escape code (G0)
=============== =============================== ================
LAT1_MAP Latin-1 (ISO 8859-1) ESC ( B
GRAF_MAP DEC VT100 pseudographics ESC ( 0
IBMPC_MAP IBM code page 437 ESC ( U
USER_MAP User defined ESC ( K
=============== =============================== ================
In particular, ESC ( U is no longer "straight to font", since the font
might be completely different than the IBM character set. This
@ -55,10 +61,12 @@ In addition, the following characters not present in Unicode 1.1.4
have been defined; these are used by the DEC VT graphics map. [v1.2]
THIS USE IS OBSOLETE AND SHOULD NO LONGER BE USED; PLEASE SEE BELOW.
====== ======================================
U+F800 DEC VT GRAPHICS HORIZONTAL LINE SCAN 1
U+F801 DEC VT GRAPHICS HORIZONTAL LINE SCAN 3
U+F803 DEC VT GRAPHICS HORIZONTAL LINE SCAN 7
U+F804 DEC VT GRAPHICS HORIZONTAL LINE SCAN 9
====== ======================================
The DEC VT220 uses a 6x10 character matrix, and these characters form
a smooth progression in the DEC VT graphics character set. I have
@ -74,10 +82,12 @@ keyboard symbols that are unlikely to ever be added to Unicode proper
since they are horribly vendor-specific. This, of course, is an
excellent example of horrible design.
====== ======================================
U+F810 KEYBOARD SYMBOL FLYING FLAG
U+F811 KEYBOARD SYMBOL PULLDOWN MENU
U+F812 KEYBOARD SYMBOL OPEN APPLE
U+F813 KEYBOARD SYMBOL SOLID APPLE
====== ======================================
Klingon language support
------------------------
@ -99,8 +109,10 @@ of the dingbats/symbols/forms type and this is a language, I have
located it at the end, on a 16-cell boundary in keeping with standard
Unicode practice.
NOTE: This range is now officially managed by the ConScript Unicode
Registry. The normative reference is at:
.. note::
This range is now officially managed by the ConScript Unicode
Registry. The normative reference is at:
http://www.evertype.com/standards/csur/klingon.html
@ -112,6 +124,7 @@ However, since the set of symbols appear to be consistent throughout,
with only the actual shapes being different, in keeping with standard
Unicode practice these differences are considered font variants.
====== =======================================================
U+F8D0 KLINGON LETTER A
U+F8D1 KLINGON LETTER B
U+F8D2 KLINGON LETTER CH
@ -155,6 +168,7 @@ U+F8F9 KLINGON DIGIT NINE
U+F8FD KLINGON COMMA
U+F8FE KLINGON FULL STOP
U+F8FF KLINGON SYMBOL FOR EMPIRE
====== =======================================================
Other Fictional and Artificial Scripts
--------------------------------------

62
Documentation/admin-guide/vga-softcursor.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
Software cursor for VGA
=======================
by Pavel Machek <pavel@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz>
and Martin Mares <mj@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz>
Linux now has some ability to manipulate cursor appearance. Normally,
you can set the size of hardware cursor. You can now play a few new
tricks: you can make your cursor look like a non-blinking red block,
make it inverse background of the character it's over or to highlight
that character and still choose whether the original hardware cursor
should remain visible or not. There may be other things I have never
thought of.
The cursor appearance is controlled by a ``<ESC>[?1;2;3c`` escape sequence
where 1, 2 and 3 are parameters described below. If you omit any of them,
they will default to zeroes.
first Parameter
specifies cursor size::
0=default
1=invisible
2=underline,
...
8=full block
+ 16 if you want the software cursor to be applied
+ 32 if you want to always change the background color
+ 64 if you dislike having the background the same as the
foreground.
Highlights are ignored for the last two flags.
second parameter
selects character attribute bits you want to change
(by simply XORing them with the value of this parameter). On standard
VGA, the high four bits specify background and the low four the
foreground. In both groups, low three bits set color (as in normal
color codes used by the console) and the most significant one turns
on highlight (or sometimes blinking -- it depends on the configuration
of your VGA).
third parameter
consists of character attribute bits you want to set.
Bit setting takes place before bit toggling, so you can simply clear a
bit by including it in both the set mask and the toggle mask.
Examples
--------
To get normal blinking underline, use::
echo -e '\033[?2c'
To get blinking block, use::
echo -e '\033[?6c'
To get red non-blinking block, use::
echo -e '\033[?17;0;64c'

2
Documentation/arm/Booting
View File

@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ As an alternative, the boot loader can pass the relevant 'console='
option to the kernel via the tagged lists specifying the port, and
serial format options as described in
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt.
Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst.
3. Detect the machine type

3
Documentation/arm/stm32/overview.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ Introduction
------------
The STMicroelectronics family of Cortex-M based MCUs are supported by the
'STM32' platform of ARM Linux. Currently only the STM32F429 is supported.
'STM32' platform of ARM Linux. Currently only the STM32F429 (Cortex-M4)
and STM32F746 (Cortex-M7) are supported.
Configuration

34
Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
STM32F746 Overview
==================
Introduction
------------
The STM32F746 is a Cortex-M7 MCU aimed at various applications.
It features:
- Cortex-M7 core running up to @216MHz
- 1MB internal flash, 320KBytes internal RAM (+4KB of backup SRAM)
- FMC controller to connect SDRAM, NOR and NAND memories
- Dual mode QSPI
- SD/MMC/SDIO support
- Ethernet controller
- USB OTFG FS & HS controllers
- I2C, SPI, CAN busses support
- Several 16 & 32 bits general purpose timers
- Serial Audio interface
- LCD controller
- HDMI-CEC
- SPDIFRX
Resources
---------
Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website:
- http://www.st.com/content/st_com/en/products/microcontrollers/stm32-32-bit-arm-cortex-mcus/stm32f7-series/stm32f7x6/stm32f746ng.html
Document Author
---------------
Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>

574
Documentation/assoc_array.txt
View File

@ -1,574 +0,0 @@
========================================
GENERIC ASSOCIATIVE ARRAY IMPLEMENTATION
========================================
Contents:
- Overview.
- The public API.
- Edit script.
- Operations table.
- Manipulation functions.
- Access functions.
- Index key form.
- Internal workings.
- Basic internal tree layout.
- Shortcuts.
- Splitting and collapsing nodes.
- Non-recursive iteration.
- Simultaneous alteration and iteration.
========
OVERVIEW
========
This associative array implementation is an object container with the following
properties:
(1) Objects are opaque pointers. The implementation does not care where they
point (if anywhere) or what they point to (if anything).
[!] NOTE: Pointers to objects _must_ be zero in the least significant bit.
(2) Objects do not need to contain linkage blocks for use by the array. This
permits an object to be located in multiple arrays simultaneously.
Rather, the array is made up of metadata blocks that point to objects.
(3) Objects require index keys to locate them within the array.
(4) Index keys must be unique. Inserting an object with the same key as one
already in the array will replace the old object.
(5) Index keys can be of any length and can be of different lengths.
(6) Index keys should encode the length early on, before any variation due to
length is seen.
(7) Index keys can include a hash to scatter objects throughout the array.
(8) The array can iterated over. The objects will not necessarily come out in
key order.
(9) The array can be iterated over whilst it is being modified, provided the
RCU readlock is being held by the iterator. Note, however, under these
circumstances, some objects may be seen more than once. If this is a
problem, the iterator should lock against modification. Objects will not
be missed, however, unless deleted.
(10) Objects in the array can be looked up by means of their index key.
(11) Objects can be looked up whilst the array is being modified, provided the
RCU readlock is being held by the thread doing the look up.
The implementation uses a tree of 16-pointer nodes internally that are indexed
on each level by nibbles from the index key in the same manner as in a radix
tree. To improve memory efficiency, shortcuts can be emplaced to skip over
what would otherwise be a series of single-occupancy nodes. Further, nodes
pack leaf object pointers into spare space in the node rather than making an
extra branch until as such time an object needs to be added to a full node.
==============
THE PUBLIC API
==============
The public API can be found in <linux/assoc_array.h>. The associative array is
rooted on the following structure:
struct assoc_array {
...
};
The code is selected by enabling CONFIG_ASSOCIATIVE_ARRAY.
EDIT SCRIPT
-----------
The insertion and deletion functions produce an 'edit script' that can later be
applied to effect the changes without risking ENOMEM. This retains the
preallocated metadata blocks that will be installed in the internal tree and
keeps track of the metadata blocks that will be removed from the tree when the
script is applied.
This is also used to keep track of dead blocks and dead objects after the
script has been applied so that they can be freed later. The freeing is done
after an RCU grace period has passed - thus allowing access functions to
proceed under the RCU read lock.
The script appears as outside of the API as a pointer of the type:
struct assoc_array_edit;
There are two functions for dealing with the script:
(1) Apply an edit script.
void assoc_array_apply_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit);
This will perform the edit functions, interpolating various write barriers
to permit accesses under the RCU read lock to continue. The edit script
will then be passed to call_rcu() to free it and any dead stuff it points
to.
(2) Cancel an edit script.
void assoc_array_cancel_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit);
This frees the edit script and all preallocated memory immediately. If
this was for insertion, the new object is _not_ released by this function,
but must rather be released by the caller.
These functions are guaranteed not to fail.
OPERATIONS TABLE
----------------
Various functions take a table of operations:
struct assoc_array_ops {
...
};
This points to a number of methods, all of which need to be provided:
(1) Get a chunk of index key from caller data:
unsigned long (*get_key_chunk)(const void *index_key, int level);
This should return a chunk of caller-supplied index key starting at the
*bit* position given by the level argument. The level argument will be a
multiple of ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE and the function should return
ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE bits. No error is possible.
(2) Get a chunk of an object's index key.
unsigned long (*get_object_key_chunk)(const void *object, int level);
As the previous function, but gets its data from an object in the array
rather than from a caller-supplied index key.
(3) See if this is the object we're looking for.
bool (*compare_object)(const void *object, const void *index_key);
Compare the object against an index key and return true if it matches and
false if it doesn't.
(4) Diff the index keys of two objects.
int (*diff_objects)(const void *object, const void *index_key);
Return the bit position at which the index key of the specified object
differs from the given index key or -1 if they are the same.
(5) Free an object.
void (*free_object)(void *object);
Free the specified object. Note that this may be called an RCU grace
period after assoc_array_apply_edit() was called, so synchronize_rcu() may
be necessary on module unloading.
MANIPULATION FUNCTIONS
----------------------
There are a number of functions for manipulating an associative array:
(1) Initialise an associative array.
void assoc_array_init(struct assoc_array *array);
This initialises the base structure for an associative array. It can't
fail.
(2) Insert/replace an object in an associative array.
struct assoc_array_edit *
assoc_array_insert(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
const void *index_key,
void *object);
This inserts the given object into the array. Note that the least
significant bit of the pointer must be zero as it's used to type-mark
pointers internally.
If an object already exists for that key then it will be replaced with the
new object and the old one will be freed automatically.
The index_key argument should hold index key information and is
passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called.
This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns
an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of
an out-of-memory error.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
(3) Delete an object from an associative array.
struct assoc_array_edit *
assoc_array_delete(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
const void *index_key);
This deletes an object that matches the specified data from the array.
The index_key argument should hold index key information and is
passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called.
This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns
an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of
an out-of-memory error. NULL will be returned if the specified object is
not found within the array.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
(4) Delete all objects from an associative array.
struct assoc_array_edit *
assoc_array_clear(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops);
This deletes all the objects from an associative array and leaves it
completely empty.
This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns
an edit script that must be applied. -ENOMEM is returned in the case of
an out-of-memory error.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
(5) Destroy an associative array, deleting all objects.
void assoc_array_destroy(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops);
This destroys the contents of the associative array and leaves it
completely empty. It is not permitted for another thread to be traversing
the array under the RCU read lock at the same time as this function is
destroying it as no RCU deferral is performed on memory release -
something that would require memory to be allocated.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers and accessors
of the array.
(6) Garbage collect an associative array.
int assoc_array_gc(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
bool (*iterator)(void *object, void *iterator_data),
void *iterator_data);
This iterates over the objects in an associative array and passes each one
to iterator(). If iterator() returns true, the object is kept. If it
returns false, the object will be freed. If the iterator() function
returns true, it must perform any appropriate refcount incrementing on the
object before returning.
The internal tree will be packed down if possible as part of the iteration
to reduce the number of nodes in it.
The iterator_data is passed directly to iterator() and is otherwise
ignored by the function.
The function will return 0 if successful and -ENOMEM if there wasn't
enough memory.
It is possible for other threads to iterate over or search the array under
the RCU read lock whilst this function is in progress. The caller should
lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
ACCESS FUNCTIONS
----------------
There are two functions for accessing an associative array:
(1) Iterate over all the objects in an associative array.
int assoc_array_iterate(const struct assoc_array *array,
int (*iterator)(const void *object,
void *iterator_data),
void *iterator_data);
This passes each object in the array to the iterator callback function.
iterator_data is private data for that function.
This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being
modified, provided the RCU read lock is held. Under such circumstances,
it is possible for the iteration function to see some objects twice. If
this is a problem, then modification should be locked against. The
iteration algorithm should not, however, miss any objects.
The function will return 0 if no objects were in the array or else it will
return the result of the last iterator function called. Iteration stops
immediately if any call to the iteration function results in a non-zero
return.
(2) Find an object in an associative array.
void *assoc_array_find(const struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
const void *index_key);
This walks through the array's internal tree directly to the object
specified by the index key..
This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being
modified, provided the RCU read lock is held.
The function will return the object if found (and set *_type to the object
type) or will return NULL if the object was not found.
INDEX KEY FORM
--------------
The index key can be of any form, but since the algorithms aren't told how long
the key is, it is strongly recommended that the index key includes its length
very early on before any variation due to the length would have an effect on
comparisons.
This will cause leaves with different length keys to scatter away from each
other - and those with the same length keys to cluster together.
It is also recommended that the index key begin with a hash of the rest of the
key to maximise scattering throughout keyspace.
The better the scattering, the wider and lower the internal tree will be.
Poor scattering isn't too much of a problem as there are shortcuts and nodes
can contain mixtures of leaves and metadata pointers.
The index key is read in chunks of machine word. Each chunk is subdivided into
one nibble (4 bits) per level, so on a 32-bit CPU this is good for 8 levels and
on a 64-bit CPU, 16 levels. Unless the scattering is really poor, it is
unlikely that more than one word of any particular index key will have to be
used.
=================
INTERNAL WORKINGS
=================
The associative array data structure has an internal tree. This tree is
constructed of two types of metadata blocks: nodes and shortcuts.
A node is an array of slots. Each slot can contain one of four things:
(*) A NULL pointer, indicating that the slot is empty.
(*) A pointer to an object (a leaf).
(*) A pointer to a node at the next level.
(*) A pointer to a shortcut.
BASIC INTERNAL TREE LAYOUT
--------------------------
Ignoring shortcuts for the moment, the nodes form a multilevel tree. The index
key space is strictly subdivided by the nodes in the tree and nodes occur on
fixed levels. For example:
Level: 0 1 2 3
=============== =============== =============== ===============
NODE D
NODE B NODE C +------>+---+
+------>+---+ +------>+---+ | | 0 |
NODE A | | 0 | | | 0 | | +---+
+---+ | +---+ | +---+ | : :
| 0 | | : : | : : | +---+
+---+ | +---+ | +---+ | | f |
| 1 |---+ | 3 |---+ | 7 |---+ +---+
+---+ +---+ +---+
: : : : | 8 |---+
+---+ +---+ +---+ | NODE E
| e |---+ | f | : : +------>+---+
+---+ | +---+ +---+ | 0 |
| f | | | f | +---+
+---+ | +---+ : :
| NODE F +---+
+------>+---+ | f |
| 0 | NODE G +---+
+---+ +------>+---+
: : | | 0 |
+---+ | +---+
| 6 |---+ : :
+---+ +---+
: : | f |
+---+ +---+
| f |
+---+
In the above example, there are 7 nodes (A-G), each with 16 slots (0-f).
Assuming no other meta data nodes in the tree, the key space is divided thusly:
KEY PREFIX NODE
========== ====
137* D
138* E
13[0-69-f]* C
1[0-24-f]* B
e6* G
e[0-57-f]* F
[02-df]* A
So, for instance, keys with the following example index keys will be found in
the appropriate nodes:
INDEX KEY PREFIX NODE
=============== ======= ====
13694892892489 13 C
13795289025897 137 D
13889dde88793 138 E
138bbb89003093 138 E
1394879524789 12 C
1458952489 1 B
9431809de993ba - A
b4542910809cd - A
e5284310def98 e F
e68428974237 e6 G
e7fffcbd443 e F
f3842239082 - A
To save memory, if a node can hold all the leaves in its portion of keyspace,
then the node will have all those leaves in it and will not have any metadata
pointers - even if some of those leaves would like to be in the same slot.
A node can contain a heterogeneous mix of leaves and metadata pointers.
Metadata pointers must be in the slots that match their subdivisions of key
space. The leaves can be in any slot not occupied by a metadata pointer. It
is guaranteed that none of the leaves in a node will match a slot occupied by a
metadata pointer. If the metadata pointer is there, any leaf whose key matches
the metadata key prefix must be in the subtree that the metadata pointer points
to.
In the above example list of index keys, node A will contain:
SLOT CONTENT INDEX KEY (PREFIX)
==== =============== ==================
1 PTR TO NODE B 1*
any LEAF 9431809de993ba
any LEAF b4542910809cd
e PTR TO NODE F e*
any LEAF f3842239082
and node B:
3 PTR TO NODE C 13*
any LEAF 1458952489
SHORTCUTS
---------
Shortcuts are metadata records that jump over a piece of keyspace. A shortcut
is a replacement for a series of single-occupancy nodes ascending through the
levels. Shortcuts exist to save memory and to speed up traversal.
It is possible for the root of the tree to be a shortcut - say, for example,
the tree contains at least 17 nodes all with key prefix '1111'. The insertion
algorithm will insert a shortcut to skip over the '1111' keyspace in a single
bound and get to the fourth level where these actually become different.
SPLITTING AND COLLAPSING NODES
------------------------------
Each node has a maximum capacity of 16 leaves and metadata pointers. If the
insertion algorithm finds that it is trying to insert a 17th object into a
node, that node will be split such that at least two leaves that have a common
key segment at that level end up in a separate node rooted on that slot for
that common key segment.
If the leaves in a full node and the leaf that is being inserted are
sufficiently similar, then a shortcut will be inserted into the tree.
When the number of objects in the subtree rooted at a node falls to 16 or
fewer, then the subtree will be collapsed down to a single node - and this will
ripple towards the root if possible.
NON-RECURSIVE ITERATION
-----------------------
Each node and shortcut contains a back pointer to its parent and the number of
slot in that parent that points to it. None-recursive iteration uses these to
proceed rootwards through the tree, going to the parent node, slot N + 1 to
make sure progress is made without the need for a stack.
The backpointers, however, make simultaneous alteration and iteration tricky.
SIMULTANEOUS ALTERATION AND ITERATION
-------------------------------------
There are a number of cases to consider:
(1) Simple insert/replace. This involves simply replacing a NULL or old
matching leaf pointer with the pointer to the new leaf after a barrier.
The metadata blocks don't change otherwise. An old leaf won't be freed
until after the RCU grace period.
(2) Simple delete. This involves just clearing an old matching leaf. The
metadata blocks don't change otherwise. The old leaf won't be freed until
after the RCU grace period.
(3) Insertion replacing part of a subtree that we haven't yet entered. This
may involve replacement of part of that subtree - but that won't affect
the iteration as we won't have reached the pointer to it yet and the
ancestry blocks are not replaced (the layout of those does not change).
(4) Insertion replacing nodes that we're actively processing. This isn't a
problem as we've passed the anchoring pointer and won't switch onto the
new layout until we follow the back pointers - at which point we've
already examined the leaves in the replaced node (we iterate over all the
leaves in a node before following any of its metadata pointers).
We might, however, re-see some leaves that have been split out into a new
branch that's in a slot further along than we were at.
(5) Insertion replacing nodes that we're processing a dependent branch of.
This won't affect us until we follow the back pointers. Similar to (4).
(6) Deletion collapsing a branch under us. This doesn't affect us because the
back pointers will get us back to the parent of the new node before we
could see the new node. The entire collapsed subtree is thrown away
unchanged - and will still be rooted on the same slot, so we shouldn't
process it a second time as we'll go back to slot + 1.
Note:
(*) Under some circumstances, we need to simultaneously change the parent
pointer and the parent slot pointer on a node (say, for example, we
inserted another node before it and moved it up a level). We cannot do
this without locking against a read - so we have to replace that node too.
However, when we're changing a shortcut into a node this isn't a problem
as shortcuts only have one slot and so the parent slot number isn't used
when traversing backwards over one. This means that it's okay to change
the slot number first - provided suitable barriers are used to make sure
the parent slot number is read after the back pointer.
Obsolete blocks and leaves are freed up after an RCU grace period has passed,
so as long as anyone doing walking or iteration holds the RCU read lock, the
old superstructure should not go away on them.

45
Documentation/bad_memory.txt
View File

@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
March 2008
Jan-Simon Moeller, dl9pf@gmx.de
How to deal with bad memory e.g. reported by memtest86+ ?
#########################################################
There are three possibilities I know of:
1) Reinsert/swap the memory modules
2) Buy new modules (best!) or try to exchange the memory
if you have spare-parts
3) Use BadRAM or memmap
This Howto is about number 3) .
BadRAM
######
BadRAM is the actively developed and available as kernel-patch
here: http://rick.vanrein.org/linux/badram/
For more details see the BadRAM documentation.
memmap
######
memmap is already in the kernel and usable as kernel-parameter at
boot-time. Its syntax is slightly strange and you may need to
calculate the values by yourself!
Syntax to exclude a memory area (see kernel-parameters.txt for details):
memmap=<size>$<address>
Example: memtest86+ reported here errors at address 0x18691458, 0x18698424 and
some others. All had 0x1869xxxx in common, so I chose a pattern of
0x18690000,0xffff0000.
With the numbers of the example above:
memmap=64K$0x18690000
or
memmap=0x10000$0x18690000

56
Documentation/basic_profiling.txt
View File

@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
These instructions are deliberately very basic. If you want something clever,
go read the real docs ;-) Please don't add more stuff, but feel free to
correct my mistakes ;-) (mbligh@aracnet.com)
Thanks to John Levon, Dave Hansen, et al. for help writing this.
<test> is the thing you're trying to measure.
Make sure you have the correct System.map / vmlinux referenced!
It is probably easiest to use "make install" for linux and hack
/sbin/installkernel to copy vmlinux to /boot, in addition to vmlinuz,
config, System.map, which are usually installed by default.
Readprofile
-----------
A recent readprofile command is needed for 2.6, such as found in util-linux
2.12a, which can be downloaded from:
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/
Most distributions will ship it already.
Add "profile=2" to the kernel command line.
clear readprofile -r
<test>
dump output readprofile -m /boot/System.map > captured_profile
Oprofile
--------
Get the source (see Changes for required version) from
http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/ and add "idle=poll" to the kernel command
line.
Configure with CONFIG_PROFILING=y and CONFIG_OPROFILE=y & reboot on new kernel
./configure --with-kernel-support
make install
For superior results, be sure to enable the local APIC. If opreport sees
a 0Hz CPU, APIC was not on. Be aware that idle=poll may mean a performance
penalty.
One time setup:
opcontrol --setup --vmlinux=/boot/vmlinux
clear opcontrol --reset
start opcontrol --start
<test>
stop opcontrol --stop
dump output opreport > output_file
To only report on the kernel, run opreport -l /boot/vmlinux > output_file
A reset is needed to clear old statistics, which survive a reboot.

131
Documentation/binfmt_misc.txt
View File

@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
Kernel Support for miscellaneous (your favourite) Binary Formats v1.1
=====================================================================
This Kernel feature allows you to invoke almost (for restrictions see below)
every program by simply typing its name in the shell.
This includes for example compiled Java(TM), Python or Emacs programs.
To achieve this you must tell binfmt_misc which interpreter has to be invoked
with which binary. Binfmt_misc recognises the binary-type by matching some bytes
at the beginning of the file with a magic byte sequence (masking out specified
bits) you have supplied. Binfmt_misc can also recognise a filename extension
aka '.com' or '.exe'.
First you must mount binfmt_misc:
mount binfmt_misc -t binfmt_misc /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc
To actually register a new binary type, you have to set up a string looking like
:name:type:offset:magic:mask:interpreter:flags (where you can choose the ':'
upon your needs) and echo it to /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/register.
Here is what the fields mean:
- 'name' is an identifier string. A new /proc file will be created with this
name below /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc; cannot contain slashes '/' for obvious
reasons.
- 'type' is the type of recognition. Give 'M' for magic and 'E' for extension.
- 'offset' is the offset of the magic/mask in the file, counted in bytes. This
defaults to 0 if you omit it (i.e. you write ':name:type::magic...'). Ignored
when using filename extension matching.
- 'magic' is the byte sequence binfmt_misc is matching for. The magic string
may contain hex-encoded characters like \x0a or \xA4. Note that you must
escape any NUL bytes; parsing halts at the first one. In a shell environment
you might have to write \\x0a to prevent the shell from eating your \.
If you chose filename extension matching, this is the extension to be
recognised (without the '.', the \x0a specials are not allowed). Extension
matching is case sensitive, and slashes '/' are not allowed!
- 'mask' is an (optional, defaults to all 0xff) mask. You can mask out some
bits from matching by supplying a string like magic and as long as magic.
The mask is anded with the byte sequence of the file. Note that you must
escape any NUL bytes; parsing halts at the first one. Ignored when using
filename extension matching.
- 'interpreter' is the program that should be invoked with the binary as first
argument (specify the full path)
- 'flags' is an optional field that controls several aspects of the invocation
of the interpreter. It is a string of capital letters, each controls a
certain aspect. The following flags are supported -
'P' - preserve-argv[0]. Legacy behavior of binfmt_misc is to overwrite
the original argv[0] with the full path to the binary. When this
flag is included, binfmt_misc will add an argument to the argument
vector for this purpose, thus preserving the original argv[0].
e.g. If your interp is set to /bin/foo and you run `blah` (which is
in /usr/local/bin), then the kernel will execute /bin/foo with
argv[] set to ["/bin/foo", "/usr/local/bin/blah", "blah"]. The
interp has to be aware of this so it can execute /usr/local/bin/blah
with argv[] set to ["blah"].
'O' - open-binary. Legacy behavior of binfmt_misc is to pass the full path
of the binary to the interpreter as an argument. When this flag is
included, binfmt_misc will open the file for reading and pass its
descriptor as an argument, instead of the full path, thus allowing
the interpreter to execute non-readable binaries. This feature
should be used with care - the interpreter has to be trusted not to
emit the contents of the non-readable binary.
'C' - credentials. Currently, the behavior of binfmt_misc is to calculate
the credentials and security token of the new process according to
the interpreter. When this flag is included, these attributes are
calculated according to the binary. It also implies the 'O' flag.
This feature should be used with care as the interpreter
will run with root permissions when a setuid binary owned by root
is run with binfmt_misc.
'F' - fix binary. The usual behaviour of binfmt_misc is to spawn the
binary lazily when the misc format file is invoked. However,
this doesn't work very well in the face of mount namespaces and
changeroots, so the F mode opens the binary as soon as the
emulation is installed and uses the opened image to spawn the
emulator, meaning it is always available once installed,
regardless of how the environment changes.
There are some restrictions:
- the whole register string may not exceed 1920 characters
- the magic must reside in the first 128 bytes of the file, i.e.
offset+size(magic) has to be less than 128
- the interpreter string may not exceed 127 characters
To use binfmt_misc you have to mount it first. You can mount it with
"mount -t binfmt_misc none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc" command, or you can add
a line "none /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc binfmt_misc defaults 0 0" to your
/etc/fstab so it auto mounts on boot.
You may want to add the binary formats in one of your /etc/rc scripts during
boot-up. Read the manual of your init program to figure out how to do this
right.
Think about the order of adding entries! Later added entries are matched first!
A few examples (assumed you are in /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc):
- enable support for em86 (like binfmt_em86, for Alpha AXP only):
echo ':i386:M::\x7fELF\x01\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x02\x00\x03:\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfe\xfe\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfb\xff\xff:/bin/em86:' > register
echo ':i486:M::\x7fELF\x01\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x00\x02\x00\x06:\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfe\xfe\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xfb\xff\xff:/bin/em86:' > register
- enable support for packed DOS applications (pre-configured dosemu hdimages):
echo ':DEXE:M::\x0eDEX::/usr/bin/dosexec:' > register
- enable support for Windows executables using wine:
echo ':DOSWin:M::MZ::/usr/local/bin/wine:' > register
For java support see Documentation/java.txt
You can enable/disable binfmt_misc or one binary type by echoing 0 (to disable)
or 1 (to enable) to /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/status or /proc/.../the_name.
Catting the file tells you the current status of binfmt_misc/the entry.
You can remove one entry or all entries by echoing -1 to /proc/.../the_name
or /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc/status.
HINTS:
======
If you want to pass special arguments to your interpreter, you can
write a wrapper script for it. See Documentation/java.txt for an
example.
Your interpreter should NOT look in the PATH for the filename; the kernel
passes it the full filename (or the file descriptor) to use. Using $PATH can
cause unexpected behaviour and can be a security hazard.
Richard Günther <rguenth@tat.physik.uni-tuebingen.de>

6
Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
View File

@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Drivers can now specify a request prepare function (q->prep_rq_fn) that the
block layer would invoke to pre-build device commands for a given request,
or perform other preparatory processing for the request. This is routine is
called by elv_next_request(), i.e. typically just before servicing a request.
(The prepare function would not be called for requests that have REQ_DONTPREP
(The prepare function would not be called for requests that have RQF_DONTPREP
enabled)
Aside:
@ -553,8 +553,8 @@ struct request {
struct request_list *rl;
}
See the rq_flag_bits definitions for an explanation of the various flags
available. Some bits are used by the block layer or i/o scheduler.
See the req_ops and req_flag_bits definitions for an explanation of the various
flags available. Some bits are used by the block layer or i/o scheduler.
The behaviour of the various sector counts are almost the same as before,
except that since we have multi-segment bios, current_nr_sectors refers

32
Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt
View File

@ -240,11 +240,11 @@ All cfq queues doing synchronous sequential IO go on to sync-idle tree.
On this tree we idle on each queue individually.
All synchronous non-sequential queues go on sync-noidle tree. Also any
request which are marked with REQ_NOIDLE go on this service tree. On this
tree we do not idle on individual queues instead idle on the whole group
of queues or the tree. So if there are 4 queues waiting for IO to dispatch
we will idle only once last queue has dispatched the IO and there is
no more IO on this service tree.
synchronous write request which is not marked with REQ_IDLE goes on this
service tree. On this tree we do not idle on individual queues instead idle
on the whole group of queues or the tree. So if there are 4 queues waiting
for IO to dispatch we will idle only once last queue has dispatched the IO
and there is no more IO on this service tree.
All async writes go on async service tree. There is no idling on async
queues.
@ -257,17 +257,17 @@ tree idling provides isolation with buffered write queues on async tree.
FAQ
===
Q1. Why to idle at all on queues marked with REQ_NOIDLE.
Q1. Why to idle at all on queues not marked with REQ_IDLE.
A1. We only do tree idle (all queues on sync-noidle tree) on queues marked
with REQ_NOIDLE. This helps in providing isolation with all the sync-idle
A1. We only do tree idle (all queues on sync-noidle tree) on queues not marked
with REQ_IDLE. This helps in providing isolation with all the sync-idle
queues. Otherwise in presence of many sequential readers, other
synchronous IO might not get fair share of disk.
For example, if there are 10 sequential readers doing IO and they get
100ms each. If a REQ_NOIDLE request comes in, it will be scheduled
roughly after 1 second. If after completion of REQ_NOIDLE request we
do not idle, and after a couple of milli seconds a another REQ_NOIDLE
100ms each. If a !REQ_IDLE request comes in, it will be scheduled
roughly after 1 second. If after completion of !REQ_IDLE request we
do not idle, and after a couple of milli seconds a another !REQ_IDLE
request comes in, again it will be scheduled after 1second. Repeat it
and notice how a workload can lose its disk share and suffer due to
multiple sequential readers.
@ -276,16 +276,16 @@ A1. We only do tree idle (all queues on sync-noidle tree) on queues marked
context of fsync, and later some journaling data is written. Journaling
data comes in only after fsync has finished its IO (atleast for ext4
that seemed to be the case). Now if one decides not to idle on fsync
thread due to REQ_NOIDLE, then next journaling write will not get
thread due to !REQ_IDLE, then next journaling write will not get
scheduled for another second. A process doing small fsync, will suffer
badly in presence of multiple sequential readers.
Hence doing tree idling on threads using REQ_NOIDLE flag on requests
Hence doing tree idling on threads using !REQ_IDLE flag on requests
provides isolation from multiple sequential readers and at the same
time we do not idle on individual threads.
Q2. When to specify REQ_NOIDLE
A2. I would think whenever one is doing synchronous write and not expecting
Q2. When to specify REQ_IDLE
A2. I would think whenever one is doing synchronous write and expecting
more writes to be dispatched from same context soon, should be able
to specify REQ_NOIDLE on writes and that probably should work well for
to specify REQ_IDLE on writes and that probably should work well for
most of the cases.

2
Documentation/block/null_blk.txt
View File

@ -72,4 +72,4 @@ use_per_node_hctx=[0/1]: Default: 0
queue for each CPU node in the system.
use_lightnvm=[0/1]: Default: 0
Register device with LightNVM. Requires blk-mq to be used.
Register device with LightNVM. Requires blk-mq and CONFIG_NVM to be enabled.

29
Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt
View File

@ -54,9 +54,23 @@ This is the hardware sector size of the device, in bytes.
io_poll (RW)
------------
When read, this file shows the total number of block IO polls and how
many returned success. Writing '0' to this file will disable polling
for this device. Writing any non-zero value will enable this feature.
When read, this file shows whether polling is enabled (1) or disabled
(0). Writing '0' to this file will disable polling for this device.
Writing any non-zero value will enable this feature.
io_poll_delay (RW)
------------------
If polling is enabled, this controls what kind of polling will be
performed. It defaults to -1, which is classic polling. In this mode,
the CPU will repeatedly ask for completions without giving up any time.
If set to 0, a hybrid polling mode is used, where the kernel will attempt
to make an educated guess at when the IO will complete. Based on this
guess, the kernel will put the process issuing IO to sleep for an amount
of time, before entering a classic poll loop. This mode might be a
little slower than pure classic polling, but it will be more efficient.
If set to a value larger than 0, the kernel will put the process issuing
IO to sleep for this amont of microseconds before entering classic
polling.
iostats (RW)
-------------
@ -169,5 +183,14 @@ This is the number of bytes the device can write in a single write-same
command. A value of '0' means write-same is not supported by this
device.
wb_lat_usec (RW)
----------------
If the device is registered for writeback throttling, then this file shows
the target minimum read latency. If this latency is exceeded in a given
window of time (see wb_window_usec), then the writeback throttling will start
scaling back writes. Writing a value of '0' to this file disables the
feature. Writing a value of '-1' to this file resets the value to the
default setting.
Jens Axboe <jens.axboe@oracle.com>, February 2009

2
Documentation/blockdev/cciss.txt
View File

@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ infrequently used and the primary purpose of Smart Array controllers is to
act as a RAID controller for disk drives, so the vast majority of commands
are allocated for disk devices. However, if you have more than a few tape
drives attached to a smart array, the default number of commands may not be
enought (for example, if you have 8 tape drives, you could only rewind 6
enough (for example, if you have 8 tape drives, you could only rewind 6
at one time with the default number of commands.) The cciss_tape_cmds module
parameter allows more commands (up to 16 more) to be allocated for use by
tape drives. For example:

2
Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt
View File

@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Contents:
The RAM disk driver is a way to use main system memory as a block device. It
is required for initrd, an initial filesystem used if you need to load modules
in order to access the root filesystem (see Documentation/initrd.txt). It can
in order to access the root filesystem (see Documentation/admin-guide/initrd.rst). It can
also be used for a temporary filesystem for crypto work, since the contents
are erased on reboot.

34
Documentation/braille-console.txt
View File

@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
Linux Braille Console
To get early boot messages on a braille device (before userspace screen
readers can start), you first need to compile the support for the usual serial
console (see serial-console.txt), and for braille device (in Device Drivers -
Accessibility).
Then you need to specify a console=brl, option on the kernel command line, the
format is:
console=brl,serial_options...
where serial_options... are the same as described in serial-console.txt
So for instance you can use console=brl,ttyS0 if the braille device is connected
to the first serial port, and console=brl,ttyS0,115200 to override the baud rate
to 115200, etc.
By default, the braille device will just show the last kernel message (console
mode). To review previous messages, press the Insert key to switch to the VT
review mode. In review mode, the arrow keys permit to browse in the VT content,
page up/down keys go at the top/bottom of the screen, and the home key goes back
to the cursor, hence providing very basic screen reviewing facility.
Sound feedback can be obtained by adding the braille_console.sound=1 kernel
parameter.
For simplicity, only one braille console can be enabled, other uses of
console=brl,... will be discarded. Also note that it does not interfere with
the console selection mechanism described in serial-console.txt
For now, only the VisioBraille device is supported.
Samuel Thibault <samuel.thibault@ens-lyon.org>

2
Documentation/cgroup-v1/00-INDEX
View File

@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ cpuacct.txt
- CPU Accounting Controller; account CPU usage for groups of tasks.
cpusets.txt
- documents the cpusets feature; assign CPUs and Mem to a set of tasks.
devices.txt
admin-guide/devices.rst
- Device Whitelist Controller; description, interface and security.
freezer-subsystem.txt
- checkpointing; rationale to not use signals, interface.

4
Documentation/circular-buffers.txt
View File

@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ The producer will look something like this:
unsigned long head = buffer->head;
/* The spin_unlock() and next spin_lock() provide needed ordering. */
unsigned long tail = ACCESS_ONCE(buffer->tail);
unsigned long tail = READ_ONCE(buffer->tail);
if (CIRC_SPACE(head, tail, buffer->size) >= 1) {
/* insert one item into the buffer */
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ This will instruct the CPU to make sure the index is up to date before reading
the new item, and then it shall make sure the CPU has finished reading the item
before it writes the new tail pointer, which will erase the item.
Note the use of ACCESS_ONCE() and smp_load_acquire() to read the
Note the use of READ_ONCE() and smp_load_acquire() to read the
opposition index. This prevents the compiler from discarding and
reloading its cached value - which some compilers will do across
smp_read_barrier_depends(). This isn't strictly needed if you can

22
Documentation/conf.py
View File

@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ from load_config import loadConfig
# Add any Sphinx extension module names here, as strings. They can be
# extensions coming with Sphinx (named 'sphinx.ext.*') or your custom
# ones.
extensions = ['kernel-doc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include', 'cdomain']
extensions = ['kerneldoc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include', 'cdomain']
# The name of the math extension changed on Sphinx 1.4
if minor > 3:
if major == 1 and minor > 3:
extensions.append("sphinx.ext.imgmath")
else:
extensions.append("sphinx.ext.pngmath")
@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ pygments_style = 'sphinx'
todo_include_todos = False
primary_domain = 'C'
highlight_language = 'guess'
highlight_language = 'none'
# -- Options for HTML output ----------------------------------------------
@ -332,18 +332,32 @@ latex_elements = {
'''
}
# Fix reference escape troubles with Sphinx 1.4.x
if major == 1 and minor > 3:
latex_elements['preamble'] += '\\renewcommand*{\\DUrole}[2]{ #2 }\n'
# Grouping the document tree into LaTeX files. List of tuples
# (source start file, target name, title,
# author, documentclass [howto, manual, or own class]).
latex_documents = [
('doc-guide/index', 'kernel-doc-guide.tex', 'Linux Kernel Documentation Guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('admin-guide/index', 'linux-user.tex', 'Linux Kernel User Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('core-api/index', 'core-api.tex', 'The kernel core API manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('driver-api/index', 'driver-api.tex', 'The kernel driver API manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('kernel-documentation', 'kernel-documentation.tex', 'The Linux Kernel Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('development-process/index', 'development-process.tex', 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation',
('process/index', 'development-process.tex', 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('gpu/index', 'gpu.tex', 'Linux GPU Driver Developer\'s Guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('media/index', 'media.tex', 'Linux Media Subsystem Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('security/index', 'security.tex', 'The kernel security subsystem manual',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]
# The name of an image file (relative to this directory) to place at the top of

551
Documentation/core-api/assoc_array.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,551 @@
========================================
Generic Associative Array Implementation
========================================
Overview
========
This associative array implementation is an object container with the following
properties:
1. Objects are opaque pointers. The implementation does not care where they
point (if anywhere) or what they point to (if anything).
.. note:: Pointers to objects _must_ be zero in the least significant bit.
2. Objects do not need to contain linkage blocks for use by the array. This
permits an object to be located in multiple arrays simultaneously.
Rather, the array is made up of metadata blocks that point to objects.
3. Objects require index keys to locate them within the array.
4. Index keys must be unique. Inserting an object with the same key as one
already in the array will replace the old object.
5. Index keys can be of any length and can be of different lengths.
6. Index keys should encode the length early on, before any variation due to
length is seen.
7. Index keys can include a hash to scatter objects throughout the array.
8. The array can iterated over. The objects will not necessarily come out in
key order.
9. The array can be iterated over whilst it is being modified, provided the
RCU readlock is being held by the iterator. Note, however, under these
circumstances, some objects may be seen more than once. If this is a
problem, the iterator should lock against modification. Objects will not
be missed, however, unless deleted.
10. Objects in the array can be looked up by means of their index key.
11. Objects can be looked up whilst the array is being modified, provided the
RCU readlock is being held by the thread doing the look up.
The implementation uses a tree of 16-pointer nodes internally that are indexed
on each level by nibbles from the index key in the same manner as in a radix
tree. To improve memory efficiency, shortcuts can be emplaced to skip over
what would otherwise be a series of single-occupancy nodes. Further, nodes
pack leaf object pointers into spare space in the node rather than making an
extra branch until as such time an object needs to be added to a full node.
The Public API
==============
The public API can be found in ``<linux/assoc_array.h>``. The associative
array is rooted on the following structure::
struct assoc_array {
...
};
The code is selected by enabling ``CONFIG_ASSOCIATIVE_ARRAY`` with::
./script/config -e ASSOCIATIVE_ARRAY
Edit Script
-----------
The insertion and deletion functions produce an 'edit script' that can later be
applied to effect the changes without risking ``ENOMEM``. This retains the
preallocated metadata blocks that will be installed in the internal tree and
keeps track of the metadata blocks that will be removed from the tree when the
script is applied.
This is also used to keep track of dead blocks and dead objects after the
script has been applied so that they can be freed later. The freeing is done
after an RCU grace period has passed - thus allowing access functions to
proceed under the RCU read lock.
The script appears as outside of the API as a pointer of the type::
struct assoc_array_edit;
There are two functions for dealing with the script:
1. Apply an edit script::
void assoc_array_apply_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit);
This will perform the edit functions, interpolating various write barriers
to permit accesses under the RCU read lock to continue. The edit script
will then be passed to ``call_rcu()`` to free it and any dead stuff it points
to.
2. Cancel an edit script::
void assoc_array_cancel_edit(struct assoc_array_edit *edit);
This frees the edit script and all preallocated memory immediately. If
this was for insertion, the new object is _not_ released by this function,
but must rather be released by the caller.
These functions are guaranteed not to fail.
Operations Table
----------------
Various functions take a table of operations::
struct assoc_array_ops {
...
};
This points to a number of methods, all of which need to be provided:
1. Get a chunk of index key from caller data::
unsigned long (*get_key_chunk)(const void *index_key, int level);
This should return a chunk of caller-supplied index key starting at the
*bit* position given by the level argument. The level argument will be a
multiple of ``ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE`` and the function should return
``ASSOC_ARRAY_KEY_CHUNK_SIZE bits``. No error is possible.
2. Get a chunk of an object's index key::
unsigned long (*get_object_key_chunk)(const void *object, int level);
As the previous function, but gets its data from an object in the array
rather than from a caller-supplied index key.
3. See if this is the object we're looking for::
bool (*compare_object)(const void *object, const void *index_key);
Compare the object against an index key and return ``true`` if it matches and
``false`` if it doesn't.
4. Diff the index keys of two objects::
int (*diff_objects)(const void *object, const void *index_key);
Return the bit position at which the index key of the specified object
differs from the given index key or -1 if they are the same.
5. Free an object::
void (*free_object)(void *object);
Free the specified object. Note that this may be called an RCU grace period
after ``assoc_array_apply_edit()`` was called, so ``synchronize_rcu()`` may be
necessary on module unloading.
Manipulation Functions
----------------------
There are a number of functions for manipulating an associative array:
1. Initialise an associative array::
void assoc_array_init(struct assoc_array *array);
This initialises the base structure for an associative array. It can't fail.
2. Insert/replace an object in an associative array::
struct assoc_array_edit *
assoc_array_insert(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
const void *index_key,
void *object);
This inserts the given object into the array. Note that the least
significant bit of the pointer must be zero as it's used to type-mark
pointers internally.
If an object already exists for that key then it will be replaced with the
new object and the old one will be freed automatically.
The ``index_key`` argument should hold index key information and is
passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called.
This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns
an edit script that must be applied. ``-ENOMEM`` is returned in the case of
an out-of-memory error.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
3. Delete an object from an associative array::
struct assoc_array_edit *
assoc_array_delete(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
const void *index_key);
This deletes an object that matches the specified data from the array.
The ``index_key`` argument should hold index key information and is
passed to the methods in the ops table when they are called.
This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns
an edit script that must be applied. ``-ENOMEM`` is returned in the case of
an out-of-memory error. ``NULL`` will be returned if the specified object is
not found within the array.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
4. Delete all objects from an associative array::
struct assoc_array_edit *
assoc_array_clear(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops);
This deletes all the objects from an associative array and leaves it
completely empty.
This function makes no alteration to the array itself, but rather returns
an edit script that must be applied. ``-ENOMEM`` is returned in the case of
an out-of-memory error.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
5. Destroy an associative array, deleting all objects::
void assoc_array_destroy(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops);
This destroys the contents of the associative array and leaves it
completely empty. It is not permitted for another thread to be traversing
the array under the RCU read lock at the same time as this function is
destroying it as no RCU deferral is performed on memory release -
something that would require memory to be allocated.
The caller should lock exclusively against other modifiers and accessors
of the array.
6. Garbage collect an associative array::
int assoc_array_gc(struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
bool (*iterator)(void *object, void *iterator_data),
void *iterator_data);
This iterates over the objects in an associative array and passes each one to
``iterator()``. If ``iterator()`` returns ``true``, the object is kept. If it
returns ``false``, the object will be freed. If the ``iterator()`` function
returns ``true``, it must perform any appropriate refcount incrementing on the
object before returning.
The internal tree will be packed down if possible as part of the iteration
to reduce the number of nodes in it.
The ``iterator_data`` is passed directly to ``iterator()`` and is otherwise
ignored by the function.
The function will return ``0`` if successful and ``-ENOMEM`` if there wasn't
enough memory.
It is possible for other threads to iterate over or search the array under
the RCU read lock whilst this function is in progress. The caller should
lock exclusively against other modifiers of the array.
Access Functions
----------------
There are two functions for accessing an associative array:
1. Iterate over all the objects in an associative array::
int assoc_array_iterate(const struct assoc_array *array,
int (*iterator)(const void *object,
void *iterator_data),
void *iterator_data);
This passes each object in the array to the iterator callback function.
``iterator_data`` is private data for that function.
This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being
modified, provided the RCU read lock is held. Under such circumstances,
it is possible for the iteration function to see some objects twice. If
this is a problem, then modification should be locked against. The
iteration algorithm should not, however, miss any objects.
The function will return ``0`` if no objects were in the array or else it will
return the result of the last iterator function called. Iteration stops
immediately if any call to the iteration function results in a non-zero
return.
2. Find an object in an associative array::
void *assoc_array_find(const struct assoc_array *array,
const struct assoc_array_ops *ops,
const void *index_key);
This walks through the array's internal tree directly to the object
specified by the index key..
This may be used on an array at the same time as the array is being
modified, provided the RCU read lock is held.
The function will return the object if found (and set ``*_type`` to the object
type) or will return ``NULL`` if the object was not found.
Index Key Form
--------------
The index key can be of any form, but since the algorithms aren't told how long
the key is, it is strongly recommended that the index key includes its length
very early on before any variation due to the length would have an effect on
comparisons.
This will cause leaves with different length keys to scatter away from each
other - and those with the same length keys to cluster together.
It is also recommended that the index key begin with a hash of the rest of the
key to maximise scattering throughout keyspace.
The better the scattering, the wider and lower the internal tree will be.
Poor scattering isn't too much of a problem as there are shortcuts and nodes
can contain mixtures of leaves and metadata pointers.
The index key is read in chunks of machine word. Each chunk is subdivided into
one nibble (4 bits) per level, so on a 32-bit CPU this is good for 8 levels and
on a 64-bit CPU, 16 levels. Unless the scattering is really poor, it is
unlikely that more than one word of any particular index key will have to be
used.
Internal Workings
=================
The associative array data structure has an internal tree. This tree is
constructed of two types of metadata blocks: nodes and shortcuts.
A node is an array of slots. Each slot can contain one of four things:
* A NULL pointer, indicating that the slot is empty.
* A pointer to an object (a leaf).
* A pointer to a node at the next level.
* A pointer to a shortcut.
Basic Internal Tree Layout
--------------------------
Ignoring shortcuts for the moment, the nodes form a multilevel tree. The index
key space is strictly subdivided by the nodes in the tree and nodes occur on
fixed levels. For example::
Level: 0 1 2 3
=============== =============== =============== ===============
NODE D
NODE B NODE C +------>+---+
+------>+---+ +------>+---+ | | 0 |
NODE A | | 0 | | | 0 | | +---+
+---+ | +---+ | +---+ | : :
| 0 | | : : | : : | +---+
+---+ | +---+ | +---+ | | f |
| 1 |---+ | 3 |---+ | 7 |---+ +---+
+---+ +---+ +---+
: : : : | 8 |---+
+---+ +---+ +---+ | NODE E
| e |---+ | f | : : +------>+---+
+---+ | +---+ +---+ | 0 |
| f | | | f | +---+
+---+ | +---+ : :
| NODE F +---+
+------>+---+ | f |
| 0 | NODE G +---+
+---+ +------>+---+
: : | | 0 |
+---+ | +---+
| 6 |---+ : :
+---+ +---+
: : | f |
+---+ +---+
| f |
+---+
In the above example, there are 7 nodes (A-G), each with 16 slots (0-f).
Assuming no other meta data nodes in the tree, the key space is divided
thusly::
KEY PREFIX NODE
========== ====
137* D
138* E
13[0-69-f]* C
1[0-24-f]* B
e6* G
e[0-57-f]* F
[02-df]* A
So, for instance, keys with the following example index keys will be found in
the appropriate nodes::
INDEX KEY PREFIX NODE
=============== ======= ====
13694892892489 13 C
13795289025897 137 D
13889dde88793 138 E
138bbb89003093 138 E
1394879524789 12 C
1458952489 1 B
9431809de993ba - A
b4542910809cd - A
e5284310def98 e F
e68428974237 e6 G
e7fffcbd443 e F
f3842239082 - A
To save memory, if a node can hold all the leaves in its portion of keyspace,
then the node will have all those leaves in it and will not have any metadata
pointers - even if some of those leaves would like to be in the same slot.
A node can contain a heterogeneous mix of leaves and metadata pointers.
Metadata pointers must be in the slots that match their subdivisions of key
space. The leaves can be in any slot not occupied by a metadata pointer. It
is guaranteed that none of the leaves in a node will match a slot occupied by a
metadata pointer. If the metadata pointer is there, any leaf whose key matches
the metadata key prefix must be in the subtree that the metadata pointer points
to.
In the above example list of index keys, node A will contain::
SLOT CONTENT INDEX KEY (PREFIX)
==== =============== ==================
1 PTR TO NODE B 1*
any LEAF 9431809de993ba
any LEAF b4542910809cd
e PTR TO NODE F e*
any LEAF f3842239082
and node B::
3 PTR TO NODE C 13*
any LEAF 1458952489
Shortcuts
---------
Shortcuts are metadata records that jump over a piece of keyspace. A shortcut
is a replacement for a series of single-occupancy nodes ascending through the
levels. Shortcuts exist to save memory and to speed up traversal.
It is possible for the root of the tree to be a shortcut - say, for example,
the tree contains at least 17 nodes all with key prefix ``1111``. The
insertion algorithm will insert a shortcut to skip over the ``1111`` keyspace
in a single bound and get to the fourth level where these actually become
different.
Splitting And Collapsing Nodes
------------------------------
Each node has a maximum capacity of 16 leaves and metadata pointers. If the
insertion algorithm finds that it is trying to insert a 17th object into a
node, that node will be split such that at least two leaves that have a common
key segment at that level end up in a separate node rooted on that slot for
that common key segment.
If the leaves in a full node and the leaf that is being inserted are
sufficiently similar, then a shortcut will be inserted into the tree.
When the number of objects in the subtree rooted at a node falls to 16 or
fewer, then the subtree will be collapsed down to a single node - and this will
ripple towards the root if possible.
Non-Recursive Iteration
-----------------------
Each node and shortcut contains a back pointer to its parent and the number of
slot in that parent that points to it. None-recursive iteration uses these to
proceed rootwards through the tree, going to the parent node, slot N + 1 to
make sure progress is made without the need for a stack.
The backpointers, however, make simultaneous alteration and iteration tricky.
Simultaneous Alteration And Iteration
-------------------------------------
There are a number of cases to consider:
1. Simple insert/replace. This involves simply replacing a NULL or old
matching leaf pointer with the pointer to the new leaf after a barrier.
The metadata blocks don't change otherwise. An old leaf won't be freed
until after the RCU grace period.
2. Simple delete. This involves just clearing an old matching leaf. The
metadata blocks don't change otherwise. The old leaf won't be freed until
after the RCU grace period.
3. Insertion replacing part of a subtree that we haven't yet entered. This
may involve replacement of part of that subtree - but that won't affect
the iteration as we won't have reached the pointer to it yet and the
ancestry blocks are not replaced (the layout of those does not change).
4. Insertion replacing nodes that we're actively processing. This isn't a
problem as we've passed the anchoring pointer and won't switch onto the
new layout until we follow the back pointers - at which point we've
already examined the leaves in the replaced node (we iterate over all the
leaves in a node before following any of its metadata pointers).
We might, however, re-see some leaves that have been split out into a new
branch that's in a slot further along than we were at.
5. Insertion replacing nodes that we're processing a dependent branch of.
This won't affect us until we follow the back pointers. Similar to (4).
6. Deletion collapsing a branch under us. This doesn't affect us because the
back pointers will get us back to the parent of the new node before we
could see the new node. The entire collapsed subtree is thrown away
unchanged - and will still be rooted on the same slot, so we shouldn't
process it a second time as we'll go back to slot + 1.
.. note::
Under some circumstances, we need to simultaneously change the parent
pointer and the parent slot pointer on a node (say, for example, we
inserted another node before it and moved it up a level). We cannot do
this without locking against a read - so we have to replace that node too.
However, when we're changing a shortcut into a node this isn't a problem
as shortcuts only have one slot and so the parent slot number isn't used
when traversing backwards over one. This means that it's okay to change
the slot number first - provided suitable barriers are used to make sure
the parent slot number is read after the back pointer.
Obsolete blocks and leaves are freed up after an RCU grace period has passed,
so as long as anyone doing walking or iteration holds the RCU read lock, the
old superstructure should not go away on them.

332
Documentation/atomic_ops.txt → Documentation/core-api/atomic_ops.rst
View File

@ -1,36 +1,42 @@
Semantics and Behavior of Atomic and
Bitmask Operations
=======================================================
Semantics and Behavior of Atomic and Bitmask Operations
=======================================================
David S. Miller
:Author: David S. Miller
This document is intended to serve as a guide to Linux port
This document is intended to serve as a guide to Linux port
maintainers on how to implement atomic counter, bitops, and spinlock
interfaces properly.
The atomic_t type should be defined as a signed integer and
Atomic Type And Operations
==========================
The atomic_t type should be defined as a signed integer and
the atomic_long_t type as a signed long integer. Also, they should
be made opaque such that any kind of cast to a normal C integer type
will fail. Something like the following should suffice:
will fail. Something like the following should suffice::
typedef struct { int counter; } atomic_t;
typedef struct { long counter; } atomic_long_t;
Historically, counter has been declared volatile. This is now discouraged.
See Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt for the complete rationale.
See :ref:`Documentation/process/volatile-considered-harmful.rst
<volatile_considered_harmful>` for the complete rationale.
local_t is very similar to atomic_t. If the counter is per CPU and only
updated by one CPU, local_t is probably more appropriate. Please see
Documentation/local_ops.txt for the semantics of local_t.
:ref:`Documentation/core-api/local_ops.rst <local_ops>` for the semantics of
local_t.
The first operations to implement for atomic_t's are the initializers and
plain reads.
plain reads. ::
#define ATOMIC_INIT(i) { (i) }
#define atomic_set(v, i) ((v)->counter = (i))
The first macro is used in definitions, such as:
The first macro is used in definitions, such as::
static atomic_t my_counter = ATOMIC_INIT(1);
static atomic_t my_counter = ATOMIC_INIT(1);
The initializer is atomic in that the return values of the atomic operations
are guaranteed to be correct reflecting the initialized value if the
@ -38,10 +44,10 @@ initializer is used before runtime. If the initializer is used at runtime, a
proper implicit or explicit read memory barrier is needed before reading the
value with atomic_read from another thread.
As with all of the atomic_ interfaces, replace the leading "atomic_"
with "atomic_long_" to operate on atomic_long_t.
As with all of the ``atomic_`` interfaces, replace the leading ``atomic_``
with ``atomic_long_`` to operate on atomic_long_t.
The second interface can be used at runtime, as in:
The second interface can be used at runtime, as in::
struct foo { atomic_t counter; };
...
@ -59,7 +65,7 @@ been set with this operation or set with another operation. A proper implicit
or explicit memory barrier is needed before the value set with the operation
is guaranteed to be readable with atomic_read from another thread.
Next, we have:
Next, we have::
#define atomic_read(v) ((v)->counter)
@ -73,36 +79,37 @@ initialization by any other thread is visible yet, so the user of the
interface must take care of that with a proper implicit or explicit memory
barrier.
*** WARNING: atomic_read() and atomic_set() DO NOT IMPLY BARRIERS! ***
.. warning::
Some architectures may choose to use the volatile keyword, barriers, or inline
assembly to guarantee some degree of immediacy for atomic_read() and
atomic_set(). This is not uniformly guaranteed, and may change in the future,
so all users of atomic_t should treat atomic_read() and atomic_set() as simple
C statements that may be reordered or optimized away entirely by the compiler
or processor, and explicitly invoke the appropriate compiler and/or memory
barrier for each use case. Failure to do so will result in code that may
suddenly break when used with different architectures or compiler
optimizations, or even changes in unrelated code which changes how the
compiler optimizes the section accessing atomic_t variables.
``atomic_read()`` and ``atomic_set()`` DO NOT IMPLY BARRIERS!
*** YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED! ***
Some architectures may choose to use the volatile keyword, barriers, or
inline assembly to guarantee some degree of immediacy for atomic_read()
and atomic_set(). This is not uniformly guaranteed, and may change in
the future, so all users of atomic_t should treat atomic_read() and
atomic_set() as simple C statements that may be reordered or optimized
away entirely by the compiler or processor, and explicitly invoke the
appropriate compiler and/or memory barrier for each use case. Failure
to do so will result in code that may suddenly break when used with
different architectures or compiler optimizations, or even changes in
unrelated code which changes how the compiler optimizes the section
accessing atomic_t variables.
Properly aligned pointers, longs, ints, and chars (and unsigned
equivalents) may be atomically loaded from and stored to in the same
sense as described for atomic_read() and atomic_set(). The ACCESS_ONCE()
macro should be used to prevent the compiler from using optimizations
that might otherwise optimize accesses out of existence on the one hand,
or that might create unsolicited accesses on the other.
sense as described for atomic_read() and atomic_set(). The READ_ONCE()
and WRITE_ONCE() macros should be used to prevent the compiler from using
optimizations that might otherwise optimize accesses out of existence on
the one hand, or that might create unsolicited accesses on the other.
For example consider the following code:
For example consider the following code::
while (a > 0)
do_something();
If the compiler can prove that do_something() does not store to the
variable a, then the compiler is within its rights transforming this to
the following:
the following::
tmp = a;
if (a > 0)
@ -110,14 +117,14 @@ the following:
do_something();
If you don't want the compiler to do this (and you probably don't), then
you should use something like the following:
you should use something like the following::
while (ACCESS_ONCE(a) < 0)
while (READ_ONCE(a) < 0)
do_something();
Alternatively, you could place a barrier() call in the loop.
For another example, consider the following code:
For another example, consider the following code::
tmp_a = a;
do_something_with(tmp_a);
@ -125,7 +132,7 @@ For another example, consider the following code:
If the compiler can prove that do_something_with() does not store to the
variable a, then the compiler is within its rights to manufacture an
additional load as follows:
additional load as follows::
tmp_a = a;
do_something_with(tmp_a);
@ -139,15 +146,15 @@ The compiler would be likely to manufacture this additional load if
do_something_with() was an inline function that made very heavy use
of registers: reloading from variable a could save a flush to the
stack and later reload. To prevent the compiler from attacking your
code in this manner, write the following:
code in this manner, write the following::
tmp_a = ACCESS_ONCE(a);
tmp_a = READ_ONCE(a);
do_something_with(tmp_a);
do_something_else_with(tmp_a);
For a final example, consider the following code, assuming that the
variable a is set at boot time before the second CPU is brought online
and never changed later, so that memory barriers are not needed:
and never changed later, so that memory barriers are not needed::
if (a)
b = 9;
@ -155,7 +162,7 @@ and never changed later, so that memory barriers are not needed:
b = 42;
The compiler is within its rights to manufacture an additional store
by transforming the above code into the following:
by transforming the above code into the following::
b = 42;
if (a)
@ -163,20 +170,22 @@ by transforming the above code into the following:
This could come as a fatal surprise to other code running concurrently
that expected b to never have the value 42 if a was zero. To prevent
the compiler from doing this, write something like:
the compiler from doing this, write something like::
if (a)
ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 9;
WRITE_ONCE(b, 9);
else
ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 42;
WRITE_ONCE(b, 42);
Don't even -think- about doing this without proper use of memory barriers,
locks, or atomic operations if variable a can change at runtime!
*** WARNING: ACCESS_ONCE() DOES NOT IMPLY A BARRIER! ***
.. warning::
``READ_ONCE()`` OR ``WRITE_ONCE()`` DO NOT IMPLY A BARRIER!
Now, we move onto the atomic operation interfaces typically implemented with
the help of assembly code.
the help of assembly code. ::
void atomic_add(int i, atomic_t *v);
void atomic_sub(int i, atomic_t *v);
@ -192,7 +201,7 @@ One very important aspect of these two routines is that they DO NOT
require any explicit memory barriers. They need only perform the
atomic_t counter update in an SMP safe manner.
Next, we have:
Next, we have::
int atomic_inc_return(atomic_t *v);
int atomic_dec_return(atomic_t *v);
@ -214,7 +223,7 @@ If the atomic instructions used in an implementation provide explicit
memory barrier semantics which satisfy the above requirements, that is
fine as well.
Let's move on:
Let's move on::
int atomic_add_return(int i, atomic_t *v);
int atomic_sub_return(int i, atomic_t *v);
@ -224,7 +233,7 @@ explicit counter adjustment is given instead of the implicit "1".
This means that like atomic_{inc,dec}_return(), the memory barrier
semantics are required.
Next:
Next::
int atomic_inc_and_test(atomic_t *v);
int atomic_dec_and_test(atomic_t *v);
@ -234,13 +243,13 @@ given atomic counter. They return a boolean indicating whether the
resulting counter value was zero or not.
Again, these primitives provide explicit memory barrier semantics around
the atomic operation.
the atomic operation::
int atomic_sub_and_test(int i, atomic_t *v);
This is identical to atomic_dec_and_test() except that an explicit
decrement is given instead of the implicit "1". This primitive must
provide explicit memory barrier semantics around the operation.
provide explicit memory barrier semantics around the operation::
int atomic_add_negative(int i, atomic_t *v);
@ -249,7 +258,7 @@ is return which indicates whether the resulting counter value is negative.
This primitive must provide explicit memory barrier semantics around
the operation.
Then:
Then::
int atomic_xchg(atomic_t *v, int new);
@ -257,14 +266,14 @@ This performs an atomic exchange operation on the atomic variable v, setting
the given new value. It returns the old value that the atomic variable v had
just before the operation.
atomic_xchg must provide explicit memory barriers around the operation.
atomic_xchg must provide explicit memory barriers around the operation. ::
int atomic_cmpxchg(atomic_t *v, int old, int new);
This performs an atomic compare exchange operation on the atomic value v,
with the given old and new values. Like all atomic_xxx operations,
atomic_cmpxchg will only satisfy its atomicity semantics as long as all
other accesses of *v are performed through atomic_xxx operations.
other accesses of \*v are performed through atomic_xxx operations.
atomic_cmpxchg must provide explicit memory barriers around the operation,
although if the comparison fails then no memory ordering guarantees are
@ -273,7 +282,7 @@ required.
The semantics for atomic_cmpxchg are the same as those defined for 'cas'
below.
Finally:
Finally::
int atomic_add_unless(atomic_t *v, int a, int u);
@ -289,12 +298,12 @@ atomic_inc_not_zero, equivalent to atomic_add_unless(v, 1, 0)
If a caller requires memory barrier semantics around an atomic_t
operation which does not return a value, a set of interfaces are
defined which accomplish this:
defined which accomplish this::
void smp_mb__before_atomic(void);
void smp_mb__after_atomic(void);
For example, smp_mb__before_atomic() can be used like so:
For example, smp_mb__before_atomic() can be used like so::
obj->dead = 1;
smp_mb__before_atomic();
@ -315,67 +324,69 @@ atomic_t implementation above can have disastrous results. Here is
an example, which follows a pattern occurring frequently in the Linux
kernel. It is the use of atomic counters to implement reference
counting, and it works such that once the counter falls to zero it can
be guaranteed that no other entity can be accessing the object:
be guaranteed that no other entity can be accessing the object::
static void obj_list_add(struct obj *obj, struct list_head *head)
{
obj->active = 1;
list_add(&obj->list, head);
}
static void obj_list_add(struct obj *obj, struct list_head *head)
{
obj->active = 1;
list_add(&obj->list, head);
}
static void obj_list_del(struct obj *obj)
{
list_del(&obj->list);
obj->active = 0;
}
static void obj_list_del(struct obj *obj)
{
list_del(&obj->list);
obj->active = 0;
}
static void obj_destroy(struct obj *obj)
{
BUG_ON(obj->active);
kfree(obj);
}
static void obj_destroy(struct obj *obj)
{
BUG_ON(obj->active);
kfree(obj);
}
struct obj *obj_list_peek(struct list_head *head)
{
if (!list_empty(head)) {
struct obj *obj_list_peek(struct list_head *head)
{
if (!list_empty(head)) {
struct obj *obj;
obj = list_entry(head->next, struct obj, list);
atomic_inc(&obj->refcnt);
return obj;
}
return NULL;
}
void obj_poke(void)
{
struct obj *obj;
obj = list_entry(head->next, struct obj, list);
atomic_inc(&obj->refcnt);
return obj;
spin_lock(&global_list_lock);
obj = obj_list_peek(&global_list);
spin_unlock(&global_list_lock);
if (obj) {
obj->ops->poke(obj);
if (atomic_dec_and_test(&obj->refcnt))
obj_destroy(obj);
}
}
return NULL;
}
void obj_poke(void)
{
struct obj *obj;
void obj_timeout(struct obj *obj)
{
spin_lock(&global_list_lock);
obj_list_del(obj);
spin_unlock(&global_list_lock);
spin_lock(&global_list_lock);
obj = obj_list_peek(&global_list);
spin_unlock(&global_list_lock);
if (obj) {
obj->ops->poke(obj);
if (atomic_dec_and_test(&obj->refcnt))
obj_destroy(obj);
}
}
void obj_timeout(struct obj *obj)
{
spin_lock(&global_list_lock);
obj_list_del(obj);
spin_unlock(&global_list_lock);
.. note::
if (atomic_dec_and_test(&obj->refcnt))
obj_destroy(obj);
}
(This is a simplification of the ARP queue management in the
generic neighbour discover code of the networking. Olaf Kirch
found a bug wrt. memory barriers in kfree_skb() that exposed
the atomic_t memory barrier requirements quite clearly.)
This is a simplification of the ARP queue management in the generic
neighbour discover code of the networking. Olaf Kirch found a bug wrt.
memory barriers in kfree_skb() that exposed the atomic_t memory barrier
requirements quite clearly.
Given the above scheme, it must be the case that the obj->active
update done by the obj list deletion be visible to other processors
@ -383,7 +394,7 @@ before the atomic counter decrement is performed.
Otherwise, the counter could fall to zero, yet obj->active would still
be set, thus triggering the assertion in obj_destroy(). The error
sequence looks like this:
sequence looks like this::
cpu 0 cpu 1
obj_poke() obj_timeout()
@ -420,6 +431,10 @@ same scheme.
Another note is that the atomic_t operations returning values are
extremely slow on an old 386.
Atomic Bitmask
==============
We will now cover the atomic bitmask operations. You will find that
their SMP and memory barrier semantics are similar in shape and scope
to the atomic_t ops above.
@ -427,7 +442,7 @@ to the atomic_t ops above.
Native atomic bit operations are defined to operate on objects aligned
to the size of an "unsigned long" C data type, and are least of that
size. The endianness of the bits within each "unsigned long" are the
native endianness of the cpu.
native endianness of the cpu. ::
void set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
void clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
@ -437,7 +452,7 @@ These routines set, clear, and change, respectively, the bit number
indicated by "nr" on the bit mask pointed to by "ADDR".
They must execute atomically, yet there are no implicit memory barrier
semantics required of these interfaces.
semantics required of these interfaces. ::
int test_and_set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
int test_and_clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
@ -466,7 +481,7 @@ must provide explicit memory barrier semantics around their execution.
All memory operations before the atomic bit operation call must be
made visible globally before the atomic bit operation is made visible.
Likewise, the atomic bit operation must be visible globally before any
subsequent memory operation is made visible. For example:
subsequent memory operation is made visible. For example::
obj->dead = 1;
if (test_and_set_bit(0, &obj->flags))
@ -479,7 +494,7 @@ done by test_and_set_bit() becomes visible. Likewise, the atomic
memory operation done by test_and_set_bit() must become visible before
"obj->killed = 1;" is visible.
Finally there is the basic operation:
Finally there is the basic operation::
int test_bit(unsigned long nr, __const__ volatile unsigned long *addr);
@ -488,13 +503,13 @@ pointed to by "addr".
If explicit memory barriers are required around {set,clear}_bit() (which do
not return a value, and thus does not need to provide memory barrier
semantics), two interfaces are provided:
semantics), two interfaces are provided::
void smp_mb__before_atomic(void);
void smp_mb__after_atomic(void);
They are used as follows, and are akin to their atomic_t operation
brothers:
brothers::
/* All memory operations before this call will
* be globally visible before the clear_bit().
@ -511,7 +526,7 @@ There are two special bitops with lock barrier semantics (acquire/release,
same as spinlocks). These operate in the same way as their non-_lock/unlock
postfixed variants, except that they are to provide acquire/release semantics,
respectively. This means they can be used for bit_spin_trylock and
bit_spin_unlock type operations without specifying any more barriers.
bit_spin_unlock type operations without specifying any more barriers. ::
int test_and_set_bit_lock(unsigned long nr, unsigned long *addr);
void clear_bit_unlock(unsigned long nr, unsigned long *addr);
@ -526,7 +541,7 @@ provided. They are used in contexts where some other higher-level SMP
locking scheme is being used to protect the bitmask, and thus less
expensive non-atomic operations may be used in the implementation.
They have names similar to the above bitmask operation interfaces,
except that two underscores are prefixed to the interface name.
except that two underscores are prefixed to the interface name. ::
void __set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
void __clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr);
@ -542,9 +557,11 @@ The routines xchg() and cmpxchg() must provide the same exact
memory-barrier semantics as the atomic and bit operations returning
values.
Note: If someone wants to use xchg(), cmpxchg() and their variants,
linux/atomic.h should be included rather than asm/cmpxchg.h, unless
the code is in arch/* and can take care of itself.
.. note::
If someone wants to use xchg(), cmpxchg() and their variants,
linux/atomic.h should be included rather than asm/cmpxchg.h, unless the
code is in arch/* and can take care of itself.
Spinlocks and rwlocks have memory barrier expectations as well.
The rule to follow is simple:
@ -558,7 +575,7 @@ The rule to follow is simple:
Which finally brings us to _atomic_dec_and_lock(). There is an
architecture-neutral version implemented in lib/dec_and_lock.c,
but most platforms will wish to optimize this in assembler.
but most platforms will wish to optimize this in assembler. ::
int _atomic_dec_and_lock(atomic_t *atomic, spinlock_t *lock);
@ -573,7 +590,7 @@ sure the spinlock operation is globally visible before any
subsequent memory operation.
We can demonstrate this operation more clearly if we define
an abstract atomic operation:
an abstract atomic operation::
long cas(long *mem, long old, long new);
@ -584,48 +601,48 @@ an abstract atomic operation:
3) Regardless, the current value at "mem" is returned.
As an example usage, here is what an atomic counter update
might look like:
might look like::
void example_atomic_inc(long *counter)
{
long old, new, ret;
void example_atomic_inc(long *counter)
{
long old, new, ret;
while (1) {
old = *counter;
new = old + 1;
while (1) {
old = *counter;
new = old + 1;
ret = cas(counter, old, new);
if (ret == old)
break;
}
}
Let's use cas() in order to build a pseudo-C atomic_dec_and_lock():
int _atomic_dec_and_lock(atomic_t *atomic, spinlock_t *lock)
{
long old, new, ret;
int went_to_zero;
went_to_zero = 0;
while (1) {
old = atomic_read(atomic);
new = old - 1;
if (new == 0) {
went_to_zero = 1;
spin_lock(lock);
}
ret = cas(atomic, old, new);
if (ret == old)
break;
if (went_to_zero) {
spin_unlock(lock);
went_to_zero = 0;
ret = cas(counter, old, new);
if (ret == old)
break;
}
}
return went_to_zero;
}
Let's use cas() in order to build a pseudo-C atomic_dec_and_lock()::
int _atomic_dec_and_lock(atomic_t *atomic, spinlock_t *lock)
{
long old, new, ret;
int went_to_zero;
went_to_zero = 0;
while (1) {
old = atomic_read(atomic);
new = old - 1;
if (new == 0) {
went_to_zero = 1;
spin_lock(lock);
}
ret = cas(atomic, old, new);
if (ret == old)
break;
if (went_to_zero) {
spin_unlock(lock);
went_to_zero = 0;
}
}
return went_to_zero;
}
Now, as far as memory barriers go, as long as spin_lock()
strictly orders all subsequent memory operations (including
@ -635,6 +652,7 @@ Said another way, _atomic_dec_and_lock() must guarantee that
a counter dropping to zero is never made visible before the
spinlock being acquired.
Note that this also means that for the case where the counter
is not dropping to zero, there are no memory ordering
requirements.
.. note::
Note that this also means that for the case where the counter is not
dropping to zero, there are no memory ordering requirements.

10
Documentation/core-api/conf.py Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
# -*- coding: utf-8; mode: python -*-
project = "Core-API Documentation"
tags.add("subproject")
latex_documents = [
('index', 'core-api.tex', project,
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More